summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2010-06-18 23:21:28 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2010-06-18 23:21:28 +0000
commit0dfdf5c49b160d464b74a9cae8882ea81cc47878 (patch)
treebdf5cdba055386a23c7c34606b0ac3cde619f5de
parent9af4aa84209bad3ca4dab9a48aa1922d2f748de2 (diff)
new latex package jmlr 1.06 (18jun10)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@19046 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/CHANGES58
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/INSTALL69
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/README67
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.html4505
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.tex1455
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual0x.pngbin0 -> 487 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual1x.pngbin0 -> 573 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual2x.pngbin0 -> 480 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual3x.pngbin0 -> 576 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr.pdfbin0 -> 683588 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo-gray.pngbin0 -> 2456 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo.pngbin0 -> 2241 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/jmlrbook-sample.tex233
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.bib19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.tex83
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.bib19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.tex60
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.bib19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.tex51
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.bib19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.tex51
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/proceedings-sample.tex67
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle-gray.pngbin0 -> 1416 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle.jpgbin0 -> 6743 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes-gray.pngbin0 -> 3902 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes.pngbin0 -> 6295 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square-gray.pngbin0 -> 157 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square.pngbin0 -> 157 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/teximage.tex4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.bib19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.tex752
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlrwcp-sample.tex752
-rwxr-xr-xMaster/texmf-dist/scripts/jmlr/makejmlrbook840
-rwxr-xr-xMaster/texmf-dist/scripts/jmlr/makejmlrbook.bat3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/jmlr/jmlr.dtx4698
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/jmlr/jmlr.ins33
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/jmlr/jmlr.cls969
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/jmlr/jmlrbook.cls775
-rwxr-xr-xMaster/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check2
-rw-r--r--Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-publishers.tlpsrc1
-rw-r--r--Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/jmlr.tlpsrc0
41 files changed, 15622 insertions, 1 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/CHANGES b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/CHANGES
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9a42b677437
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/CHANGES
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+v1.06:
+
+ jmlr.cls
+
+ * Added tablecaptiontop and tablecaptionbottom class options
+
+v1.05:
+
+ jmlrbook.cls
+
+ * Added \productioneditors
+
+v1.04:
+
+ * Added Perl script makejmlrbook
+
+ jmlrbook.cls
+
+ * Added patch to fix references in print mode
+
+ * Added code to work with makejmlrbook
+
+ jmlr.cls
+
+ * Added code to work with makejmlrbook
+
+v1.03:
+ jmlrbook.cls
+
+ * Added patch to combnat
+
+ jmlr.cls
+
+ * Added \editors, \editorname and \editorsname
+
+v1.02:
+ jmlrbook.cls:
+
+ * Added \issue
+
+ jmlr.cls
+
+ * Added \jmlrissue
+
+v1.01 :
+
+ jmlrbook.cls:
+
+ * added \importpaper
+
+ * added \titlebody, \SetTitleElement and \IfTitleElement to
+ make it easier to customise the front page of the book.
+
+ jmlr.cls:
+
+ * fixed the last page anchor.
+
+v1.0 : Initial release
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/INSTALL b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/INSTALL
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..805c257c5b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/INSTALL
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+INSTALLATION
+
+If you have downloaded the jmlr bundle using the TeX Directory
+Structure (TDS), that is you have downloaded the archive
+jmlr.tds.zip containing doc, tex and source directories, you need to
+follow the "Installing from TDS" instructions below.
+
+If you have downloaded the following files:
+
+jmlr.dtx
+jmlr.ins
+
+You need to follow the "Installing from DTX and INS" instructions
+below.
+
+For further information on installing LaTeX packages see:
+
+http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=installthings
+
+INSTALLING FROM TDS
+===================
+
+Files in tex and doc directories should go in the corresponding
+TEXMF directories (for example, /usr/share/texmf-local/ or
+C:\localtexmf\).
+
+*Remember to refresh TeX's database*
+
+Example (on UNIX like systems):
+
+unzip jmlr.tds.zip -d ~/texmf/
+texhash ~/texmf/
+
+Move the makejmlrbook Perl script from scripts/jmlr/ to somewhere
+on your path. If you are using Windows, you will also need to
+move makejmlrbook.bat to the same location.
+
+INSTALLING FROM DTX AND INS
+===========================
+
+Run LaTeX on jmlr.ins to generate jmlr.cls and jmlrbook.cls:
+
+latex jmlr.ins
+
+To create the documentation (jmlr.pdf):
+
+pdflatex jmlr.dtx
+makeindex -s gind.ist jmlr.idx
+makeindex -s gglo.ist -o jmlr.gls jmlr.glo
+pdflatex jmlr.dtx
+pdflatex jmlr.dtx
+
+If TEXMF denotes the base directory of your local TeX installation (e.g.
+/usr/share/texmf-local/ or C:\localtexmf\) then create the following
+directories (if they don't already exist):
+
+TEXMF/doc/latex/jmlr
+TEXMF/tex/latex/jmlr
+
+Move the documentation to TEXMF/doc/latex/jmlr/
+
+Move jmlr.cls and jmlrbook.cls to TEXMF/tex/latex/jmlr/
+
+*Remember to refresh TeX's database*
+
+Move the makejmlrbook Perl script to somewhere on your path. If
+you are using Windows, you will also need to move makejmlrbook.bat
+to the same location.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/README
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2dce9e7f235
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/README
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+LaTeX Class : jmlr bundle v1.06
+
+Last Modified : 2010-06-17
+
+Author : Nicola L. C. Talbot
+
+This bundle provides:
+
+ * jmlr class
+ * jmlrbook class
+ * makejmlrbook Perl script
+
+The jmlr class is a LaTeX2e class for articles for the Journal of
+Machine Learning Research (JMLR) or for the JMLR Workshop and
+Conference Proceedings (JMLR W&CP). It is designed as a replacement
+for both jmlr2e.sty and jmlrwcp2e.sty.
+
+The jmlrbook class is a LaTeX2e class that can be used to combine
+articles written using the jmlr class into a book. The jmlrbook
+class uses the combine class and the hyperref package to produce
+either a colour hyperlinked book for on-line viewing or a greyscale
+nonhyperlinked book for printing.
+
+The makejmlrbook Perl script can be used to create the hyperlinked and
+nonhyperlinked PDFs of a document using the jmlrbook class. It can also
+create a set of HTML files that list the included papers with links
+to their abstracts and the individual articles as PDFs.
+
+INSTALLATION
+
+See INSTALL file for installation instructions.
+
+REQUIREMENTS
+
+jmlr class requirements:
+
+ KOMA-Script
+ xcolor
+ amsmath
+ amssymb
+ natbib
+ graphicx
+ url
+ algorithm2e
+
+jmlrbook class requirements:
+
+ jmlr
+ combine
+ hyperref
+ xkeyval
+ combnat
+ setspace
+
+makejmlrbook Perl script requirements:
+
+ Perl
+ TeX4ht
+
+LICENCE
+
+This material is subject to the LaTeX Project Public License.
+See http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/licenses.lppl.html
+for the details of that license.
+
+Author's home page: http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..31e5052a65e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.html
@@ -0,0 +1,4505 @@
+<a
+ id="top"></a><?xml version="1.0" encoding="iso-8859-1" ?>
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
+ "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<!--http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd-->
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+>
+<head><title>LaTeX2&#x03B5;Classes for the Journal of Machine Learning Research</title>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1" />
+<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.cse.ohio-state.edu/~gurari/TeX4ht/)" />
+<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.cse.ohio-state.edu/~gurari/TeX4ht/)" />
+<!-- xhtml,fn-in,css-in -->
+<meta name="src" content="jmlr-manual.tex" />
+<meta name="date" content="2010-06-17 20:52:00" />
+
+<style type="text/css">
+<!--
+
+/* start css.sty */
+.cmmi-10{font-style: italic;}
+.ecrm-1728{font-size:170%;}
+.cmmi-12x-x-144{font-size:172%;font-style: italic;}
+.ecrm-1200{font-size:120%;}
+.cmsy-8{font-size:80%;}
+.ectt-1200{font-size:120%; font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecrm-0900{font-size:90%;}
+.ecrm-0800{font-size:80%;}
+.ecss-0800{font-size:80%; font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;}
+.ectt-0900{font-size:90%; font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;}
+.ectt-0800{font-size:80%; font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ecti-0800{font-size:80%; font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}
+p.noindent { text-indent: 0em }
+td p.noindent { text-indent: 0em; margin-top:0em; }
+p.nopar { text-indent: 0em; }
+p.indent{ text-indent: 1.5em }
+@media print {div.crosslinks {visibility:hidden;}}
+a img { border-top: 0; border-left: 0; border-right: 0; }
+center { margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; }
+td center { margin-top:0em; margin-bottom:0em; }
+.Canvas { position:relative; }
+img.math{vertical-align:middle;}
+li p.indent { text-indent: 0em }
+li p:first-child{ margin-top:0em; }
+li p:last-child, li div:last-child { margin-bottom:0.5em; }
+li p~ul:last-child, li p~ol:last-child{ margin-bottom:0.5em; }
+.enumerate1 {list-style-type:decimal;}
+.enumerate2 {list-style-type:lower-alpha;}
+.enumerate3 {list-style-type:lower-roman;}
+.enumerate4 {list-style-type:upper-alpha;}
+div.newtheorem { margin-bottom: 2em; margin-top: 2em;}
+.obeylines-h,.obeylines-v {white-space: nowrap; }
+div.obeylines-v p { margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; }
+.overline{ text-decoration:overline; }
+.overline img{ border-top: 1px solid black; }
+td.displaylines {text-align:center; white-space:nowrap;}
+.centerline {text-align:center;}
+.rightline {text-align:right;}
+div.verbatim {font-family: monospace; white-space: nowrap; text-align:left; clear:both; }
+.fbox {padding-left:3.0pt; padding-right:3.0pt; text-indent:0pt; border:solid black 0.4pt; }
+div.fbox {display:table}
+div.center div.fbox {text-align:center; clear:both; padding-left:3.0pt; padding-right:3.0pt; text-indent:0pt; border:solid black 0.4pt; }
+div.minipage{width:100%;}
+div.center, div.center div.center {text-align: center; margin-left:1em; margin-right:1em;}
+div.center div {text-align: left;}
+div.flushright, div.flushright div.flushright {text-align: right;}
+div.flushright div {text-align: left;}
+div.flushleft {text-align: left;}
+.underline{ text-decoration:underline; }
+.underline img{ border-bottom: 1px solid black; margin-bottom:1pt; }
+.framebox-c, .framebox-l, .framebox-r { padding-left:3.0pt; padding-right:3.0pt; text-indent:0pt; border:solid black 0.4pt; }
+.framebox-c {text-align:center;}
+.framebox-l {text-align:left;}
+.framebox-r {text-align:right;}
+span.thank-mark{ vertical-align: super }
+span.footnote-mark sup.textsuperscript, span.footnote-mark a sup.textsuperscript{ font-size:80%; }
+div.footnotes{border-top:solid 1px black; border-bottom:solid 1px black; padding-bottom:1ex; padding-top:0.5ex; margin-right:15%; margin-top:2ex; font-style:italic; font-size:85%;}
+div.footnotes p{margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-indent:0;}
+div.tabular, div.center div.tabular {text-align: center; margin-top:0.5em; margin-bottom:0.5em; }
+table.tabular td p{margin-top:0em;}
+table.tabular {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+td p:first-child{ margin-top:0em; }
+td p:last-child{ margin-bottom:0em; }
+div.td00{ margin-left:0pt; margin-right:0pt; }
+div.td01{ margin-left:0pt; margin-right:5pt; }
+div.td10{ margin-left:5pt; margin-right:0pt; }
+div.td11{ margin-left:5pt; margin-right:5pt; }
+table[rules] {border-left:solid black 0.4pt; border-right:solid black 0.4pt; }
+td.td00{ padding-left:0pt; padding-right:0pt; }
+td.td01{ padding-left:0pt; padding-right:5pt; }
+td.td10{ padding-left:5pt; padding-right:0pt; }
+td.td11{ padding-left:5pt; padding-right:5pt; }
+table[rules] {border-left:solid black 0.4pt; border-right:solid black 0.4pt; }
+.hline hr, .cline hr{ height : 1px; margin:0px; }
+.tabbing-right {text-align:right;}
+span.TEX {letter-spacing: -0.125em; }
+span.TEX span.E{ position:relative;top:0.5ex;left:-0.0417em;}
+a span.TEX span.E {text-decoration: none; }
+span.LATEX span.A{ position:relative; top:-0.5ex; left:-0.4em; font-size:85%;}
+span.LATEX span.TEX{ position:relative; left: -0.4em; }
+div.float, div.figure {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+div.float img {text-align:center;}
+div.figure img {text-align:center;}
+.marginpar {width:20%; float:right; text-align:left; margin-left:auto; margin-top:0.5em; font-size:85%; text-decoration:underline;}
+.marginpar p{margin-top:0.4em; margin-bottom:0.4em;}
+table.equation {width:100%;}
+.equation td{text-align:center; }
+td.equation { margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; }
+td.equation-label { width:5%; text-align:center; }
+td.eqnarray4 { width:5%; white-space: normal; }
+td.eqnarray2 { width:5%; }
+table.eqnarray-star, table.eqnarray {width:100%;}
+div.eqnarray{text-align:center;}
+div.array {text-align:center;}
+div.pmatrix {text-align:center;}
+table.pmatrix {width:100%;}
+span.pmatrix img{vertical-align:middle;}
+div.pmatrix {text-align:center;}
+table.pmatrix {width:100%;}
+span.bar-css {text-decoration:overline;}
+img.cdots{vertical-align:middle;}
+.partToc a, .partToc, .likepartToc a, .likepartToc {line-height: 200%; font-weight:bold; font-size:110%;}
+.index-item, .index-subitem, .index-subsubitem {display:block}
+div.caption {text-indent:-2em; margin-left:3em; margin-right:1em; text-align:left;}
+div.caption span.id{font-weight: bold; white-space: nowrap; }
+h1.partHead{text-align: center}
+p.bibitem { text-indent: -2em; margin-left: 2em; margin-top:0.6em; margin-bottom:0.6em; }
+p.bibitem-p { text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 2em; margin-top:0.6em; margin-bottom:0.6em; }
+.paragraphHead, .likeparagraphHead { margin-top:2em; font-weight: bold;}
+.subparagraphHead, .likesubparagraphHead { font-weight: bold;}
+.quote {margin-bottom:0.25em; margin-top:0.25em; margin-left:1em; margin-right:1em; text-align:justify;}
+.verse{white-space:nowrap; margin-left:2em}
+div.maketitle {text-align:center;}
+h2.titleHead{text-align:center;}
+div.maketitle{ margin-bottom: 2em; }
+div.author, div.date {text-align:center;}
+div.thanks{text-align:left; margin-left:10%; font-size:85%; font-style:italic; }
+.quotation {margin-bottom:0.25em; margin-top:0.25em; margin-left:1em; }
+.abstract p {margin-left:5%; margin-right:5%;}
+div.abstract {width:100%;}
+table.multicols { width:100%; margin-left:1em; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; }
+.equation td{text-align:center; }
+.equation-star td{text-align:center; }
+table.equation-star { width:100%; }
+table.equation { width:100%; }
+table.align, table.alignat, table.xalignat, table.xxalignat, table.flalign {width:100%; margin-left:5%; white-space: nowrap;}
+table.align-star, table.alignat-star, table.xalignat-star, table.flalign-star {margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; white-space: nowrap;}
+td.align-label { width:5%; text-align:center; }
+td.align-odd { text-align:right; padding-right:0.3em;}
+td.align-even { text-align:left; padding-right:0.6em;}
+table.multline, table.multline-star {width:100%;}
+td.gather {text-align:center; }
+table.gather {width:100%;}
+div.gather-star {text-align:center;}
+div.important { background-color:red; }
+/* end css.sty */
+
+
+-->
+</style>
+</head><body
+>
+ <div class="maketitle">
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<h2 class="titleHead"><span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>2&#x03B5;&#x00A0;Classes for the Journal of Machine
+Learning Research</h2>
+ <div class="author" ><span
+class="ecrm-1200">Nicola L. C. Talbot</span>
+<br /><a
+href="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/" class="url" ><span
+class="ectt-1200">http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/</span></a></div><br />
+<div class="date" ><span
+class="ecrm-1200">2010-06-17 (version 1.06)</span></div>
+ </div>
+ <h3 class="likesectionHead"><a
+ id="x1-1000"></a>Contents</h3>
+ <div class="tableofcontents">
+ <span class="sectionToc" >1 <a
+href="#x1-20001" id="QQ2-1-2">Introduction</a></span>
+<br /> <span class="sectionToc" >2 <a
+href="#x1-30002" id="QQ2-1-3">Required Packages</a></span>
+<br /> <span class="sectionToc" >3 <a
+href="#x1-40003" id="QQ2-1-4">Guidelines for Article Authors</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >3.1 <a
+href="#x1-50003.1" id="QQ2-1-5">Title Information</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >3.2 <a
+href="#x1-60003.2" id="QQ2-1-6">Font Changing Commands</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >3.3 <a
+href="#x1-70003.3" id="QQ2-1-7">Structure</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >3.4 <a
+href="#x1-80003.4" id="QQ2-1-8">Citations and Bibliography</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >3.5 <a
+href="#x1-90003.5" id="QQ2-1-9">Figures and Tables</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span class="subsubsectionToc" >3.5.1 <a
+href="#x1-100003.5.1" id="QQ2-1-10">Sub-Figures and Sub-Tables</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >3.6 <a
+href="#x1-110003.6" id="QQ2-1-11">Algorithms</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >3.7 <a
+href="#x1-120003.7" id="QQ2-1-12">Description Lists</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >3.8 <a
+href="#x1-130003.8" id="QQ2-1-13">Theorems, Lemmas etc</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >3.9 <a
+href="#x1-140003.9" id="QQ2-1-14">Cross-Referencing</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >3.10 <a
+href="#x1-150003.10" id="QQ2-1-15">Mathematics</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >3.11 <a
+href="#x1-160003.11" id="QQ2-1-17">Color vs Grayscale</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >3.12 <a
+href="#x1-170003.12" id="QQ2-1-18">Where To Go For Help</a></span>
+<br /> <span class="sectionToc" >4 <a
+href="#x1-180004" id="QQ2-1-19">Guidelines for Production Editors</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >4.1 <a
+href="#x1-190004.1" id="QQ2-1-20"><span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>Class Options</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >4.2 <a
+href="#x1-200004.2" id="QQ2-1-21">The Preamble</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >4.3 <a
+href="#x1-210004.3" id="QQ2-1-22">Main Book Commands</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span class="subsubsectionToc" >4.3.1 <a
+href="#x1-220004.3.1" id="QQ2-1-23">Cross-Referencing</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >4.4 <a
+href="#x1-230004.4" id="QQ2-1-24">Altering the Layout of the Main Title Page</a></span>
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >4.5 <a
+href="#x1-240004.5" id="QQ2-1-25">Potential Pitfalls</a></span>
+
+
+
+<br /> &#x00A0;<span class="subsectionToc" >4.6 <a
+href="#x1-250004.6" id="QQ2-1-26">Creating the Book Using <span
+class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span></a></span>
+<br /> <span class="sectionToc" ><a
+href="#Q1-1-27">Index</a></span>
+ </div>
+<!--l. 30--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+ <h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">1 </span> <a
+ id="x1-20001"></a>Introduction</h3>
+<!--l. 32--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class is for articles that need to be formatted according to the Journal of
+Machine Learning Research style. This class is based on the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-2001"></a> and <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrwcp2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-2002"></a>
+packages but has been adapted to enable it to work better with the <span
+class="ecss-1000">combine</span><a
+ id="dx1-2003"></a> class to
+collate the articles into a book. <a
+href="#x1-40003">§3 </a><a
+href="#x1-40003">Guidelines for Article Authors<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:jmlr --></a> describes how to use
+the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class.
+</p><!--l. 39--><p class="indent" > The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class is for combining JMLR articles into a book. This class uses
+<span
+class="ecss-1000">combine</span><a
+ id="dx1-2004"></a> and <span
+class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span><a
+ id="dx1-2005"></a>, which are troublesome enough on their own but together are
+quite fragile. The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class redefines some internals to get <span
+class="ecss-1000">combine </span>and <span
+class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span>
+to work together but some packages (e.g.&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">subfig</span><a
+ id="dx1-2006"></a> and <span
+class="ecss-1000">pdfpages</span><a
+ id="dx1-2007"></a>) are likely to
+mess everything up and cause errors. This is why the guidelines to authors are
+fairly stringent and why <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>will give an error message if certain packages are
+loaded.<span class="footnote-mark"><a
+href="#fn1x0" id="fn1x0-bk"><sup class="textsuperscript">1</sup></a></span><a
+ id="x1-2008f1"></a>
+The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class works best with PDF<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;so authors should ensure that their
+articles can compile with PDF<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>. <a
+href="#x1-180004">§4 </a><a
+href="#x1-180004">Guidelines for Production Editors<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:jmlrbook --></a> describes
+how to use the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class.
+</p><!--l. 56--><p class="indent" > The <span
+class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a
+ id="dx1-2015"></a> Perl script can be used to make a book that uses the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook</span>
+class. In addition to creating the print and online versions of the book, it will
+compile the individual articles, running Bib<span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;where necessary, and create a
+set of HTML files containing a list of all the articles imported into the book
+along with links to the abstracts and PDFs of the individual articles. <a
+href="#x1-250004.6">§4.6
+</a><a
+href="#x1-250004.6">Creating the Book Using <span
+class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><!--tex4ht:ref: sec:makejmlrbook --></a> describes how to use the <span
+class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a
+ id="dx1-2016"></a>
+application.
+</p><!--l. 65--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 65--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2 </span> <a
+ id="x1-30002"></a>Required Packages</h3>
+<!--l. 67--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class is based on the <span
+class="ecss-1000">scrartcl</span><a
+ id="dx1-3001"></a> class and loads the following packages:
+<span
+class="ecss-1000">amsmath</span><a
+ id="dx1-3002"></a>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">amssymb</span><a
+ id="dx1-3003"></a>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">natbib</span><a
+ id="dx1-3004"></a>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">url</span><a
+ id="dx1-3005"></a>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">graphicx</span><a
+ id="dx1-3006"></a> and <span
+class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-3007"></a>. Note that unlike the
+<span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-3008"></a> and <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrwcp2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-3009"></a> packages, this class file does not load the obsolete <span
+class="ecss-1000">epsfig</span><a
+ id="dx1-3010"></a>
+package.
+</p><!--l. 73--><p class="indent" > The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class additionally loads the <span
+class="ecss-1000">combine</span><a
+ id="dx1-3011"></a> class and the following packages:
+<span
+class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span><a
+ id="dx1-3012"></a>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">xkeyval</span><a
+ id="dx1-3013"></a>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">combnat</span><a
+ id="dx1-3014"></a> and <span
+class="ecss-1000">setspace</span><a
+ id="dx1-3015"></a>.
+</p><!--l. 77--><p class="indent" > The <span
+class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a
+ id="dx1-3016"></a> script requires Perl, <span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;and <span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span>4ht.
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 79--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 79--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3 </span> <a
+ id="x1-40003"></a>Guidelines for Article Authors</h3>
+<!--l. 82--><p class="noindent" >Article authors should use the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class. This class comes with example files
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">jmlr-sample.tex </span>and <span
+class="ectt-1000">jmlrwcp-sample.tex</span>, which can be used as templates.
+</p><!--l. 86--><p class="indent" > The following class options are available:
+ </p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">nowcp</span><a
+ id="dx1-4001"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">The article is for the Journal of Machine Learning Research (default).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">wcp</span><a
+ id="dx1-4002"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">The article is for JMLR Workshop and Conference Proceedings.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">color</span><a
+ id="dx1-4003"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Color version (see <a
+href="#x1-160003.11">§3.11 </a><a
+href="#x1-160003.11">Color vs Grayscale<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:color --></a>).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">gray</span><a
+ id="dx1-4004"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Grayscale version (see <a
+href="#x1-160003.11">§3.11 </a><a
+href="#x1-160003.11">Color vs Grayscale<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:color --></a>).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">tablecaptiontop</span><a
+ id="dx1-4005"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">in a <span
+class="ecss-1000">table</span><a
+ id="dx1-4006"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4007"></a> environment, <span
+class="ectt-1000">\floatconts</span><a
+ id="dx1-4008"></a> puts the caption at the top.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">tablecaptionbottom</span><a
+ id="dx1-4009"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">in a <span
+class="ecss-1000">table</span><a
+ id="dx1-4010"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4011"></a> environment, <span
+class="ectt-1000">\floatconts</span><a
+ id="dx1-4012"></a> puts the caption at the
+ bottom.</dd></dl>
+<!--l. 103--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 103--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.1 </span> <a
+ id="x1-50003.1"></a>Title Information</h4>
+<!--l. 105--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class uses different syntax from <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-5001"></a> and <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrwcp2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-5002"></a> to specify the title
+information. In particular, it doesn&#8217;t define <span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrheading </span>and <span
+class="ectt-1000">\ShortHeading</span>. Instead,
+the following commands should be used:
+</p><!--l. 110--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\jmlrvolume</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5003"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrvolume{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">number</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 112--><p class="noindent" >
+This specifies the volume number. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-1">
+\jmlrvolume{2}
+</div>
+<!--l. 116--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 118--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\jmlryear</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5004"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlryear{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">year</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 120--><p class="noindent" >
+This specifies the year. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-2">
+\jmlryear{2010}
+</div>
+<!--l. 124--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 126--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\jmlrsubmitted</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5005"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrsubmitted{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">date</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 128--><p class="noindent" >
+This specifies the submission date.
+</p><!--l. 131--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\jmlrpublished</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5006"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrpublished{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">date</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 133--><p class="noindent" >
+This specifies the publication date.
+</p><!--l. 136--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\jmlrworkshop</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5007"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrworkshop{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 138--><p class="noindent" >
+This specifies the workshop title (for use with the <span
+class="ecss-1000">wcp</span><a
+ id="dx1-5008"></a> class option).
+</p><!--l. 142--><p class="indent" > The title information is specified using the commands described below. These
+commands should typically go in the preamble. As with most class files, The title itself
+is produced using
+</p><!--l. 145--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\maketitle</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5009"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\maketitle </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 147--><p class="noindent" >
+This command should go after <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\begin{document}</span></span></span>. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-3">
+\begin{document}
+&#x00A0;<br />\maketitle
+</div>
+<!--l. 152--><p class="nopar" > Before <span
+class="ectt-1000">\maketitle</span>, you must specify the title information using the following
+commands:
+</p><!--l. 156--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\title</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5010"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\title[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 158--><p class="noindent" >
+This specifies the article&#8217;s title. A short title for the page header can be supplied via the
+optional argument <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span>.
+</p><!--l. 162--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\editor</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5011"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\editor{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">name</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 164--><p class="noindent" >
+This specifies the editor&#8217;s name. If there is more than one editor, use:
+</p><!--l. 167--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\editors</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5012"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\editors{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">names</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 169--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 171--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\author</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5013"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\author{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">author specs</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 173--><p class="noindent" >
+This specifies the author. The specifications <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">author specs</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>are a bit different to <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-5014"></a>
+and <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrwcp2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-5015"></a>. Use
+</p><!--l. 176--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\Name</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5016"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\Name{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">author&#8217;s name</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 178--><p class="noindent" >
+to specify the author&#8217;s name. Note that if the surname contains a space it must be
+grouped (enclosed in braces {}). Similarly if the initial letter of each forename is a
+diacritic it must be grouped. (See below for examples.)
+</p><!--l. 183--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\Email</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5017"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\Email{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">author&#8217;s email</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 185--><p class="noindent" >
+This specifies the author&#8217;s email address. It should only be used within the argument to
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">\author</span>.
+</p><!--l. 189--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\and</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5018"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\and </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 191--><p class="noindent" >
+This should be used to separate two authors with the same address.
+</p><!--l. 194--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\AND</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5019"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\AND </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 196--><p class="noindent" >
+This should be used to separate authors with different addresses.
+</p><!--l. 199--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\\</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5020"></a> <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\\</span></span></span> </div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 201--><p class="noindent" >
+This should be used before an author&#8217;s address or between authors with the same
+address where there are more that two authors.
+</p><!--l. 205--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\addr</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-5021"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\addr </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 207--><p class="noindent" >
+This should be used at the start of the address.
+</p><!--l. 210--><p class="indent" >
+
+
+
+ </p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">Example 1</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Two authors with the same address:
+
+
+
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-4">
+ \author{\Name{Jane&#x00A0;Doe}&#x00A0;\Email{abc@sample.com}\and
+ &#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\Name{John&#x00A0;{Basey&#x00A0;Fisher}}&#x00A0;\Email{xyz@sample.com}\\
+ &#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\addr&#x00A0;Address}
+</div>
+ <!--l. 216--><p class="nopar" > In this example, the second author has a space in his surname so the surname
+ needs to be grouped.
+ </p></dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">Example 2</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Three authors with the same address:
+
+
+
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-5">
+ \author{\Name{Fred&#x00A0;Arnold&#x00A0;{de&#x00A0;la&#x00A0;Cour}}&#x00A0;\Email{an1@sample.com}\\
+ &#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\Name{Jack&#x00A0;Jones}&#x00A0;\Email{an3@sample.com}\\
+ &#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\Name{{\&#8217;E}louise&#x00A0;{\&#8217;E}abhla&#x00A0;Finchley}&#x00A0;\Email{an2@sample.com}\\
+ &#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\addr&#x00A0;Address}
+</div>
+ <!--l. 226--><p class="nopar" > In this example, the third author has an accent on her forename initials so
+ grouping is required.
+ </p></dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">Example 3</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Authors with a different address:
+
+
+
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-6">
+ \author{\Name{John&#x00A0;Smith}&#x00A0;\Email{abc@sample.com}\\
+ &#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\addr&#x00A0;Address&#x00A0;1
+ &#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\AND
+ &#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\Name{May&#x00A0;Brown}&#x00A0;\Email{xyz@sample.com}\\
+ &#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\addr&#x00A0;Address&#x00A0;2
+ &#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;}
+</div>
+ <!--l. 238--><p class="nopar" ></p></dd></dl>
+<!--l. 241--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 241--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.2 </span> <a
+ id="x1-60003.2"></a>Font Changing Commands</h4>
+<!--l. 243--><p class="noindent" >Use the <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>2<span
+class="cmmi-10">&#x03B5;</span>&#x00A0;font changing commands, such as <span
+class="ectt-1000">\bfseries </span>or <span
+class="ectt-1000">\textbf{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">text</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}</span>,
+rather than the obsolete <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>2.09 commands, such as <span
+class="ectt-1000">\bf</span>.
+</p><!--l. 247--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\url</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-6001"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\url{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">address</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 249--><p class="noindent" >
+This will typeset <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">address</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>in a typewriter font. Special characters, such as <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">~</span></span></span>, are
+correctly displayed. Example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-7">
+\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}
+</div>
+<!--l. 254--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 256--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\mailto</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-6002"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\mailto{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">email address</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 258--><p class="noindent" >
+This will typeset the given email address in a typewriter font. Note that this is not the
+same as <span
+class="ectt-1000">\Email</span>, which should only be used in the argument of <span
+class="ectt-1000">\author</span>.
+</p><!--l. 263--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 263--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.3 </span> <a
+ id="x1-70003.3"></a>Structure</h4>
+<!--l. 265--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">abstract</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-7001"></a><a
+ id="dx1-7002"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\begin{abstract}</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">text</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="ectt-1000">\end{abstract} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 269--><p class="noindent" >
+The abstract text should be displayed using the <span
+class="ecss-1000">abstract </span>environment.
+</p><!--l. 273--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">keywords</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-7003"></a><a
+ id="dx1-7004"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\begin{keywords}</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">keyword list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">\end{keywords} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 275--><p class="noindent" >
+The keywords should be displayed using the <span
+class="ecss-1000">keywords </span>environment.
+</p><!--l. 279--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\acks</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-7005"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\acks{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">text</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 281--><p class="noindent" >
+This displays the acknowledgements.
+</p><!--l. 284--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\section</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-7006"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\section{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 286--><p class="noindent" >
+Section titles are created using <span
+class="ectt-1000">\section</span>. The heading is automatically numbered and
+can be cross-referenced using <span
+class="ectt-1000">\label </span>and <span
+class="ectt-1000">\ref</span>. Unnumbered sections can be produced
+using:
+</p><!--l. 291--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\section*</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-7007"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\section*{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 293--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 295--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\subsection</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-7008"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subsection{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 297--><p class="noindent" >
+Sub-section titles are created using <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subsection</span>. Unnumbered sub-sections can be
+produced using:
+</p><!--l. 300--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\subsection*</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-7009"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subsection*{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 302--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 304--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\subsubsection</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-7010"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subsubsection{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 306--><p class="noindent" >
+Sub-sub-section titles are created using <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subsubsection</span>. Unnumbered sub-sub-sections
+can be produced using:
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 309--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\subsubsection*</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-7011"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subsubsection*{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 311--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 313--><p class="noindent" >Further sectioning levels can be obtained using <span
+class="ectt-1000">\paragraph </span>and <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subparagraph</span>, but
+these are unnumbered with running heads.
+</p><!--l. 316--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\appendix</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-7012"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\appendix </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 318--><p class="noindent" >
+Use <span
+class="ectt-1000">\appendix </span>to switch to the appendices. This changes <span
+class="ectt-1000">\section </span>to produce an
+appendix. Example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-8">
+\appendix
+&#x00A0;<br />\section{Proof&#x00A0;of&#x00A0;Theorems}
+</div>
+<!--l. 324--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 326--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 326--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.4 </span> <a
+ id="x1-80003.4"></a>Citations and Bibliography</h4>
+<!--l. 328--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class automatically loads <span
+class="ecss-1000">natbib</span><a
+ id="dx1-8001"></a> and sets the bibliography style to <span
+class="ectt-1000">plainnat</span>.
+References should be stored in a <span
+class="ectt-1000">.bib </span>file.
+</p><!--l. 332--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\bibliography</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-8002"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\bibliography{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">bib file</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 334--><p class="noindent" >
+This displays the bibliography.
+</p><!--l. 337--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\citep</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-8003"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\citep[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">pre note</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">][</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">post note</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 339--><p class="noindent" >
+Use <span
+class="ectt-1000">\citep </span>for a parenthetical citation.
+</p><!--l. 342--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\citet</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-8004"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\citet[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">note</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 344--><p class="noindent" >
+Use <span
+class="ectt-1000">\citet </span>for a textual citation.
+</p><!--l. 347--><p class="indent" > See the <a
+href="http://ctan.org/pkg/natbib" ><span
+class="ecss-1000">natbib</span><a
+ id="dx1-8005"></a> documentation</a> for further details.
+</p><!--l. 349--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 349--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.5 </span> <a
+ id="x1-90003.5"></a>Figures and Tables</h4>
+<!--l. 351--><p class="noindent" >Floats, such as figures, tables and algorithms, are moving objects and are
+supposed to float to the nearest convenient location. Please don&#8217;t force them
+to go in a particular place. In general it&#8217;s best to use the <span
+class="ectt-1000">htbp </span>specifier and
+don&#8217;t put the float in the middle of a paragraph (that is, make sure there&#8217;s a
+paragraph break above and below the float). Floats are supposed to have a
+little extra space above and below them to make them stand out from the
+rest of the text. This extra space is put in automatically and shouldn&#8217;t need
+modifying.
+</p><!--l. 361--><p class="indent" > To ensure consistency, please <span
+class="ecti-1000">don&#8217;t </span>try changing the format of the caption by doing
+something like:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-9">
+\caption{\textit{A&#x00A0;Sample&#x00A0;Caption.}}
+</div>
+<!--l. 365--><p class="nopar" > or
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-10">
+\caption{\em&#x00A0;A&#x00A0;Sample&#x00A0;Caption.}
+</div>
+<!--l. 369--><p class="nopar" > You can, of course, change the font for individual words or phrases. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-11">
+\caption{A&#x00A0;Sample&#x00A0;Caption&#x00A0;With&#x00A0;Some&#x00A0;\emph{Emphasized&#x00A0;Words}.}
+</div>
+<!--l. 374--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 376--><p class="indent" > The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class provides the following command for displaying the contents of a figure
+or table:
+</p><!--l. 378--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\floatconts</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-9001"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\floatconts{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">caption command</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">contents</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 380--><p class="noindent" >
+This ensures that the caption is correctly positioned and that the contents are centered.
+For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-12">
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+&#x00A0;<br />\floatconts
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;{tab:example}%&#x00A0;label
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;{\caption{An&#x00A0;Example&#x00A0;Table}}%&#x00A0;caption&#x00A0;command
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;{%
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\begin{tabular}{ll}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\bfseries&#x00A0;Dataset&#x00A0;&amp;&#x00A0;\bfseries&#x00A0;Result\\
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;Data1&#x00A0;&amp;&#x00A0;0.123456
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\end{tabular}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;}
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{table}
+</div>
+<!--l. 395--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 397--><p class="indent" > The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class automatically loads <span
+class="ecss-1000">graphicx</span><a
+ id="dx1-9002"></a> which defines:
+</p><!--l. 399--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\includegraphics</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-9003"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\includegraphics[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">options</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">file name</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 401--><p class="noindent" >
+where <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">options</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>is a comma-separated list of options.
+</p><!--l. 404--><p class="indent" > For example, suppose you have an image called <span
+class="ectt-1000">mypic.png </span>in a subdirectory called
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">images</span>:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-13">
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+&#x00A0;<br />\floatconts
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;{fig:example}%&#x00A0;label
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;{\caption{An&#x00A0;Example&#x00A0;Figure}}%&#x00A0;caption&#x00A0;command
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;{\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{images/mypic}}
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{figure}
+</div>
+<!--l. 413--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 415--><p class="indent" > Note that you shouldn&#8217;t specify the file extension when including the image. It&#8217;s
+helpful if you can also provide a grayscale version of color images. This should be
+labeled as the color image but with <span
+class="ectt-1000">-gray </span>immediately before the extension. (The
+extension need not be the same as that of the color image.) For example, if you
+have an image called <span
+class="ectt-1000">mypic.pdf</span>, the grayscale can be called <span
+class="ectt-1000">mypic-gray.pdf</span>,
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">mypic-gray.png </span>or <span
+class="ectt-1000">mypic-gray.jpg</span>. See <a
+href="#x1-160003.11">§3.11 </a><a
+href="#x1-160003.11">Color vs Grayscale<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:color --></a> for further
+details.
+</p><!--l. 425--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\includeteximage</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-9004"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\includeteximage[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">options</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">file name</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 427--><p class="noindent" >
+If your image file is made up of <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;code (e.g.&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">tikz</span><a
+ id="dx1-9005"></a> commands) the file can be included
+using <span
+class="ectt-1000">\includeteximage</span>. The optional argument is a key=value comma-separated list
+where the keys are a subset of those provided by <span
+class="ectt-1000">\includegraphics</span>. The main keys
+are: <span
+class="ectt-1000">width</span>, <span
+class="ectt-1000">height</span>, <span
+class="ectt-1000">scale </span>and <span
+class="ectt-1000">angle</span>.
+</p><!--l. 435--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 435--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h5 class="subsubsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.5.1 </span> <a
+ id="x1-100003.5.1"></a>Sub-Figures and Sub-Tables</h5>
+<!--l. 437--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+class="ecss-1000">subfig</span><a
+ id="dx1-10001"></a> package causes a problem for <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>so the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class will give an error if it
+is used. Therefore the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class provides its own commands for including sub-figures
+and sub-tables.
+</p><!--l. 442--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\subfigure</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-10002"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subfigure[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">][</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">valign</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">contents</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 444--><p class="noindent" >
+This makes a sub-figure where <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">contents</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>denotes the contents of the sub-figure. This
+should also include the <span
+class="ectt-1000">\label</span>. The first optional argument <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>indicates a caption
+for the sub-figure. By default, the sub-figures are aligned at the base. This can be
+changed with the second optional argument <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">valign</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span>, which may be one of: <span
+class="ectt-1000">t </span>(top), <span
+class="ectt-1000">c</span>
+(centred) or <span
+class="ectt-1000">b </span>(base).
+</p><!--l. 453--><p class="indent" > For example, suppose there are two images files, <span
+class="ectt-1000">mypic1.png </span>and <span
+class="ectt-1000">mypic2.png</span>, in
+the subdirectory <span
+class="ectt-1000">images</span>. Then they can be included as sub-figures as follows:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-14">
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+&#x00A0;<br />\floatconts
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;{fig:example2}%&#x00A0;label&#x00A0;for&#x00A0;whole&#x00A0;figure
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;{\caption{An&#x00A0;Example&#x00A0;Figure.}}%&#x00A0;caption&#x00A0;for&#x00A0;whole&#x00A0;figure
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;{%
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\subfigure{%
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\label{fig:pic1}%&#x00A0;label&#x00A0;for&#x00A0;this&#x00A0;sub-figure
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\includegraphics{images/mypic1}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;}\qquad&#x00A0;%&#x00A0;space&#x00A0;out&#x00A0;the&#x00A0;images&#x00A0;a&#x00A0;bit
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\subfigure{%
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\label{fig:pic2}%&#x00A0;label&#x00A0;for&#x00A0;this&#x00A0;sub-figure
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\includegraphics{images/mypic2}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;}
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{figure}
+</div>
+<!--l. 472--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 474--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\subtable</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-10003"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subtable[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">][</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">valign</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">contents</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 476--><p class="noindent" >
+This is an analogous command for sub-tables. The default value for <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">valign</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>is
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">t</span>.
+</p><!--l. 480--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 480--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.6 </span> <a
+ id="x1-110003.6"></a>Algorithms</h4>
+<!--l. 482--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">algorithm</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-11001"></a><a
+ id="dx1-11002"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\begin{algorithm}</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">contents</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="ectt-1000">\end{algorithm} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 486--><p class="noindent" >
+Enumerated textual algorithms can be displayed using the <span
+class="ecss-1000">algorithm </span>environment.
+Within this environment, use <span
+class="ectt-1000">\caption</span><a
+ id="dx1-11003"></a> to set the caption (and <span
+class="ectt-1000">\label</span><a
+ id="dx1-11004"></a> to
+cross-reference it). Within the body of the environment you can use the <span
+class="ecss-1000">enumerate</span><a
+ id="dx1-11005"></a><a
+ id="dx1-11006"></a>
+environment.
+</p><!--l. 493--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">enumerate*</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-11007"></a><a
+ id="dx1-11008"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\begin{enumerate*}</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="ectt-1000">\item </span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">text</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="ectt-1000">&#x2026;</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="ectt-1000">\end{enumerate*} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 498--><p class="noindent" >
+If you want to have nested <span
+class="ecss-1000">enumerate</span><a
+ id="dx1-11009"></a><a
+ id="dx1-11010"></a> environments but you want to keep the same
+numbering throughout the algorithm, you can use the <span
+class="ecss-1000">enumerate* </span>environment,
+provided by the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-15">
+\begin{enumerate*}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\item&#x00A0;Set&#x00A0;the&#x00A0;label&#x00A0;of&#x00A0;vertex&#x00A0;$s$&#x00A0;to&#x00A0;0
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\item&#x00A0;Set&#x00A0;$i=0$
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\begin{enumerate*}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\item&#x00A0;\label{step:locate}Locate&#x00A0;all&#x00A0;unlabelled&#x00A0;vertices
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;adjacent&#x00A0;to&#x00A0;a&#x00A0;vertex&#x00A0;labelled&#x00A0;$i$&#x00A0;and&#x00A0;label&#x00A0;them&#x00A0;$i+1$
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\item&#x00A0;If&#x00A0;vertex&#x00A0;$t$&#x00A0;has&#x00A0;been&#x00A0;labelled,
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\begin{enumerate*}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\item[]&#x00A0;the&#x00A0;shortest&#x00A0;path&#x00A0;can&#x00A0;be&#x00A0;found&#x00A0;by&#x00A0;backtracking,&#x00A0;and
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;the&#x00A0;length&#x00A0;is&#x00A0;given&#x00A0;by&#x00A0;the&#x00A0;label&#x00A0;of&#x00A0;$t$.
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\end{enumerate*}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;otherwise
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\begin{enumerate*}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\item[]&#x00A0;increment&#x00A0;$i$&#x00A0;and&#x00A0;return&#x00A0;to&#x00A0;step~\ref{step:locate}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\end{enumerate*}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\end{enumerate*}
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{enumerate*}
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{algorithm}
+</div>
+<!--l. 522--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 525--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">algorithm2e</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-11011"></a><a
+ id="dx1-11012"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\begin{algorithm2e}</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">contents</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="ectt-1000">\end{algorithm2e} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 529--><p class="noindent" >
+Pseudo code can be displayed using the <span
+class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e </span>environment, provided by the
+<span
+class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-11013"></a> package, which is automatically loaded. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-16">
+\begin{algorithm2e}
+&#x00A0;<br />\caption{Computing&#x00A0;Net&#x00A0;Activation}
+&#x00A0;<br />\label{alg:net}
+&#x00A0;<br />\dontprintsemicolon
+&#x00A0;<br />\linesnumbered
+&#x00A0;<br />\KwIn{$x_1,&#x00A0;\ldots,&#x00A0;x_n,&#x00A0;w_1,&#x00A0;\ldots,&#x00A0;w_n$}
+&#x00A0;<br />\KwOut{$y$,&#x00A0;the&#x00A0;net&#x00A0;activation}
+&#x00A0;<br />$y\leftarrow&#x00A0;0$\;
+&#x00A0;<br />\For{$i\leftarrow&#x00A0;1$&#x00A0;\KwTo&#x00A0;$n$}{
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;$y&#x00A0;\leftarrow&#x00A0;y&#x00A0;+&#x00A0;w_i*x_i$\;
+&#x00A0;<br />}
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{algorithm2e}
+</div>
+<!--l. 546--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 548--><p class="indent" > See the <a
+href="http://ctan.org/pkg/algorithm2e" ><span
+class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-11014"></a> documentation</a> for more details.
+</p><!--l. 550--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 550--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.7 </span> <a
+ id="x1-120003.7"></a>Description Lists</h4>
+<!--l. 552--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">altdescription</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-12001"></a><a
+ id="dx1-12002"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\begin{altdescription}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">widest label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="ectt-1000">\item[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">] </span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">item text</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="ectt-1000">\end{altdescription} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 556--><p class="noindent" >
+In addition to the standard <span
+class="ecss-1000">description</span><a
+ id="dx1-12003"></a><a
+ id="dx1-12004"></a> environment, the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class also provides the
+<span
+class="ecss-1000">altdescription </span>environment. This has an argument that should be the widest label used
+in the list. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-17">
+\begin{altdescription}{differentiate}
+&#x00A0;<br />\item[add]&#x00A0;A&#x00A0;method&#x00A0;that&#x00A0;adds&#x00A0;two&#x00A0;variables.
+&#x00A0;<br />\item[differentiate]&#x00A0;A&#x00A0;method&#x00A0;that&#x00A0;differentiates&#x00A0;a&#x00A0;function.
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{altdescription}
+</div>
+<!--l. 566--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 568--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 568--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.8 </span> <a
+ id="x1-130003.8"></a>Theorems, Lemmas etc</h4>
+<!--l. 570--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class provides the following theorem-like environments: <span
+class="ecss-1000">theorem</span><a
+ id="dx1-13001"></a><a
+ id="dx1-13002"></a>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">example</span><a
+ id="dx1-13003"></a><a
+ id="dx1-13004"></a>,
+<span
+class="ecss-1000">lemma</span><a
+ id="dx1-13005"></a><a
+ id="dx1-13006"></a>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">proposition</span><a
+ id="dx1-13007"></a><a
+ id="dx1-13008"></a>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">remark</span><a
+ id="dx1-13009"></a><a
+ id="dx1-13010"></a>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">corollary</span><a
+ id="dx1-13011"></a><a
+ id="dx1-13012"></a>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">definition</span><a
+ id="dx1-13013"></a><a
+ id="dx1-13014"></a>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">conjecture</span><a
+ id="dx1-13015"></a><a
+ id="dx1-13016"></a> and <span
+class="ecss-1000">axiom</span><a
+ id="dx1-13017"></a><a
+ id="dx1-13018"></a>. Within the body
+of those environments, you can use the <span
+class="ecss-1000">proof</span><a
+ id="dx1-13019"></a><a
+ id="dx1-13020"></a> environment to display the proof if need
+be. The theorem-like environments all take an optional argument, which gives the
+environment a title. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-18">
+\begin{theorem}[An&#x00A0;Example&#x00A0;Theorem]
+&#x00A0;<br />\label{thm:example}
+&#x00A0;<br />This&#x00A0;is&#x00A0;the&#x00A0;theorem.
+&#x00A0;<br />\begin{proof}
+&#x00A0;<br />This&#x00A0;is&#x00A0;the&#x00A0;proof.
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{proof}
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{theorem}
+</div>
+<!--l. 586--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 588--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 588--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.9 </span> <a
+ id="x1-140003.9"></a>Cross-Referencing</h4>
+<!--l. 591--><p class="noindent" >Always use <span
+class="ectt-1000">\label</span><a
+ id="dx1-14001"></a> when cross-referencing, rather than writing the number explicitly.
+The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class provides some convenience commands to assist referencing.
+These commands, described below, can all take a comma-separated list of
+labels.
+</p><!--l. 596--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\sectionref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14002"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\sectionref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 598--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to a section or sections. For example, if you defined a section as
+follows:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-19">
+\section{Results}\label{sec:results}
+</div>
+<!--l. 603--><p class="nopar" > you can refer to it as follows:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-20">
+The&#x00A0;results&#x00A0;are&#x00A0;detailed&#x00A0;in&#x00A0;\sectionref{sec:results}.
+</div>
+<!--l. 607--><p class="nopar" > This command may also be used for sub-sections and sub-sub-sections.
+</p><!--l. 610--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\appendixref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14003"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\appendixref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 612--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to an appendix or multiple appendices.
+</p><!--l. 615--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\equationref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14004"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\equationref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 617--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to an equation or multiple equations.
+</p><!--l. 620--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\tableref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14005"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\tableref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 622--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to a table or multiple tables. This can also be used for sub-tables where
+the main table number is also required.
+</p><!--l. 626--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\subtabref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14006"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subtabref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 628--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to sub-tables without the main table number, e.g. (<span
+class="ecti-1000">a</span>) or (<span
+class="ecti-1000">b</span>).
+</p><!--l. 632--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\figureref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14007"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\figureref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 634--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to a figure or multiple figures. This can also be used for sub-figures where
+the main figure number is also required, e.g.&#x00A0;2(<span
+class="ecti-1000">a</span>) or 4(<span
+class="ecti-1000">b</span>).
+</p><!--l. 639--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\subfigref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14008"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subfigref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 641--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to sub-figures without the main figure number, e.g. (<span
+class="ecti-1000">a</span>) or (<span
+class="ecti-1000">b</span>).
+</p><!--l. 645--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\algorithmref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14009"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\algorithmref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 647--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to an algorithm or multiple algorithms.
+</p><!--l. 650--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\theoremref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14010"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\theoremref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 652--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to a theorem or multiple theorems.
+</p><!--l. 655--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\lemmaref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14011"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\lemmaref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 657--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to a lemma or multiple lemmas.
+</p><!--l. 660--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\remarkref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14012"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\remarkref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 662--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to a remark or multiple remarks.
+</p><!--l. 665--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\corollaryref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14013"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\corollaryref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 667--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to a corollary or multiple corollaries.
+</p><!--l. 670--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\definitionref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14014"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\definitionref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 672--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to a definition or multiple definitions.
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 675--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\conjectureref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14015"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\conjectureref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 677--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to a conjecture or multiple conjectures.
+</p><!--l. 680--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\axiomref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14016"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\axiomref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 682--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to an axiom or multiple axioms.
+</p><!--l. 685--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\exampleref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-14017"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\exampleref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 687--><p class="noindent" >
+Used to refer to an example or multiple examples.
+</p><!--l. 690--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 690--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.10 </span> <a
+ id="x1-150003.10"></a>Mathematics</h4>
+<!--l. 692--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class loads the <span
+class="ecss-1000">amsmath</span><a
+ id="dx1-15001"></a> package so you can use any of the commands and
+environments defined in that package. A brief summary of some of the more common
+commands and environments is provided here. See the <a
+href="http://ctan.org/pkg/amsmath" ><span
+class="ecss-1000">amsmath</span><a
+ id="dx1-15002"></a> documentation</a> for
+further details.
+</p><!--l. 697--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\set</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-15003"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\set{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">text</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 699--><p class="noindent" >
+In addition to the commands provided by <span
+class="ecss-1000">amsmath</span><a
+ id="dx1-15004"></a>, the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class also provides the
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">\set </span>command which can be used to typeset a set. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-21">
+The&#x00A0;universal&#x00A0;set&#x00A0;is&#x00A0;denoted&#x00A0;$\set{U}$
+</div>
+<!--l. 705--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 707--><p class="indent" > Unnumbered single-line equations should be displayed using <span
+class="ectt-1000">\[ </span>and <span
+class="ectt-1000">\]</span>. For
+example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-22">
+\[E&#x00A0;=&#x00A0;m&#x00A0;c^2\]
+</div>
+<!--l. 711--><p class="nopar" > Numbered single-line equations should be displayed using the <span
+class="ecss-1000">equation</span><a
+ id="dx1-15005"></a><a
+ id="dx1-15006"></a> environment.
+For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-23">
+\begin{equation}\label{eq:trigrule}
+&#x00A0;<br />\cos^2\theta&#x00A0;+&#x00A0;\sin^2\theta&#x00A0;\equiv&#x00A0;1
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{equation}
+</div>
+<!--l. 718--><p class="nopar" > Multi-lined numbered equations should be displayed using the <span
+class="ecss-1000">align</span><a
+ id="dx1-15007"></a><a
+ id="dx1-15008"></a> environment. For
+example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-24">
+\begin{align}
+&#x00A0;<br />f(x)&#x00A0;&amp;=&#x00A0;x^2&#x00A0;+&#x00A0;x\label{eq:f}\\
+&#x00A0;<br />f&#8217;(x)&#x00A0;&amp;=&#x00A0;2x&#x00A0;+&#x00A0;1\label{eq:df}
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{align}
+</div>
+<!--l. 726--><p class="nopar" > Unnumbered multi-lined equations should be displayed using the <span
+class="ecss-1000">align*</span><a
+ id="dx1-15009"></a><a
+ id="dx1-15010"></a> environment.
+For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-25">
+\begin{align*}
+&#x00A0;<br />f(x)&#x00A0;&amp;=&#x00A0;(x+1)(x-1)\\
+&#x00A0;<br />&amp;=&#x00A0;x^2&#x00A0;-&#x00A0;1
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{align*}
+</div>
+<!--l. 734--><p class="nopar" > If you want to mix numbered with unnumbered lines use the <span
+class="ecss-1000">align</span><a
+ id="dx1-15011"></a><a
+ id="dx1-15012"></a> environment and
+suppress unwanted line numbers with <span
+class="ectt-1000">\nonumber</span>. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-26">
+\begin{align}
+&#x00A0;<br />y&#x00A0;&amp;=&#x00A0;x^2&#x00A0;+&#x00A0;3x&#x00A0;-&#x00A0;2x&#x00A0;+&#x00A0;1\nonumber\\
+&#x00A0;<br />&amp;=&#x00A0;x^2&#x00A0;+&#x00A0;x&#x00A0;+&#x00A0;1\label{eq:y}
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{align}
+</div>
+<!--l. 743--><p class="nopar" > An equation that is too long to fit on a single line can be displayed using the <span
+class="ecss-1000">split</span><a
+ id="dx1-15013"></a><a
+ id="dx1-15014"></a>
+environment.
+</p><!--l. 747--><p class="indent" > Text can be embedded in an equation using <span
+class="ectt-1000">\text</span><a
+ id="dx1-15015"></a><span
+class="ectt-1000">{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">text</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span>or you can use
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">\intertext</span><a
+ id="dx1-15016"></a><span
+class="ectt-1000">{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">text</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span>to interupt a multi-line environment such as <span
+class="ecss-1000">align</span><a
+ id="dx1-15017"></a><a
+ id="dx1-15018"></a>.
+</p><!--l. 751--><p class="indent" > Predefined operator names are listed in <a
+href="#x1-150241">table&#x00A0;1</a>. For additional operators, either
+use
+</p><!--l. 753--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\operatorname</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-15019"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\operatorname{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">name</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 755--><p class="noindent" >
+for example
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-27">
+If&#x00A0;$X$&#x00A0;and&#x00A0;$Y$&#x00A0;are&#x00A0;independent,
+&#x00A0;<br />$\operatorname{var}(X+Y)&#x00A0;=
+&#x00A0;<br />\operatorname{var}(X)&#x00A0;+&#x00A0;\operatorname{var}(Y)$
+</div>
+<!--l. 761--><p class="nopar" > or declare it with
+</p><!--l. 763--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\DeclareMathOperator</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-15020"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\DeclareMathOperator{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">command</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">name</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 765--><p class="noindent" >
+for example
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-28">
+\DeclareMathOperator{\var}{var}
+</div>
+<!--l. 769--><p class="nopar" > and then use this new command:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-29">
+If&#x00A0;$X$&#x00A0;and&#x00A0;$Y$&#x00A0;are&#x00A0;independent,
+&#x00A0;<br />$\var(X+Y)&#x00A0;=&#x00A0;\var(X)+\var(Y)$
+</div>
+<!--l. 774--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 776--><p class="indent" > If you want limits that go above and below the operator (like <span
+class="ectt-1000">\sum</span><a
+ id="dx1-15021"></a>) use the starred
+versions (<span
+class="ectt-1000">\operatorname*</span><a
+ id="dx1-15022"></a> or <span
+class="ectt-1000">\DeclareMathOperator*</span><a
+ id="dx1-15023"></a>).
+</p>
+ <div class="table">
+
+
+
+<!--l. 780--><p class="indent" > <a
+ id="x1-150241"></a></p><hr class="float" /><div class="float"
+>
+
+
+
+ <div class="caption"
+><span class="id">Table&#x00A0;1: </span><span
+class="content">Predefined Operator Names (taken from <span
+class="ecss-1000">amsmath</span><a
+ id="dx1-15025"></a> documentation)</span></div><!--tex4ht:label?: x1-150241 -->
+<div class="tabular"> <table id="TBL-2" class="tabular"
+cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0"
+><colgroup id="TBL-2-1g"><col
+id="TBL-2-1" /><col
+id="TBL-2-2" /><col
+id="TBL-2-3" /><col
+id="TBL-2-4" /><col
+id="TBL-2-5" /><col
+id="TBL-2-6" /><col
+id="TBL-2-7" /><col
+id="TBL-2-8" /></colgroup><tr
+ style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-1-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-1-1"
+class="td11"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\arccos</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-1-2"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">arccos</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-1-3"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\deg</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-1-4"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">deg</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-1-5"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\lg</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-1-6"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">lg</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-1-7"
+class="td11"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\projlim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-1-8"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">proj</span><span style="margin-left:0.3em" class="thinspace"></span><span
+class="cmr-10">lim</span></td>
+</tr><tr
+ style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-2-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-2-1"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\arcsin</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-2-2"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">arcsin</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-2-3"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\det</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-2-4"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">det</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-2-5"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\lim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-2-6"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">lim</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-2-7"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\sec</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-2-8"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">sec</span> </td>
+</tr><tr
+ style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-3-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-3-1"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\arctan</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-3-2"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">arctan</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-3-3"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\dim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-3-4"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">dim</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-3-5"
+class="td11"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\liminf</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-3-6"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">lim</span><span style="margin-left:0.3em" class="thinspace"></span><span
+class="cmr-10">inf</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-3-7"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\sin</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-3-8"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">sin</span> </td>
+</tr><tr
+ style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-4-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-4-1"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\arg</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-4-2"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">arg</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-4-3"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\exp</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-4-4"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">exp</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-4-5"
+class="td11"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\limsup</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-4-6"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">lim</span><span style="margin-left:0.3em" class="thinspace"></span><span
+class="cmr-10">sup</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-4-7"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\sinh</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-4-8"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">sinh</span> </td>
+</tr><tr
+ style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-5-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-5-1"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\cos</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-5-2"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">cos</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-5-3"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\gcd</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-5-4"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">gcd</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-5-5"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\ln</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-5-6"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">ln</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-5-7"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\sup</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-5-8"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">sup</span> </td>
+</tr><tr
+ style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-6-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-6-1"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\cosh</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-6-2"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">cosh</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-6-3"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\hom</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-6-4"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">hom</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-6-5"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\log</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-6-6"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">log</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-6-7"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\tan</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-6-8"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">tan</span> </td>
+</tr><tr
+ style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-7-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-7-1"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\cot</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-7-2"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">cot</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-7-3"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\inf</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-7-4"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">inf</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-7-5"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\max</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-7-6"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">max</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-7-7"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\tanh</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-7-8"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">tanh</span> </td>
+</tr><tr
+ style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-8-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-8-1"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\coth</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-8-2"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">coth</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-8-3"
+class="td11"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\injlim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-8-4"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">inj</span><span style="margin-left:0.3em" class="thinspace"></span><span
+class="cmr-10">lim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-8-5"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\min</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-8-6"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">min</span> </td>
+</tr><tr
+ style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-9-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-9-1"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\csc</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-9-2"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">csc</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-9-3"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\ker</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-9-4"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">ker</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-9-5"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\Pr</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-9-6"
+class="td11"><span
+class="cmr-10">Pr</span> </td></tr></table></div>
+<div class="tabular"> <table id="TBL-3" class="tabular"
+cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0"
+><colgroup id="TBL-3-1g"><col
+id="TBL-3-1" /><col
+id="TBL-3-2" /><col
+id="TBL-3-3" /><col
+id="TBL-3-4" /></colgroup><tr
+ style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-3-1-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-3-1-1"
+class="td11"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\varlimsup</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-3-1-2"
+class="td11"><img
+src="jmlr-manual0x.png" alt="---
+lim" class="mathpalette" /></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-3-1-3"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\varinjlim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-3-1-4"
+class="td11"><img
+src="jmlr-manual1x.png" alt="li-&#x2192;m" class="mathpalette" /></td>
+</tr><tr
+ style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-3-2-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-3-2-1"
+class="td11"> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\varliminf</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-3-2-2"
+class="td11"><img
+src="jmlr-manual2x.png" alt="lim-" class="mathpalette" /></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-3-2-3"
+class="td11"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\varprojlim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-3-2-4"
+class="td11"><img
+src="jmlr-manual3x.png" alt="lim
+&#x2190;-" class="mathpalette" /></td>
+</tr></table></div>
+
+
+
+ </div><hr class="endfloat" />
+ </div>
+<!--l. 806--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.11 </span> <a
+ id="x1-160003.11"></a>Color vs Grayscale</h4>
+<!--l. 809--><p class="noindent" >It&#8217;s helpful if authors supply grayscale versions of their articles in the event that the
+article is to be incorporated into a black and white printed book. With external PDF,
+PNG or JPG graphic files, you just need to supply a grayscale version of the file. For
+example, if the file is called <span
+class="ectt-1000">myimage.png</span>, then the gray version should be
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">myimage-gray.png </span>or <span
+class="ectt-1000">myimage-gray.pdf </span>or <span
+class="ectt-1000">myimage-gray.jpg</span>. You don&#8217;t need to
+modify your code. The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class checks for the existence of the grayscale version if it is
+print mode (provided you have used <span
+class="ectt-1000">\includegraphics</span><a
+ id="dx1-16001"></a> and haven&#8217;t specified the file
+extension).
+</p><!--l. 821--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\ifprint</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-16002"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\ifprint{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">true part</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">false part</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 823--><p class="noindent" >
+You can use <span
+class="ectt-1000">\ifprint </span>to determine which mode you are in. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-30">
+in&#x00A0;\figureref{fig:nodes},&#x00A0;the
+&#x00A0;<br />\ifprint{dark&#x00A0;gray}{purple}
+&#x00A0;<br />ellipse&#x00A0;represents&#x00A0;an&#x00A0;input&#x00A0;and&#x00A0;the
+&#x00A0;<br />\ifprint{light&#x00A0;gray}{yellow}&#x00A0;ellipse
+&#x00A0;<br />represents&#x00A0;an&#x00A0;output.
+</div>
+<!--l. 832--><p class="nopar" > Another example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-31">
+{\ifprint{\bfseries}{\color{red}}important&#x00A0;text!}
+</div>
+<!--l. 836--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 838--><p class="indent" > You can use the class option <span
+class="ecss-1000">gray</span><a
+ id="dx1-16003"></a> to see how the document will appear in gray scale
+mode.
+</p><!--l. 841--><p class="indent" > The <span
+class="ecss-1000">xcolor</span><a
+ id="dx1-16004"></a> class is loaded with the <span
+class="ecss-1000">x11names </span>option, so you can use any of the x11
+predefined colors (listed in the <a
+href="http://ctan.org/pkg/xcolor" ><span
+class="ecss-1000">xcolor</span><a
+ id="dx1-16005"></a> documentation</a>).
+</p><!--l. 845--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 845--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.12 </span> <a
+ id="x1-170003.12"></a>Where To Go For Help</h4>
+<!--l. 847--><p class="noindent" >If you have a <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;query, the first place to go to is the <a
+href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq" >UK TUG FAQ</a>.
+</p><!--l. 850--><p class="indent" > If you are unfamiliar or just getting started with <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>, there&#8217;s a list of on-line introductions
+to <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;at: <a
+href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=man-latex" class="url" ><span
+class="ectt-1000">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=man-latex</span></a>
+</p><!--l. 854--><p class="indent" > There are also forums, mailing lists and newsgroups. For example, the
+<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;Community (<a
+href="http://www.latex-community.org/" class="url" ><span
+class="ectt-1000">http://www.latex-community.org/</span></a>), the <span
+class="ectt-1000">texhax </span>mailing list
+(<a
+href="http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/texhax" class="url" ><span
+class="ectt-1000">http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/texhax</span></a>) and <span
+class="ectt-1000">comp.text.tex </span>(archives available
+at <a
+href="http://groups.google.com/group/comp.text.tex/" class="url" ><span
+class="ectt-1000">http://groups.google.com/group/comp.text.tex/</span></a>).
+</p><!--l. 861--><p class="indent" > Documentation for packages or classes can be found using the <span
+class="ectt-1000">texdoc </span>application.
+For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-32">
+texdoc&#x00A0;natbib
+</div>
+<!--l. 865--><p class="nopar" > Alternatively, you can go to <span
+class="ectt-1000">http://www.ctan.org/pkg/</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">name</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>where <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">name</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>is the
+name of the package. For example: <a
+href="http://www.ctan.org/pkg/natbib" class="url" ><span
+class="ectt-1000">http://www.ctan.org/pkg/natbib</span></a>
+</p><!--l. 871--><p class="indent" > For a general guide to preparing papers (regardless of whether you are using
+<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;or a word processor), see Kate L.&#x00A0;Turabian, &#8220;A manual for writers
+of term papers, theses, and dissertations&#8221;, The University of Chicago Press,
+1996.
+</p><!--l. 876--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 876--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4 </span> <a
+ id="x1-180004"></a>Guidelines for Production Editors</h3>
+<!--l. 879--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class can be used to combine articles that use the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>document class
+into a book. The following sample files are provided: <span
+class="ectt-1000">paper1/paper1.tex</span>,
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">paper2/paper2.tex</span>, <span
+class="ectt-1000">paper3/paper3.tex</span>, <span
+class="ectt-1000">jmlr-sample.tex</span>, <span
+class="ectt-1000">jmlrwcp-sample.tex</span>
+and <span
+class="ectt-1000">jmlrbook-sample.tex</span>. All but the last named one are articles using the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class.
+The last one (<span
+class="ectt-1000">jmlrbook-sample.tex</span>) uses the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class file to combine the articles
+into a book. Note that no modifications are needed to the files using the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class when
+they are imported into the book. They can either be compiled as stand-alone articles or
+with the entire book.
+</p><!--l. 892--><p class="indent" > Before you compile the book, make sure that all the articles compile as stand-alone
+documents (and run Bib<span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;where necessary). You can use the <span
+class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a
+ id="dx1-18001"></a> Perl
+script to compile the book and create associated HTML files. See <a
+href="#x1-250004.6">§4.6 </a><a
+href="#x1-250004.6">Creating the
+Book Using <span
+class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><!--tex4ht:ref: sec:makejmlrbook --></a> for details.
+</p><!--l. 898--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 898--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.1 </span> <a
+ id="x1-190004.1"></a><span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>Class Options</h4>
+<!--l. 899--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">nowcp</span><a
+ id="dx1-19001"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">The imported pre-published articles were published in the Journal of
+ Machine Learning Research (default).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">wcp</span><a
+ id="dx1-19002"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">The imported pre-published articles were published in the JMLR Workshop
+ and Conference Proceedings.
+ <!--l. 905--><p class="noindent" >If the book has a mixture of JMLR and JMLR WCP articles, you can switch
+ between them using
+
+
+
+ </p><!--l. 907--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\jmlrwcp</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-19003"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrwcp </span></div><hr>
+ </p><!--l. 909--><p class="noindent" >
+ and
+ </p><!--l. 911--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\jmlrnowcp</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-19004"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrnowcp </span></div><hr>
+ </p><!--l. 913--><p class="noindent" >
+ Alternatively, you can set the name of the journal or conference proceedings
+ using:
+ </p><!--l. 916--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\jmlrproceedings</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-19005"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrproceedings{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">long title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+ </p><!--l. 918--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p></dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">color</span><a
+ id="dx1-19006"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Color version (see <a
+href="#x1-160003.11">§3.11 </a><a
+href="#x1-160003.11">Color vs Grayscale<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:color --></a>). Use this option for the on-line
+ version with hyperlinks enabled (default).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">gray</span><a
+ id="dx1-19007"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Grayscale version (see <a
+href="#x1-160003.11">§3.11 </a><a
+href="#x1-160003.11">Color vs Grayscale<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:color --></a>). Use this option for the print
+ version without hyperlinks.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">tablecaptiontop</span><a
+ id="dx1-19008"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">in a <span
+class="ecss-1000">table</span><a
+ id="dx1-19009"></a><a
+ id="dx1-19010"></a> environment, <span
+class="ectt-1000">\floatconts</span><a
+ id="dx1-19011"></a> puts the caption at the
+ top.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">tablecaptionbottom</span><a
+ id="dx1-19012"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">in a <span
+class="ecss-1000">table</span><a
+ id="dx1-19013"></a><a
+ id="dx1-19014"></a> environment, <span
+class="ectt-1000">\floatconts</span><a
+ id="dx1-19015"></a> puts the caption at the
+ bottom.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">letterpaper</span><a
+ id="dx1-19016"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Set the paper size to letter (default).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">7x10</span><a
+ id="dx1-19017"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Set the paper size to <span
+class="cmr-10">7 </span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x00D7; </span><span
+class="cmr-10">10 </span>inches.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">prehyperref</span><a
+ id="dx1-19018"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>automatically loads the <span
+class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span><a
+ id="dx1-19019"></a> package, but some packages
+ need to be loaded before <span
+class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span><a
+ id="dx1-19020"></a>. This information can be specified using the
+ <span
+class="ecss-1000">prehyperref</span><a
+ id="dx1-19021"></a> option. This is a key=value option. For example, to load the packages
+ <span
+class="ecss-1000">foo </span>and <span
+class="ecss-1000">bar </span>before <span
+class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span><a
+ id="dx1-19022"></a>, you can do:
+
+
+
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-33">
+ \documentclass[prehyperref={\usepackage{foo,bar}}]{jmlrbook}
+</div>
+ <!--l. 945--><p class="nopar" > or:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-34">
+ \documentclass[prehyperref={\usepackage{foo}\usepackage{bar}}]{jmlrbook}
+</div>
+ <!--l. 949--><p class="nopar" >
+ </p></dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">10pt</span><a
+ id="dx1-19023"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Use 10pt as the normal text size.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">11pt</span><a
+ id="dx1-19024"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Use 11pt as the normal text size (default).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecsx-1000">12pt</span><a
+ id="dx1-19025"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Use 12pt as the normal text size.
+ </dd></dl>
+<!--l. 957--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 957--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.2 </span> <a
+ id="x1-200004.2"></a>The Preamble</h4>
+<!--l. 959--><p class="noindent" >Any packages that the imported articles load (which aren&#8217;t automatically loaded by
+<span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr</span>) must be loaded in the book&#8217;s preamble. For example, if one or more
+of the articles load the <span
+class="ecss-1000">siunitx</span><a
+ id="dx1-20001"></a> package, this package must be loaded in the
+book.
+</p><!--l. 964--><p class="indent" > Commands that are defined in the imported articles will be local to that article
+unless they have been globally defined using <span
+class="ectt-1000">\gdef</span><a
+ id="dx1-20002"></a> or <span
+class="ectt-1000">\global</span><a
+ id="dx1-20003"></a>. Since most authors use
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">\newcommand</span><a
+ id="dx1-20004"></a> and <span
+class="ectt-1000">\newenvironment</span><a
+ id="dx1-20005"></a> (or <span
+class="ectt-1000">\renewcommand</span><a
+ id="dx1-20006"></a> and <span
+class="ectt-1000">\renewenvironment</span><a
+ id="dx1-20007"></a>) this
+shouldn&#8217;t cause a conflict if more that one article has defined the same command or
+environment. For example, in the sample files supplied, both <span
+class="ectt-1000">paper1/paper1.tex</span>
+and <span
+class="ectt-1000">paper2/paper2.tex </span>have defined the command <span
+class="ectt-1000">\samplecommand </span>using
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">\newcommand</span>. As long as this command isn&#8217;t also defined in the book, there won&#8217;t be a
+conflict.
+</p><!--l. 976--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\title</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-20008"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\title[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">PDF title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">book title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 978--><p class="noindent" >
+In the book preamble, <span
+class="ectt-1000">\title </span>sets the book title and the optional argument is used for
+the PDF title, which will be displayed when the reader views the PDF file&#8217;s properties
+in their PDF viewer. (Note that in the imported articles, <span
+class="ectt-1000">\title </span>sets the article&#8217;s title
+and the optional argument sets the short title for the page header and table of
+contents.)
+</p><!--l. 986--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\author</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-20009"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\author[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">PDF author(s)</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">book author(s)</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 988--><p class="noindent" >
+In the book preamble, <span
+class="ectt-1000">\author </span>sets the book&#8217;s author (or editor) and the optional
+argument is used for the PDF author, which will be displayed when the reader views
+the PDF file&#8217;s properties in their PDF viewer. (Note that in the imported articles,
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">\author </span>sets the article&#8217;s author and the optional argument sets the short author list
+for the page header.)
+</p><!--l. 996--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\volume</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-20010"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\volume{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">number</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 998--><p class="noindent" >
+This command sets the book&#8217;s volume number. Omit if the book has no volume
+number.
+</p><!--l. 1002--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\subtitle</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-20011"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subtitle{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">sub-title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1004--><p class="noindent" >
+This command sets the book&#8217;s subtitle. Omit if the book has no sub-title.
+</p><!--l. 1008--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\logo</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-20012"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\logo{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">image command</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1010--><p class="noindent" >
+This sets the book&#8217;s title image. Use <span
+class="ectt-1000">\includegraphics</span><a
+ id="dx1-20013"></a> and omit the file extension. If
+you provide a grayscale version as well as a color version, the grayscale version will be
+used for the print version of the book. (See <a
+href="#x1-160003.11">§3.11 </a><a
+href="#x1-160003.11">Color vs Grayscale<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:color --></a> for further
+details.)
+</p><!--l. 1017--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\team</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-20014"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\team{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">team title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1019--><p class="noindent" >
+This can be used to set the name of the editorial team. This command may be omitted
+if not required.
+</p><!--l. 1023--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\productioneditor</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-20015"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\productioneditor{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">name</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1025--><p class="noindent" >
+This command may be used to name the production editor. The command may be
+omitted if not required.
+</p><!--l. 1029--><p class="indent" > See <a
+href="#x1-230004.4">§4.4 </a><a
+href="#x1-230004.4">Altering the Layout of the Main Title Page<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:modifytitle --></a> for details on how to modify the
+layout of the title page.
+</p><!--l. 1032--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 1032--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.3 </span> <a
+ id="x1-210004.3"></a>Main Book Commands</h4>
+<!--l. 1034--><p class="noindent" >All commands that are provided by the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class are also available with the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook</span>
+class, but some commands might behave differently depending on whether they are in
+the main part of the book or within the imported articles.
+</p><!--l. 1039--><p class="indent" > In the main part of the book you can use the following commands:
+</p><!--l. 1040--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\maketitle</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21001"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\maketitle </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1042--><p class="noindent" >
+This displays the book&#8217;s title page. Note that <span
+class="ectt-1000">\maketitle </span>has a different effect when
+used in imported articles.
+</p><!--l. 1046--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\frontmatter</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21002"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\frontmatter </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1048--><p class="noindent" >
+Use this command at the start of the front matter (e.g.&#x00A0;before the foreword or preface).
+
+
+
+This will make chapters unnumbered even if you use <span
+class="ectt-1000">\chapter </span>instead of <span
+class="ectt-1000">\chapter*</span>. It
+also sets the page style and sets the page numbering to lower case Roman
+numerals.
+</p><!--l. 1054--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">authorsignoff</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21003"></a><a
+ id="dx1-21004"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\begin{authorsignoff}</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">author list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="ectt-1000">\end{authorsignoff} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1058--><p class="noindent" >
+This environment may be used by the author signing off at the end of a chapter such as
+the foreword. Within the environment use:
+</p><!--l. 1061--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\Author</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21005"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\author{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">details</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1063--><p class="noindent" >
+for the author&#8217;s details. More than one <span
+class="ectt-1000">\Author </span>should be used if there is more than
+one author. Example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-35">
+\begin{authorsignoff}
+&#x00A0;<br />\Author{Nicola&#x00A0;Talbot\\
+&#x00A0;<br />University&#x00A0;of&#x00A0;East&#x00A0;Anglia}
+&#x00A0;<br />\Author{Anne&#x00A0;Author\\
+&#x00A0;<br />University&#x00A0;of&#x00A0;No&#x00A0;Where}
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{authorsignoff}
+</div>
+<!--l. 1073--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 1075--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">signoff</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21006"></a><a
+ id="dx1-21007"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\begin{signoff}[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">team name</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">date</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">editor list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="ectt-1000">\end{signoff} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1079--><p class="noindent" >
+This environment may be used by the editorial team when signing off a chapter such
+as the preface. If the optional argument is omitted, &#8220;The Editorial Team&#8221; is
+used.
+</p><!--l. 1084--><p class="indent" > Within the environment use:
+</p><!--l. 1085--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\Editor</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21008"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\Editor{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">details</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1087--><p class="noindent" >
+for each editor. Example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-36">
+\begin{signoff}{March&#x00A0;2010}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;First&#x00A0;editor:
+&#x00A0;<br />\Editor{Nicola&#x00A0;Talbot\\
+&#x00A0;<br />University&#x00A0;of&#x00A0;East&#x00A0;Anglia\\
+&#x00A0;<br />\mailto{N.Talbot@uea.ac.uk}}
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;Second&#x00A0;editor:
+&#x00A0;<br />\Editor{Anne&#x00A0;Editor\\
+&#x00A0;<br />University&#x00A0;of&#x00A0;Nowhere\\
+&#x00A0;<br />\mailto{ae@sample.com}}
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{signoff}
+</div>
+<!--l. 1100--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 1102--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\tableofcontents</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21009"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\tableofcontents </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1104--><p class="noindent" >
+This command displays the book&#8217;s table of contents. Note that it has a different effect if
+used in an imported article.
+</p><!--l. 1108--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\mainmatter</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21010"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\mainmatter </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1110--><p class="noindent" >
+Use this command to switch to the book&#8217;s main matter. This will switch the chapter
+numbering back on, reset the page numbering to Arabic and set up the main page
+style.
+</p><!--l. 1115--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\part</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21011"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\part[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1117--><p class="noindent" >
+If used in the main part of the book, this command will start a new part and issue a
+clear double page. Note that this command has a different effect if used in an imported
+article.
+</p><!--l. 1122--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\addtocpart</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21012"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\addtocpart{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1124--><p class="noindent" >
+This adds <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>to the table of contents, issues a clear double page, but doesn&#8217;t display
+any text or affect the part numbering.
+</p><!--l. 1129--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\chapter</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21013"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\chapter[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1131--><p class="noindent" >
+This command may be used in the main body of the book but will cause an error if
+used within an imported article.
+</p><!--l. 1135--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\section</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21014"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\section[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1137--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1138--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\subsection</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21015"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subsection[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1140--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1141--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\subsubsection</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21016"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subsubsection[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1143--><p class="noindent" >
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 1144--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\paragraph</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21017"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\paragraph[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1146--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1147--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\subparagraph</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21018"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\subparagraph[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">title</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1149--><p class="noindent" >
+These commands may be used in the main body of the book or within imported
+articles. In the main body of the book they need to be within a chapter and will be
+numbered according to the chapter.
+</p><!--l. 1154--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\appendix</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21019"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\appendix </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1156--><p class="noindent" >
+If used in the main body of the book, this will switch to the book appendices.
+Subsequent <span
+class="ectt-1000">\chapter </span>commands will produce the appendices. If used within an
+imported article, it will switch to the article appendices and won&#8217;t affect the main part
+of the book.
+</p><!--l. 1163--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">jmlrpapers</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21020"></a><a
+ id="dx1-21021"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\begin{jmlrpapers}</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">imported papers</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><br
+class="newline" /><span
+class="ectt-1000">\end{jmlrpapers} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1167--><p class="noindent" >
+This environment must be used when importing articles. Within this environment, use
+the following commands to import articles:
+</p><!--l. 1170--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\importpubpaper</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21022"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\importpubpaper[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">directory</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">file</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">pages</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1172--><p class="noindent" >
+This imports an article that has already been published elsewhere. The <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">pages</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span>
+argument should be the page range from the <span
+class="ecti-1000">previously published </span>version of this article.
+This may not necessarily be the same as the page range of the article in the book. The
+directory the imported file is contained in is is given by <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">directory</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span>. If the
+file is in the same directory as the book, use a dot. The file name is given by
+<span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">file</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span>. The article is also given a label, specified by the optional argument.
+This is <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">directory</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span>/<span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">file</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>by default. The label is used as a prefix to labels in
+the imported articles which ensures that cross-references are unique. You can
+also use this label to reference the article elsewhere in the book (see <a
+href="#x1-220004.3.1">§4.3.1
+</a><a
+href="#x1-220004.3.1">Cross-Referencing<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:bkcrossref --></a>).
+</p><!--l. 1186--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\importpaper</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21023"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\importpaper[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">directory</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">file</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1188--><p class="noindent" >
+Imports an article that is being published in the book. The arguments are the
+same as above except that there is no page range (the page range is computed
+automatically).
+</p><!--l. 1193--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\importarticle</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-21024"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\importarticle[</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">directory</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">file</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1195--><p class="noindent" >
+This imports an article that hasn&#8217;t been published elsewhere. There is no
+page range, but the other arguments are the same as those describe above for
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">\importpubpaper</span>.
+</p><!--l. 1200--><p class="indent" > Example: to import a previously published paper <span
+class="ectt-1000">paper1/paper1.tex </span>and an
+unpublished paper <span
+class="ectt-1000">paper2/paper2.tex</span>:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-37">
+\begin{jmlrpapers}
+&#x00A0;<br />\importpubpaper{paper1}{paper1}{23--45}
+&#x00A0;<br />\importarticle{paper2}{paper2}
+&#x00A0;<br />\end{jmlrpapers}
+</div>
+<!--l. 1208--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 1210--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 1210--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h5 class="subsubsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.3.1 </span> <a
+ id="x1-220004.3.1"></a>Cross-Referencing</h5>
+<!--l. 1213--><p class="noindent" >You can cross-reference other parts of the book using the standard <span
+class="ectt-1000">\label</span>/<span
+class="ectt-1000">\ref</span>
+mechanism, but if you want to reference something within an imported article, you
+must prefix the label with the label given when importing the article (that is, the
+optional argument to <span
+class="ectt-1000">\importpubpaper</span><a
+ id="dx1-22001"></a>, <span
+class="ectt-1000">\importpaper</span><a
+ id="dx1-22002"></a> or <span
+class="ectt-1000">\importarticle</span>). For
+example, if you want to reference a section labeled <span
+class="ectt-1000">sec:results </span>in the imported paper
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">paper1/paper1.tex</span>, you would need to do:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-38">
+see&#x00A0;Section~\ref{paper1/paper1sec:results}
+</div>
+<!--l. 1223--><p class="nopar" > or
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-39">
+see&#x00A0;\sectionref{paper1/paper1sec:results}
+</div>
+<!--l. 1227--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 1229--><p class="indent" > In addition to the commands described in <a
+href="#x1-140003.9">§3.9 </a><a
+href="#x1-140003.9">Cross-Referencing<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:crossref --></a>, the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class
+also provides the following cross-referencing commands:
+</p><!--l. 1233--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\chapterref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-22003"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\chapterref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1235--><p class="noindent" >
+Reference a chapter or chapters. The argument is a comma-separated list of
+labels.
+</p><!--l. 1239--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\articlepageref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-22004"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\articlepageref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1241--><p class="noindent" >
+This displays the starting page number of the article whose label is given by <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span>.
+Note that this must a single label, not a list. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-40">
+An&#x00A0;interesting&#x00A0;article&#x00A0;starts&#x00A0;on&#x00A0;page~\articlepageref{paper1/paper1}
+</div>
+<!--l. 1247--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 1249--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\articlepagesref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-22005"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\articlepagesref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1251--><p class="noindent" >
+This displays the page range of the article whose label is given by <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span>. Again, this
+must be a single label, not a list. This page range is unrelated to the <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">pages</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>argument
+of <span
+class="ectt-1000">\importpubarticle</span><a
+ id="dx1-22006"></a>.
+</p><!--l. 1257--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\articletitleref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-22007"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\articletitleref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1259--><p class="noindent" >
+This displays the short title for the article whose label is given by <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span>. Again, this
+must be a single label, not a list.
+</p><!--l. 1264--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\articleauthorref</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-22008"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\articleauthorref{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1266--><p class="noindent" >
+This displays the author list for the article whose label is given by <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">label</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span>. Again, this
+must be a single label, not a list.
+</p><!--l. 1271--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 1271--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.4 </span> <a
+ id="x1-230004.4"></a>Altering the Layout of the Main Title Page</h4>
+<!--l. 1274--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\titlebody</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-23001"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\titlebody </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1276--><p class="noindent" >
+The main body of the book&#8217;s title page is given by the command <span
+class="ectt-1000">\titlebody</span>. Within
+the definition of this command, you can use:
+</p><!--l. 1280--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\SetTitleElement</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-23002"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\SetTitleElement{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">element</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">pre</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">post</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1282--><p class="noindent" >
+where <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">element</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>can be: <span
+class="ectt-1000">title</span>, <span
+class="ectt-1000">volume</span>,
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">issue</span><span class="footnote-mark"><a
+href="#fn2x0" id="fn2x0-bk"><sup class="textsuperscript">2</sup></a></span><a
+ id="x1-23003f2"></a>,
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">subtitle</span>, <span
+class="ectt-1000">logo</span>, <span
+class="ectt-1000">team</span>, <span
+class="ectt-1000">author</span>, <span
+class="ectt-1000">date</span>, <span
+class="ectt-1000">productioneditor</span>. The <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">pre</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>and <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">post</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>arguments
+specify what to do before and after the element. Note that <span
+class="ectt-1000">\SetTitleElement </span>does
+nothing if that element hasn&#8217;t been set. For example, if <span
+class="ectt-1000">\volume </span>has been omitted or
+<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\volume{}</span></span></span> is used, then
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-41">
+\SetTitleElement{volume}{\mainvolumefont}{\postmainvolume}
+</div>
+<!--l. 1294--><p class="nopar" > will do nothing (so you don&#8217;t end up with <span
+class="ecbx-1000">Volume :</span>).
+</p><!--l. 1297--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span
+class="ectt-0900">\IfTitleElement</span><span
+class="ectt-0900">&#x00A0;</span></span><a
+ id="dx1-23005"></a> <span
+class="ectt-1000">\IfTitleElement{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">element</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">true part</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">false part</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">}</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 1299--><p class="noindent" >
+This does <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">true part</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>if <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">element</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>has been set otherwise it does <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">false part</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span>. For
+example, <span
+class="ectt-1000">\postmainvolume </span>is defined as:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-42">
+\newcommand{\postmainvolume}{%
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\IfTitleElement{subtitle}{}{:}\par\relax
+&#x00A0;<br />}
+</div>
+<!--l. 1307--><p class="nopar" > This means that it will only print a colon after the volume number if the subtitle has
+been set.
+</p><!--l. 1311--><p class="indent" > The default definition of <span
+class="ectt-1000">\titlebody </span>is:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-43">
+\newcommand{\titlebody}{%
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\SetTitleElement{title}{\maintitlefont}{\postmaintitle}%
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\SetTitleElement{volume}{\mainvolumefont}{\postmainvolume}%
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\SetTitleElement{subtitle}{\mainsubtitlefont}{\postmainsubtitle}%
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\SetTitleElement{logo}{\mainlogofont}{\postmainlogo}%
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\SetTitleElement{team}{\mainteamfont}{\postmainteam}%
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\SetTitleElement{author}{\mainauthorfont}{\postmainauthor}%
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\SetTitleElement{productioneditor}{\mainproductioneditorfont}%
+&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;{\postmainproductioneditor}%
+&#x00A0;<br />}
+</div>
+<!--l. 1323--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 1325--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 1325--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.5 </span> <a
+ id="x1-240004.5"></a>Potential Pitfalls</h4>
+<!--l. 1327--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+class="ecss-1000">combine</span><a
+ id="dx1-24001"></a> class and <span
+class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span><a
+ id="dx1-24002"></a> package are individually both easily broken by packages
+that change certain internals and they don&#8217;t ordinarily work together. The <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook</span>
+class applies patches to the internal referencing mechanism to make them work
+together, but it&#8217;s a fairly fragile alliance. Some packages are known to break it, for
+example <span
+class="ecss-1000">subfig</span><a
+ id="dx1-24003"></a>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">pdfpages</span><a
+ id="dx1-24004"></a> and <span
+class="ecss-1000">geometry</span><a
+ id="dx1-24005"></a>. This is why the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class checks for known
+problem packages and generates an error message to dissuade authors from using them.
+It&#8217;s likely that there are other packages that may cause a problem and, as they are
+found, they will be added to the check list. Also, it&#8217;s possible for an author to disable
+the package checking mechanism if they are determined to use a particular
+package.
+</p><!--l. 1341--><p class="indent" > In the event that an article has loaded a problem package, the editors will have to
+decide whether to ask the author to change the article so that it doesn&#8217;t cause a
+problem or to make the changes themselves or to find a way of fudging things to get it
+to work. It depends on the level of <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;expertise amongst the editors and the time
+available.
+</p><!--l. 1348--><p class="indent" > Another problem that can arise is when different articles use packages that conflict.
+For example, one article uses package <span
+class="ecss-1000">foo </span>and another uses package <span
+class="ecss-1000">bar</span>. Each article
+compiles okay as a stand-alone article, but when combined <span
+class="ecss-1000">foo </span>and <span
+class="ecss-1000">bar </span>conflict. Another
+problem may occur when articles load the same package but with conflicting package
+options. To reduce the chance of this occurring, the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class loads some commonly
+used packages. For example, it loads the <span
+class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-24006"></a> package with the <span
+class="ecss-1000">algo2e </span>and <span
+class="ecss-1000">ruled</span>
+options and provides the <span
+class="ecss-1000">algorithm</span><a
+ id="dx1-24007"></a><a
+ id="dx1-24008"></a> environment in addition to <span
+class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-24009"></a>&#8217;s <span
+class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e</span><a
+ id="dx1-24010"></a><a
+ id="dx1-24011"></a>
+environment.
+</p><!--l. 1360--><p class="indent" > Articles that use different input encodings can also cause a problem. For
+example, if one article uses <span
+class="ectt-1000">utf8 </span>and another uses <span
+class="ectt-1000">latin1</span>. If the authors have
+
+
+
+directly entered a diacritic or ligature, such as é or æ, instead of using a
+<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;command, such as <span
+class="ectt-1000">\&#8217;e </span>or <span
+class="ectt-1000">\ae</span>, then this will cause an error on compiling the
+book.<span class="footnote-mark"><a
+href="#fn3x0" id="fn3x0-bk"><sup class="textsuperscript">3</sup></a></span><a
+ id="x1-24012f3"></a>
+The choice then is to either change all non-keyboard characters with the appropriate
+<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;commands or to use the <span
+class="ectt-1000">\inputencoding </span>command, supplied by the <span
+class="ecss-1000">inputenc</span><a
+ id="dx1-24013"></a>
+package, to switch the encoding at the start of each article.
+</p><!--l. 1372--><p class="indent" > Authors who use <span
+class="ectt-1000">\nonumber </span>within an <span
+class="ecss-1000">equation</span><a
+ id="dx1-24014"></a><a
+ id="dx1-24015"></a> environment can mess up the
+hyperlinks. Remove <span
+class="ectt-1000">\nonumber </span>and change the equation environment to <span
+class="ectt-1000">\[ </span>&#x2026;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">\] </span>(or
+just make it a numbered equation).
+</p><!--l. 1377--><p class="indent" > If the article changes the graphics path using <span
+class="ectt-1000">\graphicspath</span>, <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>won&#8217;t
+find the graphics if the imported articles aren&#8217;t in the same directory as the
+book.
+</p><!--l. 1381--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 1381--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.6 </span> <a
+ id="x1-250004.6"></a>Creating the Book Using <span
+class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span></h4>
+<!--l. 1384--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a
+ id="dx1-25001"></a> Perl script is designed to make it easier to produce the print and
+online versions of the book, as well as producing an HTML index of all the imported
+articles with links to the abstracts and PDFs of individual articles. Note that for
+it to work properly, the articles must be imported using <span
+class="ectt-1000">\importarticle</span>,
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">\importpaper </span>or <span
+class="ectt-1000">\importpubpaper</span>, and the imported articles must use the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr</span>
+class.
+</p><!--l. 1392--><p class="indent" > On UNIX style systems, the script can be invoked from a terminal using:
+<spacer type=vertical size=10><span class="obeylines-h">
+ <br /><span
+class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook [</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">options</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">] </span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">filename</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span></span>
+</p><!--l. 1396--><p class="indent" > <spacer type=vertical size=10>
+If that doesn&#8217;t work, or you aren&#8217;t using a UNIX style operating system, the script can
+be invoked from a terminal or command prompt using: <spacer type=vertical size=10><span class="obeylines-h">
+ <br /><span
+class="ectt-1000">perl makejmlrbook [</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">options</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-1000">] </span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">filename</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span></span>
+</p><!--l. 1402--><p class="indent" > <spacer type=vertical size=10>
+The mandatory argument <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">filename</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9; </span>is the name of the master <span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;file containing the
+book. It must use the <span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class. You may omit the <span
+class="ectt-1000">.tex </span>extension. For
+example, if the file is called <span
+class="ectt-1000">proceedings.tex</span>, you can call <span
+class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a
+ id="dx1-25002"></a> as
+follows:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-44">
+perl&#x00A0;makejmlrbook&#x00A0;proceedings
+</div>
+<!--l. 1410--><p class="nopar" > This will create the files <span
+class="ectt-1000">proceedings-print.pdf </span>(the print version) and
+<span
+class="ectt-1000">proceedings-online.pdf </span>(the online version). It will also create a directory
+(folder) called <span
+class="ectt-1000">html </span>in which the HTML files and individual article PDFs will be
+placed.
+</p><!--l. 1417--><p class="indent" > The options to <span
+class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a
+ id="dx1-25003"></a> are as follows:
+ </p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;online</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Generate the color on-line version (default).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;noonline</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Don&#8217;t generate the color on-line version.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;print</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Generate the grayscale print version (default).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;noprint</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Don&#8217;t generate the grayscale print version.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;html</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Generate the HTML files and the individual article PDFs (default).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;nohtml</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Don&#8217;t generate the HTML files and the individual article PDFs.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;logourl </span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecbi-1000">url</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Make the logo on the HTML index page link to <span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-1000">url</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;batchtex</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Run <span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;in batch mode.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;nobatchtex</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Don&#8217;t run <span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;in batch mode (default).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;quieter</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Reduce chatter to STDOUT (doesn&#8217;t eliminate all messages). This also
+ runs <span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;in batch mode.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;noquieter</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Don&#8217;t reduce messages to STDOUT (default).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;version</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Display the version number and exit.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;help</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">List all available options.</dd></dl>
+
+
+
+<!--l. 1438--><p class="indent" > There are also some more advanced options, but these haven&#8217;t been fully
+tested:
+ </p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;latexapp </span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecbi-1000">name</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Application used to call <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>. Defaults to &#8220;pdflatex&#8221;.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;latexopt </span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecbi-1000">string</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Options to pass to <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;format </span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecbi-1000">string</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Output format (defaults to &#8220;pdf&#8221;). This may need to be
+ changed if you change the <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;application.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;bibtexapp </span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecbi-1000">name</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Application use to process the bibliography. Defaults to
+ &#8220;bibtex&#8221;.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="ecbx-1000">&#8211;bibtexopt </span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecbi-1000">string</span><span
+class="cmsy-10">&#x27E9;</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Options to pass to Bib<span class="TEX">T<span
+class="E">E</span>X</span>.</dd></dl>
+
+
+
+<!--l. 1453--><p class="indent" > <a
+ id="likesection.1"></a><a
+ id="Q1-1-27"></a>
+</p>
+<!--l. 2--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a></p><h3 class="likesectionHead"><a
+ id="x1-260004.6"></a>Index</h3>
+<!--l. 4--><p class="noindent" > <span
+class="ecbx-1000">Symbols</span>
+</p>
+ <div class="theindex"><span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\\</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5020" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">1</span></a> <br /></span>
+<p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">A</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">abstract </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7001" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">2</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\acks</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7005" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">3</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\addr</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5021" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">4</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\addtocpart</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21012" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">5</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">algorithm </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11001" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">6</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24007" ><span class="underline">7</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">algorithm2e </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11011" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">8</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24010" ><span class="underline">9</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3007" >10</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11013" >11</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11014" >12</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24006" >13</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24009" >14</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\algorithmref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14009" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">15</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">align </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15007" ><span class="underline">16</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15011" ><span class="underline">17</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15017" ><span class="underline">18</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">align* </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15009" ><span class="underline">19</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">altdescription </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-12001" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">20</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">amsmath </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3002" >21</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15001" >22</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15002" >23</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15004" >24</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15025" >25</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">amssymb </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3003" >26</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\AND</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5019" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">27</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\and</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5018" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">28</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\appendix</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7012" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">29</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21019" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">30</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\appendixref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14003" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">31</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\articleauthorref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22008" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">32</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\articlepageref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22004" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">33</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\articlepagesref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22005" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">34</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\articletitleref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22007" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">35</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\Author</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21005" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">36</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\author</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5013" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">37</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20009" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">38</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">authorsignoff </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21003" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">39</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">axiom </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13017" ><span class="underline">40</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\axiomref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14016" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">41</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">B</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\bibliography</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-8002" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">42</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">C</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\caption</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11003" ><span class="underline">43</span></a> <br /></span>
+
+
+
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\chapter</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21013" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">44</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\chapterref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22003" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">45</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\citep</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-8003" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">46</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\citet</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-8004" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">47</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item">class options:<br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">10pt</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19023" ><span class="underline">48</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">11pt</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19024" ><span class="underline">49</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">12pt</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19025" ><span class="underline">50</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">7x10</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19017" ><span class="underline">51</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">color</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4003" ><span class="underline">52</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19006" ><span class="underline">53</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">gray</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4004" ><span class="underline">54</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-16003" ><span class="underline">55</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19007" ><span class="underline">56</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">letterpaper</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19016" ><span class="underline">57</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">nowcp</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4001" ><span class="underline">58</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19001" ><span class="underline">59</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">prehyperref</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19018" ><span class="underline">60</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19021" ><span class="underline">61</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">tablecaptionbottom</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4009" ><span class="underline">62</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19012" ><span class="underline">63</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">tablecaptiontop</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4005" ><span class="underline">64</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19008" ><span class="underline">65</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ecss-1000">wcp</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4002" ><span class="underline">66</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5008" ><span class="underline">67</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19002" ><span class="underline">68</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">combine </span>class&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2003" >69</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2004" >70</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3011" >71</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24001" >72</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">combnat </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3014" >73</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">conjecture </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13015" ><span class="underline">74</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\conjectureref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14015" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">75</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">corollary </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13011" ><span class="underline">76</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\corollaryref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14013" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">77</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">D</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\DeclareMathOperator</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15020" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">78</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\DeclareMathOperator*</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15023" ><span class="underline">79</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">definition </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13013" ><span class="underline">80</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\definitionref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14014" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">81</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">description </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-12003" ><span class="underline">82</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">E</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\Editor</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21008" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">83</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\editor</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5011" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">84</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\editors</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5012" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">85</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\Email</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5017" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">86</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">enumerate </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11005" ><span class="underline">87</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11009" ><span class="underline">88</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">enumerate* </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11007" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">89</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item">environments:<br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">abstract</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7002" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">90</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">algorithm</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11002" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">91</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24008" ><span class="underline">92</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">algorithm2e</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11012" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">93</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24011" ><span class="underline">94</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">align</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15008" ><span class="underline">95</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15012" ><span class="underline">96</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15018" ><span class="underline">97</span></a> <br /></span>
+
+
+
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">align*</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15010" ><span class="underline">98</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">altdescription</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-12002" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">99</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">authorsignoff</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21004" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">100</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">axiom</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13018" ><span class="underline">101</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">conjecture</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13016" ><span class="underline">102</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">corollary</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13012" ><span class="underline">103</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">definition</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13014" ><span class="underline">104</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">description</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-12004" ><span class="underline">105</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">enumerate</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11006" ><span class="underline">106</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11010" ><span class="underline">107</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">enumerate*</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11008" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">108</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">equation</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15006" ><span class="underline">109</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24015" ><span class="underline">110</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">example</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13004" ><span class="underline">111</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">jmlrpapers</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21021" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">112</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">keywords</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7004" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">113</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">lemma</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13006" ><span class="underline">114</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">proof</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13020" ><span class="underline">115</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">proposition</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13008" ><span class="underline">116</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">remark</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13010" ><span class="underline">117</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">signoff</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21007" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">118</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">split</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15014" ><span class="underline">119</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">table</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4007" ><span class="underline">120</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4011" ><span class="underline">121</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19010" ><span class="underline">122</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19014" ><span class="underline">123</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-subitem">&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<span
+class="ectt-1000">theorem</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13002" ><span class="underline">124</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">epsfig </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3010" >125</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2013" >126</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">equation </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15005" ><span class="underline">127</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24014" ><span class="underline">128</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\equationref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14004" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">129</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">example </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13003" ><span class="underline">130</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\exampleref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14017" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">131</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">F</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\figureref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14007" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">132</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\floatconts</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4008" ><span class="underline">133</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4012" ><span class="underline">134</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-9001" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">135</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19011" ><span class="underline">136</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19015" ><span class="underline">137</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\frontmatter</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21002" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">138</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">G</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\gdef</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20002" ><span class="underline">139</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">geometry </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24005" >140</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2011" >141</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\global</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20003" ><span class="underline">142</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">graphicx </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3006" >143</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-9002" >144</a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">H</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">hyperref </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2005" >145</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3012" >146</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19019" >147</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19020" >148</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19022" >149</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24002" >150</a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">I</span>
+
+
+
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\ifprint</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-16002" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">151</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\IfTitleElement</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-23005" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">152</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\importarticle</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21024" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">153</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\importpaper</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21023" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">154</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22002" ><span class="underline">155</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\importpubarticle</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22006" ><span class="underline">156</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\importpubpaper</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21022" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">157</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22001" ><span class="underline">158</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\includegraphics</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-9003" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">159</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-16001" ><span class="underline">160</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20013" ><span class="underline">161</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\includeteximage</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-9004" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">162</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">inputenc </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24013" >163</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\intertext</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15016" ><span class="underline">164</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\issue</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-23004" ><span class="underline">165</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">J</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlr2e </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2001" >166</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3008" >167</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5001" >168</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5014" >169</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrnowcp</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19004" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">170</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">jmlrpapers </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21020" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">171</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrproceedings</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19005" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">172</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrpublished</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5006" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">173</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrsubmitted</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5005" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">174</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrvolume</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5003" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">175</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrwcp</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19003" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">176</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">jmlrwcp2e </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2002" >177</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3009" >178</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5002" >179</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5015" >180</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlrworkshop</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5007" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">181</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\jmlryear</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5004" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">182</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">K</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">keywords </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7003" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">183</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">L</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\label</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11004" ><span class="underline">184</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14001" ><span class="underline">185</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">lemma </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13005" ><span class="underline">186</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\lemmaref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14011" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">187</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\logo</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20012" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">188</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">M</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\mailto</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-6002" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">189</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\mainmatter</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21010" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">190</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2015" >191</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2016" >192</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3016" >193</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-18001" >194</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-25001" >195</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-25002" >196</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-25003" >197</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\maketitle</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5009" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">198</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21001" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">199</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">N</span>
+
+
+
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\Name</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5016" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">200</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">natbib </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3004" >201</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-8001" >202</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-8005" >203</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\newcommand</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20004" ><span class="underline">204</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\newenvironment</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20005" ><span class="underline">205</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">O</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\operatorname</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15019" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">206</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\operatorname*</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15022" ><span class="underline">207</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">P</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\paragraph</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21017" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">208</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\part</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21011" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">209</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">pdfpages </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2007" >210</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24004" >211</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2010" >212</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\productioneditor</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20015" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">213</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">proof </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13019" ><span class="underline">214</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">proposition </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13007" ><span class="underline">215</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">psfig </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2012" >216</a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">R</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">remark </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13009" ><span class="underline">217</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\remarkref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14012" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">218</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\renewcommand</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20006" ><span class="underline">219</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\renewenvironment</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20007" ><span class="underline">220</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">S</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">scrartcl </span>class&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3001" >221</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\section</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7006" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">222</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21014" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">223</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\section*</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7007" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">224</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\sectionref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14002" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">225</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\set</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15003" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">226</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">setspace </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3015" >227</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\SetTitleElement</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-23002" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">228</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">signoff </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21006" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">229</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">siunitx </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20001" >230</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">split </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15013" ><span class="underline">231</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">subfig </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2006" >232</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-10001" >233</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24003" >234</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2009" >235</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\subfigref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14008" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">236</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\subfigure</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-10002" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">237</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\subparagraph</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21018" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">238</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\subsection</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7008" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">239</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21015" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">240</span></a> <br /></span>
+
+
+
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\subsection*</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7009" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">241</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\subsubsection</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7010" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">242</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21016" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">243</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\subsubsection*</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7011" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">244</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\subtable</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-10003" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">245</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\subtabref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14006" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">246</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\subtitle</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20011" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">247</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\sum</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15021" ><span class="underline">248</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">T</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">table </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4006" ><span class="underline">249</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4010" ><span class="underline">250</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19009" ><span class="underline">251</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19013" ><span class="underline">252</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\tableofcontents</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21009" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">253</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\tableref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14005" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">254</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\team</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20014" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">255</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\text</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15015" ><span class="underline">256</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ectt-1000">theorem </span>(environment)&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13001" ><span class="underline">257</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">theorem </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2014" >258</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\theoremref</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14010" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">259</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">tikz </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-9005" >260</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\title</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5010" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">261</span></a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20008" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">262</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\titlebody</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-23001" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">263</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">U</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\url</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-6001" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">264</span></a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">url </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3005" >265</a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">V</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ectt-1000">\volume</span></span></span>&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20010" ><span
+class="ecti-1000">266</span></a> <br /></span>
+</p><p class="theindex"> <span
+class="ecbx-1000">X</span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">xcolor </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-16004" >267</a>, <a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-16005" >268</a> <br /></span>
+<span class="index-item"><span
+class="ecss-1000">xkeyval </span>package&#x00A0;&#x00A0;<a
+href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3013" >269</a> <br /></span>
+</p></div>
+<!--l. 1453--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a>
+</p>
+ <div class="footnotes"><!--l. 51--><p class="indent" > <span class="footnote-mark"><a
+href="#fn1x0-bk" id="fn1x0"><sup class="textsuperscript">1</sup></a></span><span
+class="ecrm-0800">Currently </span><span
+class="ecss-0800">jmlr </span><span
+class="ecrm-0800">will check if </span><span
+class="ecss-0800">subfig</span><a
+ id="dx1-2009"></a><span
+class="ecrm-0800">, </span><span
+class="ecss-0800">pdfpages</span><a
+ id="dx1-2010"></a><span
+class="ecrm-0800">, </span><span
+class="ecss-0800">geometry</span><a
+ id="dx1-2011"></a><span
+class="ecrm-0800">, </span><span
+class="ecss-0800">psfig</span><a
+ id="dx1-2012"></a><span
+class="ecrm-0800">, </span><span
+class="ecss-0800">epsfig</span><a
+ id="dx1-2013"></a> <span
+class="ecrm-0800">and </span><span
+class="ecss-0800">theorem</span><a
+ id="dx1-2014"></a> <span
+class="ecrm-0800">are loaded and</span>
+<span
+class="ecrm-0800">will throw an error. If other packages are found to be a problem, they will be added to the</span>
+<span
+class="ecrm-0800">list.</span></p><!--l. 1285--><p class="noindent" ><span class="footnote-mark"><a
+href="#fn2x0-bk" id="fn2x0"><sup class="textsuperscript">2</sup></a></span><span
+class="ecrm-0800">The default title page layout doesn&#8217;t use </span><span
+class="ectt-0800">issue</span><span
+class="ecrm-0800">, but if required it can be set with</span>
+<span
+class="ectt-0800">\issue</span><a
+ id="dx1-23004"></a><span
+class="ectt-0800">{</span><span
+class="cmsy-8">&#x27E8;</span><span
+class="ecti-0800">number</span><span
+class="cmsy-8">&#x27E9;</span><span
+class="ectt-0800">}</span></p>
+<!--l. 1366--><p class="indent" > <span class="footnote-mark"><a
+href="#fn3x0-bk" id="fn3x0"><sup class="textsuperscript">3</sup></a></span><span
+class="ecrm-0800">and may also cause a problem for the editor&#8217;s text editor.</span></p> </div>
+
+</body></html>
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..23ad3426b4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1455 @@
+\documentclass{nlctdoc}
+
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage{ifthen}
+\usepackage[colorlinks,
+ bookmarks,
+ hyperindex=false,
+ pdfauthor={Nicola L.C. Talbot},
+ pdftitle={jmlr: LaTeX2e Classes for the Journal of Machine Learning Research},
+ pdfkeywords={LaTeX,jmlr}]{hyperref}
+
+\CheckSum{3333}
+\OnlyDescription
+
+\begin{document}
+\MakeShortVerb{"}
+\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+
+ \title{\LaTeXe\ Classes for the Journal of Machine
+Learning Research}
+ \author{Nicola L. C. Talbot\\[10pt]
+\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}}
+
+ \date{2010-06-17 (version 1.06)}
+ \maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+The \clsfmt{jmlr} class is for articles that need to be formatted
+according to the Journal of Machine Learning Research style. This
+class is based on the \sty{jmlr2e} and \sty{jmlrwcp2e} packages
+but has been adapted to enable it to work better with the
+\cls{combine} class to collate the articles into a book.
+\sectionref{sec:jmlr} describes how to use the \clsfmt{jmlr} class.
+
+The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class is for combining JMLR articles into a book.
+This class uses \cls{combine} and \sty{hyperref}, which are
+troublesome enough on their own but together are quite fragile. The
+\clsfmt{jmlrbook} class redefines some internals to get \clsfmt{combine}
+and \clsfmt{hyperref} to work together but some packages (e.g.\
+\sty{subfig} and \sty{pdfpages}) are likely to mess everything up
+and cause errors. This is why the guidelines to authors are fairly
+stringent and why \clsfmt{jmlr} will give an error message if certain
+packages are loaded.\footnote{Currently \clsfmt{jmlr} will check if
+\sty{subfig}, \sty{pdfpages}, \sty{geometry}, \sty{psfig},
+\sty{epsfig} and \sty{theorem} are loaded and will throw an error.
+If other packages are found to be a problem, they will be added to
+the list.} The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class works best with PDF\LaTeX\ so
+authors should ensure that their articles can compile with
+PDF\LaTeX. \sectionref{sec:jmlrbook} describes how to use the
+\clsfmt{jmlrbook} class.
+
+The \app{makejmlrbook} Perl script can be used to make a book that
+uses the \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class. In addition to creating the print
+and online versions of the book, it will compile the individual
+articles, running Bib\TeX\ where necessary, and create a set of
+HTML files containing a list of all the articles imported into the
+book along with links to the abstracts and PDFs of the individual
+articles. \sectionref{sec:makejmlrbook} describes how
+to use the \app{makejmlrbook} application.
+
+\section{Required Packages}
+
+The \clsfmt{jmlr} class is based on the \cls{scrartcl} class and loads
+the following packages: \sty{amsmath}, \sty{amssymb},
+\sty{natbib}, \sty{url}, \sty{graphicx} and \sty{algorithm2e}.
+Note that unlike the \sty{jmlr2e} and \sty{jmlrwcp2e} packages,
+this class file does not load the obsolete \sty{epsfig} package.
+
+The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class additionally loads the \cls{combine} class
+and the following packages: \sty{hyperref}, \sty{xkeyval},
+\sty{combnat} and \sty{setspace}.
+
+The \app{makejmlrbook} script requires Perl, \TeX\ and \TeX4ht.
+
+\section{Guidelines for Article Authors}
+\label{sec:jmlr}
+
+Article authors should use the \clsfmt{jmlr} class. This class
+comes with example files \texttt{jmlr-sample.tex} and
+\texttt{jmlrwcp-sample.tex}, which can be used as templates.
+
+The following class options are available:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\clsopt{nowcp}]The article is for the Journal of Machine
+Learning Research (default).
+\item[\clsopt{wcp}] The article is for JMLR Workshop and Conference
+Proceedings.
+\item[\clsopt{color}] Color version (see \sectionref{sec:color}).
+
+\item[\clsopt{gray}] Grayscale version (see \sectionref{sec:color}).
+
+\item[\clsopt{tablecaptiontop}] in a \env{table} environment,
+\ics{floatconts} puts the caption at the top.
+
+\item[\clsopt{tablecaptionbottom}] in a \env{table} environment,
+\ics{floatconts} puts the caption at the bottom.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Title Information}
+
+The \clsfmt{jmlr} class uses different syntax from \sty{jmlr2e} and
+\sty{jmlrwcp2e} to specify the title information. In particular, it
+doesn't define \cs{jmlrheading} and \cs{ShortHeading}. Instead, the
+following commands should be used:
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrvolume}]
+\cs{jmlrvolume}\marg{number}
+\end{definition}
+This specifies the volume number. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\jmlrvolume{2}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlryear}]
+\cs{jmlryear}\marg{year}
+\end{definition}
+This specifies the year. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\jmlryear{2010}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrsubmitted}]
+\cs{jmlrsubmitted}\marg{date}
+\end{definition}
+This specifies the submission date.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrpublished}]
+\cs{jmlrpublished}\marg{date}
+\end{definition}
+This specifies the publication date.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrworkshop}]
+\cs{jmlrworkshop}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+This specifies the workshop title (for use with the \clsopt{wcp}
+class option).
+
+The title information is specified using the commands described
+below. These commands should typically go in the preamble. As
+with most class files, The title itself is produced using
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\maketitle}]
+\cs{maketitle}
+\end{definition}
+This command should go after \verb|\begin{document}|. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\end{verbatim}
+Before \cs{maketitle}, you must specify the title information
+using the following commands:
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\title}]
+\cs{title}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+This specifies the article's title. A short title for the page
+header can be supplied via the optional argument \meta{short title}.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\editor}]
+\cs{editor}\marg{name}
+\end{definition}
+This specifies the editor's name. If there is more than one
+editor, use:
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\editors}]
+\cs{editors}\marg{names}
+\end{definition}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\author}]
+\cs{author}\marg{author specs}
+\end{definition}
+This specifies the author. The specifications \meta{author specs}
+are a bit different to \sty{jmlr2e} and \sty{jmlrwcp2e}. Use
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Name}]
+\cs{Name}\marg{author's name}
+\end{definition}
+to specify the author's name. Note that if the surname contains a
+space it must be grouped (enclosed in braces \{\}). Similarly if
+the initial letter of each forename is a diacritic it must be
+grouped. (See below for examples.)
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Email}]
+\cs{Email}\marg{author's email}
+\end{definition}
+This specifies the author's email address. It should only be used
+within the argument to \cs{author}.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\and}]
+\cs{and}
+\end{definition}
+This should be used to separate two authors with the same address.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\AND}]
+\cs{AND}
+\end{definition}
+This should be used to separate authors with different addresses.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\\}]
+\verb|\\|
+\end{definition}
+This should be used before an author's address or between authors
+with the same address where there are more that two authors.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\addr}]
+\cs{addr}
+\end{definition}
+This should be used at the start of the address.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[Example 1] Two authors with the same address:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{\Name{Jane Doe} \Email{abc@sample.com}\and
+ \Name{John {Basey Fisher}} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\
+ \addr Address}
+\end{verbatim}
+In this example, the second author has a space in his surname
+so the surname needs to be grouped.
+
+\item[Example 2] Three authors with the same address:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{\Name{Fred Arnold {de la Cour}} \Email{an1@sample.com}\\
+ \Name{Jack Jones} \Email{an3@sample.com}\\
+ \Name{{\'E}louise {\'E}abhla Finchley} \Email{an2@sample.com}\\
+ \addr Address}
+\end{verbatim}
+In this example, the third author has an accent on her
+forename initials so grouping is required.
+
+\item[Example 3] Authors with a different address:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{\Name{John Smith} \Email{abc@sample.com}\\
+ \addr Address 1
+ \AND
+ \Name{May Brown} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\
+ \addr Address 2
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Font Changing Commands}
+
+Use the \LaTeXe\ font changing commands, such as \cs{bfseries} or
+\cs{textbf}\marg{text}, rather than the obsolete \LaTeX2.09
+commands, such as \cs{bf}.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\url}]
+\cs{url}\marg{address}
+\end{definition}
+This will typeset \meta{address} in a typewriter font. Special
+characters, such as \verb|~|, are correctly displayed. Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\mailto}]
+\cs{mailto}\marg{email address}
+\end{definition}
+This will typeset the given email address in a typewriter font.
+Note that this is not the same as \cs{Email}, which should only be
+used in the argument of \cs{author}.
+
+\subsection{Structure}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{abstract}]
+\cs{begin}\{abstract\}\\
+\meta{text}\\
+\cs{end}\{abstract\}
+\end{definition}
+The abstract text should be displayed using the \envfmt{abstract}
+environment.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{keywords}]
+\cs{begin}\{keywords\}\meta{keyword list}\cs{end}\{keywords\}
+\end{definition}
+The keywords should be displayed using the \envfmt{keywords}
+environment.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\acks}]
+\cs{acks}\marg{text}
+\end{definition}
+This displays the acknowledgements.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\section}]
+\cs{section}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+Section titles are created using \cs{section}. The heading is
+automatically numbered and can be cross-referenced using
+\cs{label} and \cs{ref}. Unnumbered sections can be produced
+using:
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\section*}]
+\cs{section*}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsection}]
+\cs{subsection}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+Sub-section titles are created using \cs{subsection}. Unnumbered
+sub-sections can be produced using:
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsection*}]
+\cs{subsection*}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsubsection}]
+\cs{subsubsection}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+Sub-sub-section titles are created using \cs{subsubsection}.
+Unnumbered sub-sub-sections can be produced using:
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsubsection*}]
+\cs{subsubsection*}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+
+Further sectioning levels can be obtained using \cs{paragraph}
+and \cs{subparagraph}, but these are unnumbered with running heads.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\appendix}]
+\cs{appendix}
+\end{definition}
+Use \cs{appendix} to switch to the appendices. This changes
+\cs{section} to produce an appendix. Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{Proof of Theorems}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Citations and Bibliography}
+
+The \clsfmt{jmlr} class automatically loads \sty{natbib} and sets
+the bibliography style to \texttt{plainnat}. References should
+be stored in a \texttt{.bib} file.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\bibliography}]
+\cs{bibliography}\marg{bib file}
+\end{definition}
+This displays the bibliography.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\citep}]
+\cs{citep}\oarg{pre note}\oarg{post note}\marg{label}
+\end{definition}
+Use \cs{citep} for a parenthetical citation.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\citet}]
+\cs{citet}\oarg{note}\marg{label}
+\end{definition}
+Use \cs{citet} for a textual citation.
+
+See the \ctandoc{natbib} for further details.
+
+\subsection{Figures and Tables}
+
+Floats, such as figures, tables and algorithms, are moving objects
+and are supposed to float to the nearest convenient location.
+Please don't force them to go in a particular place. In general
+it's best to use the \texttt{htbp} specifier and don't put
+the float in the middle of a paragraph (that is, make sure there's
+a paragraph break above and below the float). Floats are supposed
+to have a little extra space above and below them to make them
+stand out from the rest of the text. This extra space is put in
+automatically and shouldn't need modifying.
+
+To ensure consistency, please \emph{don't} try changing the
+format of the caption by doing something like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\caption{\textit{A Sample Caption.}}
+\end{verbatim}
+or
+\begin{verbatim}
+\caption{\em A Sample Caption.}
+\end{verbatim}
+You can, of course, change the font for individual words or
+phrases. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\caption{A Sample Caption With Some \emph{Emphasized Words}.}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \clsfmt{jmlr} class provides the following command for displaying
+the contents of a figure or table:
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\floatconts}]
+\cs{floatconts}\marg{label}\marg{caption command}\marg{contents}
+\end{definition}
+This ensures that the caption is correctly positioned and that
+the contents are centered. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:example}% label
+ {\caption{An Example Table}}% caption command
+ {%
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\
+ Data1 & 0.123456
+ \end{tabular}
+ }
+\end{table}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \clsfmt{jmlr} class automatically loads \sty{graphicx} which
+defines:
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\includegraphics}]
+\cs{includegraphics}\oarg{options}\marg{file name}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{options} is a comma-separated list of options.
+
+For example, suppose you have an image called
+\texttt{mypic.png} in a subdirectory called \texttt{images}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {fig:example}% label
+ {\caption{An Example Figure}}% caption command
+ {\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{images/mypic}}
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note that you shouldn't specify the file extension when including
+the image. It's helpful if you can also provide a grayscale
+version of color images. This should be labeled as the color
+image but with \texttt{-gray} immediately before the extension.
+(The extension need not be the same as that of the color image.)
+For example, if you have an image called \texttt{mypic.pdf}, the
+grayscale can be called \texttt{mypic-gray.pdf},
+\texttt{mypic-gray.png} or \texttt{mypic-gray.jpg}.
+See \sectionref{sec:color} for further details.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\includeteximage}]
+\cs{includeteximage}\oarg{options}\marg{file name}
+\end{definition}
+If your image file is made up of \LaTeX\ code (e.g.\ \sty{tikz}
+commands) the file can be included using \cs{includeteximage}.
+The optional argument is a key=value comma-separated list
+where the keys are a subset of those provided by
+\cs{includegraphics}. The main keys are: \texttt{width},
+\texttt{height}, \texttt{scale} and \texttt{angle}.
+
+\subsubsection{Sub-Figures and Sub-Tables}
+
+The \sty{subfig} package causes a problem for \clsfmt{jmlrbook} so
+the \clsfmt{jmlr} class will give an error if it is used. Therefore
+the \clsfmt{jmlr} class provides its own commands for including
+sub-figures and sub-tables.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subfigure}]
+\cs{subfigure}\oarg{title}\oarg{valign}\marg{contents}
+\end{definition}
+This makes a sub-figure where \meta{contents} denotes the contents
+of the sub-figure. This should also include the \cs{label}.
+The first optional argument \meta{title} indicates a caption for
+the sub-figure. By default, the sub-figures are aligned at the
+base. This can be changed with the second optional argument
+\meta{valign}, which may be one of: \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{c}
+(centred) or \texttt{b} (base).
+
+For example, suppose there are two images files, \texttt{mypic1.png}
+and \texttt{mypic2.png}, in the subdirectory \texttt{images}.
+Then they can be included as sub-figures as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {fig:example2}% label for whole figure
+ {\caption{An Example Figure.}}% caption for whole figure
+ {%
+ \subfigure{%
+ \label{fig:pic1}% label for this sub-figure
+ \includegraphics{images/mypic1}
+ }\qquad % space out the images a bit
+ \subfigure{%
+ \label{fig:pic2}% label for this sub-figure
+ \includegraphics{images/mypic2}
+ }
+ }
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subtable}]
+\cs{subtable}\oarg{title}\oarg{valign}\marg{contents}
+\end{definition}
+This is an analogous command for sub-tables. The default value
+for \meta{valign} is \texttt{t}.
+
+\subsection{Algorithms}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{algorithm}]
+\cs{begin}\{algorithm\}\\
+\meta{contents}\\
+\cs{end}\{algorithm\}
+\end{definition}
+Enumerated textual algorithms can be displayed using the
+\envfmt{algorithm} environment. Within this environment, use
+\ics{caption} to set the caption (and \ics{label} to cross-reference
+it). Within the body of the environment you can use the
+\env{enumerate} environment.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{enumerate*}]
+\cs{begin}\{enumerate*\}\\
+\cs{item} \meta{text}\\
+\ldots\\
+\cs{end}\{enumerate*\}
+\end{definition}
+If you want to have nested \env{enumerate} environments but you want
+to keep the same numbering throughout the algorithm, you can use the
+\envfmt{enumerate*} environment, provided by the \clsfmt{jmlr}
+class. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{enumerate*}
+ \item Set the label of vertex $s$ to 0
+ \item Set $i=0$
+ \begin{enumerate*}
+ \item \label{step:locate}Locate all unlabelled vertices
+ adjacent to a vertex labelled $i$ and label them $i+1$
+ \item If vertex $t$ has been labelled,
+ \begin{enumerate*}
+ \item[] the shortest path can be found by backtracking, and
+ the length is given by the label of $t$.
+ \end{enumerate*}
+ otherwise
+ \begin{enumerate*}
+ \item[] increment $i$ and return to step~\ref{step:locate}
+ \end{enumerate*}
+ \end{enumerate*}
+\end{enumerate*}
+\end{algorithm}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{algorithm2e}]
+\cs{begin}\{algorithm2e\}\\
+\meta{contents}\\
+\cs{end}\{algorithm2e\}
+\end{definition}
+Pseudo code can be displayed using the \envfmt{algorithm2e} environment,
+provided by the \sty{algorithm2e} package, which is automatically
+loaded. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{algorithm2e}
+\caption{Computing Net Activation}
+\label{alg:net}
+\dontprintsemicolon
+\linesnumbered
+\KwIn{$x_1, \ldots, x_n, w_1, \ldots, w_n$}
+\KwOut{$y$, the net activation}
+$y\leftarrow 0$\;
+\For{$i\leftarrow 1$ \KwTo $n$}{
+ $y \leftarrow y + w_i*x_i$\;
+}
+\end{algorithm2e}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+See the \ctandoc{algorithm2e} for more details.
+
+\subsection{Description Lists}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{altdescription}]
+\cs{begin}\{altdescription\}\marg{widest label}\\
+\cs{item}\oarg{label} \meta{item text}\\
+\cs{end}\{altdescription\}
+\end{definition}
+In addition to the standard \env{description} environment, the
+\clsfmt{jmlr} class also provides the \envfmt{altdescription} environment.
+This has an argument that should be the widest label used in the
+list. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{altdescription}{differentiate}
+\item[add] A method that adds two variables.
+\item[differentiate] A method that differentiates a function.
+\end{altdescription}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Theorems, Lemmas etc}
+
+The \clsfmt{jmlr} class provides the following theorem-like
+environments: \env{theorem}, \env{example}, \env{lemma},
+\env{proposition}, \env{remark}, \env{corollary}, \env{definition},
+\env{conjecture} and \env{axiom}. Within the body of those
+environments, you can use the \env{proof} environment to display the
+proof if need be. The theorem-like environments all take an
+optional argument, which gives the environment a title. For example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{theorem}[An Example Theorem]
+\label{thm:example}
+This is the theorem.
+\begin{proof}
+This is the proof.
+\end{proof}
+\end{theorem}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Cross-Referencing}
+\label{sec:crossref}
+
+Always use \ics{label} when cross-referencing, rather than writing
+the number explicitly. The \clsfmt{jmlr} class provides some
+convenience commands to assist referencing. These commands,
+described below, can all take a comma-separated list of labels.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\sectionref}]
+\cs{sectionref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to a section or sections. For example, if you defined
+a section as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{Results}\label{sec:results}
+\end{verbatim}
+you can refer to it as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+The results are detailed in \sectionref{sec:results}.
+\end{verbatim}
+This command may also be used for sub-sections and sub-sub-sections.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\appendixref}]
+\cs{appendixref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to an appendix or multiple appendices.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\equationref}]
+\cs{equationref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to an equation or multiple equations.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\tableref}]
+\cs{tableref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to a table or multiple tables. This can also be
+used for sub-tables where the main table number is also required.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subtabref}]
+\cs{subtabref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to sub-tables without the main table number, e.g.
+(\emph{a}) or (\emph{b}).
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\figureref}]
+\cs{figureref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to a figure or multiple figures. This can also
+be used for sub-figures where the main figure number is also
+required, e.g.\ 2(\emph{a}) or 4(\emph{b}).
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subfigref}]
+\cs{subfigref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to sub-figures without the main figure number, e.g.
+(\emph{a}) or (\emph{b}).
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\algorithmref}]
+\cs{algorithmref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to an algorithm or multiple algorithms.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\theoremref}]
+\cs{theoremref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to a theorem or multiple theorems.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\lemmaref}]
+\cs{lemmaref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to a lemma or multiple lemmas.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\remarkref}]
+\cs{remarkref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to a remark or multiple remarks.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\corollaryref}]
+\cs{corollaryref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to a corollary or multiple corollaries.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\definitionref}]
+\cs{definitionref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to a definition or multiple definitions.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\conjectureref}]
+\cs{conjectureref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to a conjecture or multiple conjectures.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\axiomref}]
+\cs{axiomref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to an axiom or multiple axioms.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\exampleref}]
+\cs{exampleref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Used to refer to an example or multiple examples.
+
+\subsection{Mathematics}
+
+The \clsfmt{jmlr} class loads the \sty{amsmath} package so you can use
+any of the commands and environments defined in that package. A
+brief summary of some of the more common commands and environments
+is provided here. See the \ctandoc{amsmath} for further details.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\set}]
+\cs{set}\marg{text}
+\end{definition}
+In addition to the commands provided by \sty{amsmath}, the
+\clsfmt{jmlr} class also provides the \cs{set} command which can
+be used to typeset a set. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+The universal set is denoted $\set{U}$
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Unnumbered single-line equations should be displayed using
+\cs{[} and \cs{]}. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[E = m c^2\]
+\end{verbatim}
+Numbered single-line equations should be displayed using the
+\env{equation} environment. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation}\label{eq:trigrule}
+\cos^2\theta + \sin^2\theta \equiv 1
+\end{equation}
+\end{verbatim}
+Multi-lined numbered equations should be displayed using the
+\env{align} environment. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align}
+f(x) &= x^2 + x\label{eq:f}\\
+f'(x) &= 2x + 1\label{eq:df}
+\end{align}
+\end{verbatim}
+Unnumbered multi-lined equations should be displayed using the
+\env{align*} environment. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align*}
+f(x) &= (x+1)(x-1)\\
+&= x^2 - 1
+\end{align*}
+\end{verbatim}
+If you want to mix numbered with unnumbered lines use the
+\env{align} environment and suppress unwanted line numbers with
+\cs{nonumber}. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align}
+y &= x^2 + 3x - 2x + 1\nonumber\\
+&= x^2 + x + 1\label{eq:y}
+\end{align}
+\end{verbatim}
+An equation that is too long to fit on a single line can be
+displayed using the \env{split} environment.
+
+Text can be embedded in an equation using \ics{text}\marg{text} or
+you can use \ics{intertext}\marg{text} to interupt a multi-line
+environment such as \env{align}.
+
+Predefined operator names are listed in \tableref{tab:operatornames}.
+For additional operators, either use
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\operatorname}]
+\cs{operatorname}\marg{name}
+\end{definition}
+for example
+\begin{verbatim}
+If $X$ and $Y$ are independent,
+$\operatorname{var}(X+Y) =
+\operatorname{var}(X) + \operatorname{var}(Y)$
+\end{verbatim}
+or declare it with
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\DeclareMathOperator}]
+\cs{DeclareMathOperator}\marg{command}\marg{name}
+\end{definition}
+for example
+\begin{verbatim}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\var}{var}
+\end{verbatim}
+and then use this new command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+If $X$ and $Y$ are independent,
+$\var(X+Y) = \var(X)+\var(Y)$
+\end{verbatim}
+
+If you want limits that go above and
+below the operator (like \ics{sum}) use the starred versions
+(\ics{operatorname*} or \ics{DeclareMathOperator*}).
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption{Predefined Operator Names (taken from
+ \sty{amsmath} documentation)}
+\label{tab:operatornames}%
+\vskip\baselineskip
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{rlrlrlrl}
+\cs{arccos} & $\arccos$ & \cs{deg} & $\deg$ & \cs{lg} & $\lg$ & \cs{projlim} & $\projlim$ \\
+\cs{arcsin} & $\arcsin$ & \cs{det} & $\det$ & \cs{lim} & $\lim$ & \cs{sec} & $\sec$ \\
+\cs{arctan} & $\arctan$ & \cs{dim} & $\dim$ & \cs{liminf} & $\liminf$ & \cs{sin} & $\sin$ \\
+\cs{arg} & $\arg$ & \cs{exp} & $\exp$ & \cs{limsup} & $\limsup$ & \cs{sinh} & $\sinh$ \\
+\cs{cos} & $\cos$ & \cs{gcd} & $\gcd$ & \cs{ln} & $\ln$ & \cs{sup} & $\sup$ \\
+\cs{cosh} & $\cosh$ & \cs{hom} & $\hom$ & \cs{log} & $\log$ & \cs{tan} & $\tan$ \\
+\cs{cot} & $\cot$ & \cs{inf} & $\inf$ & \cs{max} & $\max$ & \cs{tanh} & $\tanh$ \\
+\cs{coth} & $\coth$ & \cs{injlim} & $\injlim$ & \cs{min} & $\min$ \\
+\cs{csc} & $\csc$ & \cs{ker} & $\ker$ & \cs{Pr} & $\Pr$
+\end{tabular}\par
+\begin{tabular}{rlrl}
+\cs{varlimsup} & $\varlimsup$
+& \cs{varinjlim} & $\varinjlim$\\
+\cs{varliminf} & $\varliminf$
+& \cs{varprojlim} & $\varprojlim$
+\end{tabular}
+
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection{Color vs Grayscale}
+\label{sec:color}
+
+It's helpful if authors supply grayscale versions of their
+articles in the event that the article is to be incorporated into
+a black and white printed book. With external PDF, PNG or JPG
+graphic files, you just need to supply a grayscale version of the
+file. For example, if the file is called \texttt{myimage.png},
+then the gray version should be \texttt{myimage-gray.png} or
+\texttt{myimage-gray.pdf} or \texttt{myimage-gray.jpg}. You don't
+need to modify your code. The \clsfmt{jmlr} class checks for
+the existence of the grayscale version if it is print mode
+(provided you have used \ics{includegraphics} and haven't
+specified the file extension).
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifprint}]
+\cs{ifprint}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
+\end{definition}
+You can use \cs{ifprint} to determine which mode you are in.
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+in \figureref{fig:nodes}, the
+\ifprint{dark gray}{purple}
+ellipse represents an input and the
+\ifprint{light gray}{yellow} ellipse
+represents an output.
+\end{verbatim}
+Another example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+{\ifprint{\bfseries}{\color{red}}important text!}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+You can use the class option \clsopt{gray} to see how the
+document will appear in gray scale mode.
+
+The \sty{xcolor} class is loaded with the \pkgoptfmt{x11names}
+option, so you can use any of the x11 predefined colors (listed
+in the \ctandoc{xcolor}).
+
+\subsection{Where To Go For Help}
+
+If you have a \LaTeX\ query, the first place to go to is the
+\urlfootref{http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq}{UK TUG FAQ}.
+
+If you are unfamiliar or just getting started with \LaTeX, there's
+a list of on-line introductions to \LaTeX\ at:
+\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=man-latex}
+
+There are also forums, mailing lists and newsgroups. For example,
+the \LaTeX\ Community (\url{http://www.latex-community.org/}),
+the \texttt{texhax} mailing list
+(\url{http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/texhax}) and
+\texttt{comp.text.tex} (archives available at
+\url{http://groups.google.com/group/comp.text.tex/}).
+
+Documentation for packages or classes can be found using the
+\texttt{texdoc} application. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+texdoc natbib
+\end{verbatim}
+Alternatively, you can go to
+\texttt{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/}\meta{name} where
+\meta{name} is the name of the package. For example:
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/natbib}
+
+For a general guide to preparing papers (regardless of whether you
+are using \LaTeX\ or a word processor), see Kate L.~Turabian, \qt{A
+manual for writers of term papers, theses, and dissertations}, The
+University of Chicago Press, 1996.
+
+\section{Guidelines for Production Editors}
+\label{sec:jmlrbook}
+
+The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class can be used to combine articles that
+use the \clsfmt{jmlr} document class into a book. The following sample
+files are provided: \texttt{paper1/paper1.tex},
+\texttt{paper2/paper2.tex}, \texttt{paper3/paper3.tex},
+\texttt{jmlr-sample.tex}, \texttt{jmlrwcp-sample.tex} and
+\texttt{jmlrbook-sample.tex}. All but the last named one are
+articles using the \clsfmt{jmlr} class. The last one
+(\texttt{jmlrbook-sample.tex}) uses the \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class file to
+combine the articles into a book. Note that no modifications are
+needed to the files using the \clsfmt{jmlr} class when they are
+imported into the book. They can either be compiled as stand-alone
+articles or with the entire book.
+
+Before you compile the book, make sure that all the articles
+compile as stand-alone documents (and run Bib\TeX\ where
+necessary). You can use the \app{makejmlrbook} Perl script to compile
+the book and create associated HTML files. See
+\sectionref{sec:makejmlrbook} for details.
+
+\subsection{\clsfmt{jmlrbook} Class Options}
+\begin{description}
+\item[\clsopt{nowcp}]The imported pre-published articles were
+published in the Journal of Machine Learning Research (default).
+\item[\clsopt{wcp}] The imported pre-published articles were
+published in the JMLR Workshop and Conference Proceedings.
+
+If the book has a mixture of JMLR and JMLR WCP articles, you
+can switch between them using
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrwcp}]
+\cs{jmlrwcp}
+\end{definition}
+and
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrnowcp}]
+\cs{jmlrnowcp}
+\end{definition}
+Alternatively, you can set the name of the journal or conference
+proceedings using:
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrproceedings}]
+\cs{jmlrproceedings}\marg{short title}\marg{long title}
+\end{definition}
+
+\item[\clsopt{color}] Color version (see \sectionref{sec:color}).
+Use this option for the on-line version with hyperlinks enabled
+(default).
+
+\item[\clsopt{gray}] Grayscale version (see \sectionref{sec:color}).
+Use this option for the print version without hyperlinks.
+
+\item[\clsopt{tablecaptiontop}] in a \env{table} environment,
+\ics{floatconts} puts the caption at the top.
+
+\item[\clsopt{tablecaptionbottom}] in a \env{table} environment,
+\ics{floatconts} puts the caption at the bottom.
+
+\item[\clsopt{letterpaper}] Set the paper size to letter (default).
+
+\item[\clsopt{7x10}] Set the paper size to $7\times10$ inches.
+
+\item[\clsopt{prehyperref}] The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} automatically loads
+the \sty{hyperref} package, but some packages need to be loaded
+before \sty{hyperref}. This information can be specified using
+the \clsopt{prehyperref} option. This is a key=value option. For
+example, to load the packages \styfmt{foo} and \styfmt{bar} before
+\sty{hyperref}, you can do:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[prehyperref={\usepackage{foo,bar}}]{jmlrbook}
+\end{verbatim}
+or:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[prehyperref={\usepackage{foo}\usepackage{bar}}]{jmlrbook}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\item[\clsopt{10pt}] Use 10pt as the normal text size.
+\item[\clsopt{11pt}] Use 11pt as the normal text size (default).
+\item[\clsopt{12pt}] Use 12pt as the normal text size.
+
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{The Preamble}
+
+Any packages that the imported articles load (which aren't
+automatically loaded by \clsfmt{jmlr}) must be loaded in the book's
+preamble. For example, if one or more of the articles load the
+\sty{siunitx} package, this package must be loaded in the book.
+
+Commands that are defined in the imported articles will be local
+to that article unless they have been globally defined using
+\ics{gdef} or \ics{global}. Since most authors use \ics{newcommand}
+and \ics{newenvironment} (or \ics{renewcommand} and
+\ics{renewenvironment}) this shouldn't cause a conflict if more
+that one article has defined the same command or environment.
+For example, in the sample files supplied, both
+\texttt{paper1/paper1.tex} and \texttt{paper2/paper2.tex} have
+defined the command \cs{samplecommand} using \cs{newcommand}. As
+long as this command isn't also defined in the book, there won't
+be a conflict.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\title}]
+\cs{title}\oarg{PDF title}\marg{book title}
+\end{definition}
+In the book preamble, \cs{title} sets the book title and the optional
+argument is used for the PDF title, which will be displayed
+when the reader views the PDF file's properties in their PDF viewer.
+(Note that in the imported articles, \cs{title} sets the article's
+title and the optional argument sets the short title for the
+page header and table of contents.)
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\author}]
+\cs{author}\oarg{PDF author(s)}\marg{book author(s)}
+\end{definition}
+In the book preamble, \cs{author} sets the book's author (or editor)
+and the optional argument is used for the PDF author, which will be
+displayed when the reader views the PDF file's properties in their
+PDF viewer. (Note that in the imported articles, \cs{author} sets
+the article's author and the optional argument sets the short author
+list for the page header.)
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\volume}]
+\cs{volume}\marg{number}
+\end{definition}
+This command sets the book's volume number. Omit if the book has no
+volume number.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subtitle}]
+\cs{subtitle}\marg{sub-title}
+\end{definition}
+This command sets the book's subtitle. Omit if the book has no
+sub-title.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\logo}]
+\cs{logo}\marg{image command}
+\end{definition}
+This sets the book's title image. Use \ics{includegraphics} and
+omit the file extension. If you provide a grayscale version as
+well as a color version, the grayscale version will be used for
+the print version of the book. (See \sectionref{sec:color}
+for further details.)
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\team}]
+\cs{team}\marg{team title}
+\end{definition}
+This can be used to set the name of the editorial team. This
+command may be omitted if not required.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\productioneditor}]
+\cs{productioneditor}\marg{name}
+\end{definition}
+This command may be used to name the production editor. The command
+may be omitted if not required.
+
+See \sectionref{sec:modifytitle} for details on how to modify the
+layout of the title page.
+
+\subsection{Main Book Commands}
+
+All commands that are provided by the \clsfmt{jmlr} class are
+also available with the \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class, but some commands
+might behave differently depending on whether they are in the
+main part of the book or within the imported articles.
+
+In the main part of the book you can use the following commands:
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\maketitle}]
+\cs{maketitle}
+\end{definition}
+This displays the book's title page. Note that \cs{maketitle} has
+a different effect when used in imported articles.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\frontmatter}]
+\cs{frontmatter}
+\end{definition}
+Use this command at the start of the front matter (e.g.\ before the
+foreword or preface). This will make chapters unnumbered even if you
+use \cs{chapter} instead of \cs{chapter*}. It also sets the page
+style and sets the page numbering to lower case Roman numerals.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{authorsignoff}]
+\cs{begin}\{authorsignoff\}\\
+\meta{author list}\\
+\cs{end}\{authorsignoff\}
+\end{definition}
+This environment may be used by the author signing off at the end of a chapter such as the
+foreword. Within the environment use:
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Author}]
+\cs{author}\marg{details}
+\end{definition}
+for the author's details. More than one \cs{Author} should be used
+if there is more than one author. Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{authorsignoff}
+\Author{Nicola Talbot\\
+University of East Anglia}
+\Author{Anne Author\\
+University of No Where}
+\end{authorsignoff}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{signoff}]
+\cs{begin}\{signoff\}\oarg{team name}\marg{date}\\
+\meta{editor list}\\
+\cs{end}\{signoff\}
+\end{definition}
+This environment may be used by the editorial team when signing off
+a chapter such as the preface. If the optional argument is omitted,
+\qt{The Editorial Team} is used.
+
+Within the environment use:
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Editor}]
+\cs{Editor}\marg{details}
+\end{definition}
+for each editor. Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{signoff}{March 2010}
+% First editor:
+\Editor{Nicola Talbot\\
+University of East Anglia\\
+\mailto{N.Talbot@uea.ac.uk}}
+% Second editor:
+\Editor{Anne Editor\\
+University of Nowhere\\
+\mailto{ae@sample.com}}
+\end{signoff}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\tableofcontents}]
+\cs{tableofcontents}
+\end{definition}
+This command displays the book's table of contents. Note that it
+has a different effect if used in an imported article.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\mainmatter}]
+\cs{mainmatter}
+\end{definition}
+Use this command to switch to the book's main matter. This will
+switch the chapter numbering back on, reset the page numbering to
+Arabic and set up the main page style.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\part}]
+\cs{part}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+If used in the main part of the book, this command will start a
+new part and issue a clear double page. Note that this command
+has a different effect if used in an imported article.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\addtocpart}]
+\cs{addtocpart}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+This adds \meta{title} to the table of contents, issues a clear
+double page, but doesn't display any text or affect the part
+numbering.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\chapter}]
+\cs{chapter}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+This command may be used in the main body of the book but will
+cause an error if used within an imported article.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\section}]
+\cs{section}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsection}]
+\cs{subsection}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsubsection}]
+\cs{subsubsection}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\paragraph}]
+\cs{paragraph}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subparagraph}]
+\cs{subparagraph}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+\end{definition}
+These commands may be used in the main body of the book or within
+imported articles. In the main body of the book they need to be
+within a chapter and will be numbered according to the chapter.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\appendix}]
+\cs{appendix}
+\end{definition}
+If used in the main body of the book, this will switch to the
+book appendices. Subsequent \cs{chapter} commands will produce the
+appendices. If used within an imported article, it will switch
+to the article appendices and won't affect the main part of
+the book.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{jmlrpapers}]
+\cs{begin}\{jmlrpapers\}\\
+\meta{imported papers}\\
+\cs{end}\{jmlrpapers\}
+\end{definition}
+This environment must be used when importing articles. Within this
+environment, use the following commands to import articles:
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\importpubpaper}]
+\cs{importpubpaper}\oarg{label}\marg{directory}\marg{file}\marg{pages}
+\end{definition}
+This imports an article that has already been published elsewhere.
+The \meta{pages} argument should be the page range from the
+\emph{previously published} version of this article. This may not
+necessarily be the same as the page range of the article in the book.
+The directory the imported file is contained in is is given by
+\meta{directory}. If the file is in the same directory as the
+book, use a dot. The file name is given by \meta{file}. The article
+is also given a label, specified by the optional argument. This
+is \meta{directory}/\meta{file} by default. The label is used
+as a prefix to labels in the imported articles which ensures that
+cross-references are unique. You can also use this label to reference
+the article elsewhere in the book (see \sectionref{sec:bkcrossref}).
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\importpaper}]
+\cs{importpaper}\oarg{label}\marg{directory}\marg{file}
+\end{definition}
+Imports an article that is being published in the book. The
+arguments are the same as above except that there is no page
+range (the page range is computed automatically).
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\importarticle}]
+\cs{importarticle}\oarg{label}\marg{directory}\marg{file}
+\end{definition}
+This imports an article that hasn't been published elsewhere. There
+is no page range, but the other arguments are the same as
+those describe above for \cs{importpubpaper}.
+
+Example: to import a previously published paper
+\texttt{paper1/paper1.tex} and an unpublished paper
+\texttt{paper2/paper2.tex}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{jmlrpapers}
+\importpubpaper{paper1}{paper1}{23--45}
+\importarticle{paper2}{paper2}
+\end{jmlrpapers}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{Cross-Referencing}
+\label{sec:bkcrossref}
+
+You can cross-reference other parts of the book using the
+standard \cs{label}/\cs{ref} mechanism, but if you want to
+reference something within an imported article, you must prefix
+the label with the label given when importing the article (that
+is, the optional argument to \ics{importpubpaper},
+\ics{importpaper} or \cs{importarticle}). For example, if you
+want to reference a section labeled \texttt{sec:results} in the
+imported paper \texttt{paper1/paper1.tex}, you would need to do:
+\begin{verbatim}
+see Section~\ref{paper1/paper1sec:results}
+\end{verbatim}
+or
+\begin{verbatim}
+see \sectionref{paper1/paper1sec:results}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+In addition to the commands described in \sectionref{sec:crossref},
+the \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class also provides the following
+cross-referencing commands:
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\chapterref}]
+\cs{chapterref}\marg{label list}
+\end{definition}
+Reference a chapter or chapters. The argument is a comma-separated
+list of labels.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\articlepageref}]
+\cs{articlepageref}\marg{label}
+\end{definition}
+This displays the starting page number of the article whose label
+is given by \meta{label}. Note that this must a single label, not
+a list. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+An interesting article starts on page~\articlepageref{paper1/paper1}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\articlepagesref}]
+\cs{articlepagesref}\marg{label}
+\end{definition}
+This displays the page range of the article whose label is
+given by \meta{label}. Again, this must be a single label, not a
+list. This page range is unrelated to the \meta{pages} argument of
+\ics{importpubarticle}.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\articletitleref}]
+\cs{articletitleref}\marg{label}
+\end{definition}
+This displays the short title for the article whose label is
+given by \meta{label}. Again, this must be a single label, not a
+list.
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\articleauthorref}]
+\cs{articleauthorref}\marg{label}
+\end{definition}
+This displays the author list for the article whose label is
+given by \meta{label}. Again, this must be a single label, not a
+list.
+
+\subsection{Altering the Layout of the Main Title Page}
+\label{sec:modifytitle}
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\titlebody}]
+\cs{titlebody}
+\end{definition}
+The main body of the book's title page is given by the command
+\cs{titlebody}. Within the definition of this command, you can
+use:
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\SetTitleElement}]
+\cs{SetTitleElement}\marg{element}\marg{pre}\marg{post}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{element} can be: \texttt{title}, \texttt{volume},
+\texttt{issue}\footnote{The default title page layout doesn't use
+\texttt{issue}, but if required it can be set with \ics{issue}\marg{number}},
+\texttt{subtitle}, \texttt{logo}, \texttt{team}, \texttt{author},
+\texttt{date}, \texttt{productioneditor}. The \meta{pre} and
+\meta{post} arguments specify what to do before and after the
+element. Note that \cs{SetTitleElement} does nothing if that
+element hasn't been set. For example, if \cs{volume} has been
+omitted or \verb|\volume{}| is used, then
+\begin{verbatim}
+\SetTitleElement{volume}{\mainvolumefont}{\postmainvolume}
+\end{verbatim}
+will do nothing (so you don't end up with \textbf{Volume :}).
+
+\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\IfTitleElement}]
+\cs{IfTitleElement}\marg{element}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
+\end{definition}
+This does \meta{true part} if \meta{element} has been set
+otherwise it does \meta{false part}. For example,
+\cs{postmainvolume} is defined as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\postmainvolume}{%
+ \IfTitleElement{subtitle}{}{:}\par\relax
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+This means that it will only print a colon after the volume
+number if the subtitle has been set.
+
+The default definition of \cs{titlebody} is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\titlebody}{%
+ \SetTitleElement{title}{\maintitlefont}{\postmaintitle}%
+ \SetTitleElement{volume}{\mainvolumefont}{\postmainvolume}%
+ \SetTitleElement{subtitle}{\mainsubtitlefont}{\postmainsubtitle}%
+ \SetTitleElement{logo}{\mainlogofont}{\postmainlogo}%
+ \SetTitleElement{team}{\mainteamfont}{\postmainteam}%
+ \SetTitleElement{author}{\mainauthorfont}{\postmainauthor}%
+ \SetTitleElement{productioneditor}{\mainproductioneditorfont}%
+ {\postmainproductioneditor}%
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Potential Pitfalls}
+
+The \cls{combine} class and \sty{hyperref} package are
+individually both easily broken by packages that change certain
+internals and they don't ordinarily work together. The
+\clsfmt{jmlrbook} class applies patches to the internal referencing
+mechanism to make them work together, but it's a fairly fragile
+alliance. Some packages are known to break it, for example
+\sty{subfig}, \sty{pdfpages} and \sty{geometry}. This is why the
+\clsfmt{jmlr} class checks for known problem packages and generates an
+error message to dissuade authors from using them. It's likely that
+there are other packages that may cause a problem and, as they are
+found, they will be added to the check list. Also, it's possible for
+an author to disable the package checking mechanism if they are
+determined to use a particular package.
+
+In the event that an article has loaded a problem package, the
+editors will have to decide whether to ask the author to change
+the article so that it doesn't cause a problem or to make the changes
+themselves or to find a way of fudging things to get it to work. It
+depends on the level of \LaTeX\ expertise amongst the editors and
+the time available.
+
+Another problem that can arise is when different articles use
+packages that conflict. For example, one article uses package
+\styfmt{foo} and another uses package \styfmt{bar}. Each article compiles
+okay as a stand-alone article, but when combined \styfmt{foo} and
+\styfmt{bar} conflict. Another problem may occur when articles load the
+same package but with conflicting package options. To reduce the
+chance of this occurring, the \clsfmt{jmlr} class loads some commonly
+used packages. For example, it loads the \sty{algorithm2e}
+package with the \pkgoptfmt{algo2e} and \pkgoptfmt{ruled} options and
+provides the \env{algorithm} environment in addition to
+\sty{algorithm2e}'s \env{algorithm2e} environment.
+
+Articles that use different input encodings can also cause a
+problem. For example, if one article uses \texttt{utf8} and another
+uses \texttt{latin1}. If the authors have directly entered a
+diacritic or ligature, such as \'e or \ae, instead of using a
+\LaTeX\ command, such as \cs{'e} or \cs{ae}, then
+this will cause an error on compiling the book.\footnote{and may also
+cause a problem for the editor's text editor.} The choice then is to
+either change all non-keyboard characters with the appropriate
+\LaTeX\ commands or to use the \cs{inputencoding} command, supplied
+by the \sty{inputenc} package, to switch the encoding at the start
+of each article.
+
+Authors who use \cs{nonumber} within an \env{equation} environment
+can mess up the hyperlinks. Remove \cs{nonumber} and change the
+equation environment to \cs{[} \ldots\ \cs{]} (or just make it a
+numbered equation).
+
+If the article changes the graphics path using \cs{graphicspath},
+\clsfmt{jmlrbook} won't find the graphics if the imported articles
+aren't in the same directory as the book.
+
+\subsection{Creating the Book Using \appfmt{makejmlrbook}}
+\label{sec:makejmlrbook}
+
+The \app{makejmlrbook} Perl script is designed to make it
+easier to produce the print and online versions of the book, as
+well as producing an HTML index of all the imported articles with
+links to the abstracts and PDFs of individual articles. Note that
+for it to work properly, the articles must be imported using
+\cs{importarticle}, \cs{importpaper} or \cs{importpubpaper}, and
+the imported articles must use the \clsfmt{jmlr} class.
+
+On UNIX style systems, the script can be invoked from a terminal
+using:
+\begin{prompt}
+makejmlrbook \oarg{options} \meta{filename}
+\end{prompt}
+If that doesn't work, or you aren't using a UNIX style operating
+system, the script can be invoked from a terminal or command
+prompt using:
+\begin{prompt}
+perl makejmlrbook \oarg{options} \meta{filename}
+\end{prompt}
+The mandatory argument \meta{filename} is the name of the master
+\TeX\ file containing the book. It must use the \clsfmt{jmlrbook}
+class. You may omit the \texttt{.tex} extension. For example, if
+the file is called \texttt{proceedings.tex}, you can call
+\app{makejmlrbook} as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+perl makejmlrbook proceedings
+\end{verbatim}
+This will create the files \texttt{proceedings-print.pdf} (the
+print version) and \texttt{proceedings-online.pdf} (the online
+version). It will also create a directory (folder) called
+\texttt{html} in which the HTML files and individual article PDFs
+will be placed.
+
+The options to \app{makejmlrbook} are as follows:
+\begin{description}
+\item[--online] Generate the color on-line version (default).
+\item[--noonline] Don't generate the color on-line version.
+\item[--print] Generate the grayscale print version (default).
+\item[--noprint] Don't generate the grayscale print version.
+\item[--html] Generate the HTML files and the individual article
+PDFs (default).
+\item[--nohtml] Don't generate the HTML files and the individual
+article PDFs.
+\item[--logourl \meta{url}] Make the logo on the HTML index page link
+to \meta{url}.
+\item[--batchtex] Run \TeX\ in batch mode.
+\item[--nobatchtex] Don't run \TeX\ in batch mode (default).
+\item[--quieter] Reduce chatter to STDOUT (doesn't eliminate
+all messages). This also runs \TeX\ in batch mode.
+\item[--noquieter] Don't reduce messages to STDOUT (default).
+\item[--version] Display the version number and exit.
+\item[--help] List all available options.
+\end{description}
+
+There are also some more advanced options, but these haven't been
+fully tested:
+\begin{description}
+\item[--latexapp \meta{name}] Application used to call \LaTeX.
+Defaults to \qt{pdflatex}.
+\item[--latexopt \meta{string}] Options to pass to \LaTeX.
+\item[--format \meta{string}] Output format (defaults to \qt{pdf}).
+This may need to be changed if you change the \LaTeX\ application.
+\item[--bibtexapp \meta{name}] Application use to process the
+bibliography. Defaults to \qt{bibtex}.
+\item[--bibtexopt \meta{string}] Options to pass to Bib\TeX.
+\end{description}
+
+\StopEventually{\clearpage\phantomsection
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}\PrintIndex
+}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual0x.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual0x.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..33ca3b6ac84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual0x.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual1x.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual1x.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..176ef49b60f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual1x.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual2x.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual2x.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c180200b7f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual2x.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual3x.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual3x.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d89cbb940a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual3x.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2dc5d92d1df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo-gray.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo-gray.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3baf8157e9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo-gray.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e9ae63dacf4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/jmlrbook-sample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/jmlrbook-sample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..98a39dfdb05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/jmlrbook-sample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,233 @@
+\documentclass[wcp]{jmlrbook}% on-line color version
+%\documentclass[wcp,gray]{jmlrbook}% print version
+
+% Packages used by imported articles:
+\usepackage{lipsum}
+\usepackage{booktabs}
+\usepackage{siunitx}
+
+% Title is added to the PDF properties. Optional argument
+% is used instead, if present.
+%\title[Short Title]{Big Long Title}
+\title{A Sample Book}
+
+\author[Anne Editor et al.]{Anne Editor, Anne Other Editor and Nicola Talbot}
+
+\volume{1}
+\subtitle{Making a Book from JMLR Articles}
+\logo{\includegraphics{bookLogo}}
+\team{The Sample Book Team}
+
+\productioneditor{Nicola Talbot}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\frontmatter
+
+\chapter{Foreword}
+
+This is an example book that combines multiple articles. Each
+article uses the \textsf{jmlr} class file. \emph{The articles
+should not need to be edited in order to combine them using this
+class file.}\footnote{Unless the authors have done something
+weird or have used problematic packages.} In particular, you
+don't need to delete \verb|\documentclass|,
+\verb|\begin{document}| and \verb|\end{document}|. The articles
+should be able to compile on their own or as part of this book.
+
+In the preamble of the book, you need to include the packages
+that the articles include, but you don't need to include
+any packages that are automatically loaded by the \textsf{jmlr}
+class (\textsf{amsmath}, \textsf{amssymb}, \textsf{natbib},
+\textsf{graphicx}, \textsf{url}, \textsf{xcolor} and
+\textsf{algorithm2e}). You also don't need to include the
+\textsf{hyperref} and \textsf{combnat} packages as they are
+automatically loaded by \textsf{jmlrbook}. For example, some of the
+articles imported in this book use the \textsf{lipsum} package,
+so that package needs to be included in the preamble of the
+book.
+
+Commands defined in the imported articles will be local to that
+article unless \verb|\gdef| or \verb|\global| has been used. This
+means that if more than one article has defined the same command,
+there shouldn't be a conflict unless the command has been defined
+globally. For example, \texttt{paper1/paper1.tex} and
+\texttt{paper2/paper2.tex} both define \verb|\samplecommand|, but
+since \verb|\newcommand| has been used, rather than \verb|\gdef|,
+there's no conflict. However, a problem will occur if the same
+command is also defined in this document before either of those
+files are imported.
+
+Many packages must be loaded before \textsf{hyperref}. If these
+packages haven't been loaded by \textsf{jmlr}, you will need
+to specify them using \textsf{jmlrbook}'s \texttt{prehyperref}
+option. For example, to load the packages ``foo'' and ``bar'':
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[
+ prehyperref={\usepackage{foo}\usepackage{bar}}
+ ]{jmlrbook}
+\end{verbatim}
+or:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[
+ prehyperref={\usepackage{foo,bar}}
+ ]{jmlrbook}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+The imported papers need to be placed inside the
+\texttt{jmlrpapers} environment. Papers that have already
+been published should be included using \verb|\importpubpaper|
+and papers that haven't been published elsewhere should be
+imported using \verb|\importarticle|. Both commands have an
+optional argument that specifies the prefix to use in the labels
+within the imported article. If omitted, the article's file
+name is used.
+
+Both articles and the book may have appendices and parts created.
+Parts are created using \verb|\part|\{\emph{title}\}. Switch
+to appendices using \verb|\appendix| and then use \verb|\chapter|
+(for the book) or \verb|\section| (in imported articles).
+
+Cross-referencing other parts of the book is done using the
+usual \verb|\label| and \verb|\ref| mechanism. The \textsf{jmlr}
+class additional provides convenience commands such as
+\verb|\sectionref| and \verb|\figureref|. Unlike \verb|\ref|,
+these commands may take a comma-separated list of labels as the
+argument.
+
+The \textsf{jmlrbook} additionally provides \verb|\chapterref|
+(which can take a comma-separated list of labels) and commands
+to reference imported articles (which take a single label
+as the argument): \verb|\articlepageref| (the starting page of
+the article), \verb|\articlepagesref| (the page range for the
+article), \verb|\articletitleref| (the short title for the
+article) and \verb|\articleauthorref| (the article's author).
+
+You may also cross-reference parts of the imported articles,
+but you need to prefix the label with the label supplied
+in the optional argument of \verb|\importpubpaper| or
+\verb|\importarticle|. (If omitted, this is given by
+directory/file name.)
+
+For example, the first appendix in this book is
+\appendixref{apd:first}, but the first appendix in
+``\articletitleref{paper1/paper1}'' by
+\articleauthorref{paper1/paper1}
+(pp.~\articlepagesref{paper1/paper1}) is
+\appendixref{paper1/paper1apd:first}.
+Here's a reference to a couple of tables in
+\articletitleref{paper1/paper1}:
+\tableref{paper1/paper1tab:sample,paper1/paper1tab:sample2}.
+
+The author of a foreword (or other chapter) can sign off using
+the \texttt{authorsignoff} environment. Each author should be
+specified using \verb|\Author|.
+
+\begin{authorsignoff}
+\Author{Nicola Talbot\\
+University of East Anglia}
+\end{authorsignoff}
+
+\chapter{Preface}
+
+The editorial team can sign off at the end of the preface using
+the \texttt{signoff} environment. This has two arguments: the
+optional argument is a name for the editorial team (defaults to
+``The Editorial Team'') and the mandatory argument is the date.
+Within the environment, use \verb|\Editor| for each editor.
+
+\begin{signoff}{March 2010}
+% First editor:
+\Editor{Nicola Talbot\\
+University of East Anglia\\
+\mailto{N.Talbot@uea.ac.uk}}
+% Second editor:
+\Editor{Anne Editor\\
+University of Nowhere\\
+\mailto{ae@sample.com}}
+\end{signoff}
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\mainmatter
+
+\part{First Part of the Book}
+
+\chapter{Introduction}
+
+This is an introduction to the book.
+
+\section{Sample Section}
+
+This is a section in the introduction.
+
+\subsection{Sample Sub-Section}
+
+This is a sub-section.
+
+\subsubsection{Sample Sub-Sub-Section}
+
+This is a sub-sub-section.
+
+\paragraph{Sample Sub-Sub-Sub-Section}
+
+This is a sub-sub-sub-section.
+
+\subparagraph{Sample Sub-Sub-Sub-Sub-Section}
+
+This is a sub-sub-sub-sub-section.
+
+% Add a part to the TOC but don't print anything
+\addtocpart{Papers Published in JMLR W\&CP}
+
+\begin{jmlrpapers}
+ % Prepublished papers are imported using:
+ % \importpubpaper[label]{dir}{file}{pages}
+ % pages refers to the page range in the original publication
+ % which doesn't necessarily correspond to the page numbers in
+ % this book.
+ \importpubpaper{paper1}{paper1}{23--45}
+
+ \importpubpaper{paper2}{paper2}{63--70}
+
+\end{jmlrpapers}
+
+% Add a part to the TOC but don't print anything
+\addtocpart{Unpublished Papers}
+
+\begin{jmlrpapers}
+ % Unpublished papers are imported using:
+ % \importarticle[label]{dir}{file}
+ \importarticle{paper3}{paper3}
+
+ \importarticle{paper4}{paper4}
+\end{jmlrpapers}
+
+\appendix
+
+\part{First Part of Appendices}\label{pt:apd1}
+
+\chapter*{Introduction}
+
+This is an introduction to \partref{pt:apd1}.
+
+\chapter{First Appendix}
+\label{apd:first}
+
+This is an appendix.
+
+\chapter{Second Appendix}
+\label{apd:second}
+
+This is another appendix.
+
+\part{Second Part of Appendices}
+
+\chapter{An Appendix}
+\label{apd:third}
+
+This is an appendix in another part.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ddc24c66628
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+@article{guyon-elisseeff-03,
+ title = "An Introduction to Variable and Feature Selection",
+ author = "I. Guyon and A. Elisseeff",
+ journal = "JMLR",
+ volume = "3",
+ month = MAR,
+ pages = "1157-1182",
+ year = 2003
+}
+
+@techreport{guyon2007causalreport,
+ author = {I. Guyon and C. Aliferis and A. Elisseeff},
+ title = {Causal Feature Selection},
+ institution = {Clopinet},
+ year = 2007,
+ type = {Technical Report },
+ source = {\url{http://clopinet.com/isabelle/Papers/causalFS.pdf}}
+}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5d05fff2d55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+\documentclass[wcp]{jmlr}
+
+\usepackage{lipsum}% Provides dummy text for this example
+
+\newcommand{\samplecommand}{\emph{A sample command}}
+
+\jmlrvolume{42}
+\jmlryear{2010}
+\jmlrworkshop{Workshop on Causality}
+
+\title[Article 1]{First Sample Article}
+
+\author{\Name{Jane Doe}\Email{jd@sample.com}\and
+\Name{John {Smith Jones}}\Email{jsj@sample.com}\\
+\addr{University of No Where}}
+
+\editor{Anne Editor}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+\lipsum[1]
+\end{abstract}
+\begin{keywords}
+Sample
+\end{keywords}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is a sample article. \sectionref{sec:method} discusses
+the method used. \equationref{eq:emc2} is an interesting
+equation. The results are discussed in \sectionref{sec:results}
+and some other stuff is in \appendixref{apd:first}.
+\samplecommand.
+
+\lipsum
+
+\section{Method}\label{sec:method}
+
+\lipsum
+
+\begin{equation}\label{eq:emc2}
+E = mc^2
+\end{equation}
+
+\section{Results}\label{sec:results}
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:sample}
+ {\caption{A Sample Table}}
+ {%
+ \begin{tabular}{cc}
+ A & B\\
+ 1 & 2
+ \end{tabular}
+ }%
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:sample2}
+ {\caption{Another Sample Table}}
+ {%
+ \begin{tabular}{cc}
+ A & B\\
+ 1 & 2
+ \end{tabular}
+ }%
+\end{table}
+
+\lipsum
+
+Here are some citations: \citet{guyon-elisseeff-03,guyon2007causalreport}.
+
+\bibliography{paper1}
+
+\appendix
+\section{First Appendix}\label{apd:first}
+
+\lipsum
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ddc24c66628
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+@article{guyon-elisseeff-03,
+ title = "An Introduction to Variable and Feature Selection",
+ author = "I. Guyon and A. Elisseeff",
+ journal = "JMLR",
+ volume = "3",
+ month = MAR,
+ pages = "1157-1182",
+ year = 2003
+}
+
+@techreport{guyon2007causalreport,
+ author = {I. Guyon and C. Aliferis and A. Elisseeff},
+ title = {Causal Feature Selection},
+ institution = {Clopinet},
+ year = 2007,
+ type = {Technical Report },
+ source = {\url{http://clopinet.com/isabelle/Papers/causalFS.pdf}}
+}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..01471c1f04a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+\documentclass[wcp]{jmlr}
+
+\usepackage{lipsum}% Provides dummy text for this example
+
+\newcommand{\samplecommand}{\textbf{A sample command}}
+
+\jmlrvolume{42}
+\jmlryear{2010}
+\jmlrworkshop{Workshop on Causality}
+
+\title[Article 2]{Second Sample Article}
+
+\author{\Name{Bob {de Winter}}\Email{bdw@sample.com}\\
+\Name{{\'E}louise Mary Finchley}\Email{emf@sample.com}\\
+\Name{Jack Mark Jones}\Email{jmj@sample.com}\\
+\addr{University of No Where}}
+
+\editor{Anne Other Editor}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+\lipsum[1]
+\end{abstract}
+\begin{keywords}
+Sample
+\end{keywords}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is a sample article. \sectionref{sec:method} discusses
+the method used. \equationref{eq:emc2} is an interesting
+equation. The results are discussed in \sectionref{sec:results}
+and some other stuff is in \appendixref{apd:first}.
+\samplecommand.
+
+\lipsum
+
+\section{Method}\label{sec:method}
+
+\lipsum
+
+\begin{equation}\label{eq:emc2}
+E = mc^2
+\end{equation}
+
+\section{Results}\label{sec:results}
+
+\lipsum
+
+Here are some citations: \citet{guyon-elisseeff-03,guyon2007causalreport}.
+
+\bibliography{paper2}
+
+\appendix
+\section{First Appendix}\label{apd:first}
+
+\lipsum
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ddc24c66628
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+@article{guyon-elisseeff-03,
+ title = "An Introduction to Variable and Feature Selection",
+ author = "I. Guyon and A. Elisseeff",
+ journal = "JMLR",
+ volume = "3",
+ month = MAR,
+ pages = "1157-1182",
+ year = 2003
+}
+
+@techreport{guyon2007causalreport,
+ author = {I. Guyon and C. Aliferis and A. Elisseeff},
+ title = {Causal Feature Selection},
+ institution = {Clopinet},
+ year = 2007,
+ type = {Technical Report },
+ source = {\url{http://clopinet.com/isabelle/Papers/causalFS.pdf}}
+}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..03416f1e9bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+\documentclass[wcp]{jmlr}
+
+\usepackage{lipsum}% Provides dummy text for this example
+
+\title[Article 3]{Third Sample Article}
+
+\author{\Name{John Smith}\Email{js@sample.com}\\
+\addr{University of No Where}}
+
+\editor{Anne Editor}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+\lipsum[1]
+\end{abstract}
+\begin{keywords}
+Sample
+\end{keywords}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is a sample article. \sectionref{sec:method} discusses
+the method used. \equationref{eq:emc2} is an interesting
+equation. The results are discussed in \sectionref{sec:results}
+and some other stuff is in \appendixref{apd:first}.
+
+\lipsum
+
+\section{Method}\label{sec:method}
+
+\lipsum
+
+\begin{equation}\label{eq:emc2}
+E = mc^2
+\end{equation}
+
+\section{Results}\label{sec:results}
+
+\lipsum
+
+Here are some citations: \citet{guyon-elisseeff-03,guyon2007causalreport}.
+
+\bibliography{paper3}
+
+\appendix
+\section{First Appendix}\label{apd:first}
+
+\lipsum
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ddc24c66628
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+@article{guyon-elisseeff-03,
+ title = "An Introduction to Variable and Feature Selection",
+ author = "I. Guyon and A. Elisseeff",
+ journal = "JMLR",
+ volume = "3",
+ month = MAR,
+ pages = "1157-1182",
+ year = 2003
+}
+
+@techreport{guyon2007causalreport,
+ author = {I. Guyon and C. Aliferis and A. Elisseeff},
+ title = {Causal Feature Selection},
+ institution = {Clopinet},
+ year = 2007,
+ type = {Technical Report },
+ source = {\url{http://clopinet.com/isabelle/Papers/causalFS.pdf}}
+}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..06d866e2287
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+\documentclass[wcp]{jmlr}
+
+\usepackage{lipsum}% Provides dummy text for this example
+
+\title[Article 4]{Fourth Sample Article}
+
+\author{\Name{Mary-Jane {de Beer}}\Email{mjdb@sample.com}\\
+\addr{University of No Where}}
+
+\editor{Anne Editor}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+\lipsum[1]
+\end{abstract}
+\begin{keywords}
+Sample
+\end{keywords}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is a sample article. \sectionref{sec:method} discusses
+the method used. \equationref{eq:emc2} is an interesting
+equation. The results are discussed in \sectionref{sec:results}
+and some other stuff is in \appendixref{apd:first}.
+
+\lipsum
+
+\section{Method}\label{sec:method}
+
+\lipsum
+
+\begin{equation}\label{eq:emc2}
+E = mc^2
+\end{equation}
+
+\section{Results}\label{sec:results}
+
+\lipsum
+
+Here are some citations: \citet{guyon-elisseeff-03,guyon2007causalreport}.
+
+\bibliography{paper4}
+
+\appendix
+\section{First Appendix}\label{apd:first}
+
+\lipsum
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/proceedings-sample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/proceedings-sample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..71e6518f453
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/proceedings-sample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+\documentclass[wcp]{jmlrbook}% on-line color version
+%\documentclass[wcp,gray]{jmlrbook}% print version
+
+\jmlrvolume{42}
+\jmlryear{2010}
+\jmlrworkshop{Workshop on Causality}
+
+% Packages used by imported articles:
+\usepackage{lipsum}
+
+% Title is added to the PDF properties. Optional argument
+% is used instead, if present.
+%\title[Short Title]{Big Long Title}
+\title{Sample Proceedings}
+
+\author[Anne Editor et al.]{Anne Editor, Anne Other Editor and Nicola Talbot}
+
+\subtitle{\thejmlrworkshop}
+
+\logo{\includegraphics{bookLogo}}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\frontmatter
+
+\chapter{Foreword}
+
+This is the foreword.
+
+\begin{authorsignoff}
+\Author{Nicola Talbot\\
+University of East Anglia}
+\end{authorsignoff}
+
+\chapter{Preface}
+
+This is the preface
+
+\begin{signoff}{March 2010}
+% First editor:
+\Editor{Nicola Talbot\\
+University of East Anglia\\
+\mailto{N.Talbot@uea.ac.uk}}
+% Second editor:
+\Editor{Anne Editor\\
+University of Nowhere\\
+\mailto{ae@sample.com}}
+\end{signoff}
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\mainmatter
+
+\begin{jmlrpapers}
+ \addtocpart{Introduction}
+ % syntax: \importpaper[label]{directory}{filename}
+ \importpaper{paper1}{paper1}
+ \addtocpart{First Topic}
+ \importpaper{paper2}{paper2}
+ \importpaper{paper3}{paper3}
+ \addtocpart{Second Topic}
+ \importpaper{paper4}{paper4}
+\end{jmlrpapers}
+
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle-gray.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle-gray.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e6366465387
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle-gray.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..365deb2e1f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes-gray.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes-gray.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e4af05acda2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes-gray.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a4e79c25064
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square-gray.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square-gray.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b150e663542
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square-gray.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8844e858166
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/teximage.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/teximage.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9fdc0d13827
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/teximage.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+\frame{\begin{picture}(100,100)
+\put(25,50){\dashbox{.5}(10,10){$A$}}
+\put(50,50){\dashbox{.5}(10,10){$B$}}
+\end{picture}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ddc24c66628
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+@article{guyon-elisseeff-03,
+ title = "An Introduction to Variable and Feature Selection",
+ author = "I. Guyon and A. Elisseeff",
+ journal = "JMLR",
+ volume = "3",
+ month = MAR,
+ pages = "1157-1182",
+ year = 2003
+}
+
+@techreport{guyon2007causalreport,
+ author = {I. Guyon and C. Aliferis and A. Elisseeff},
+ title = {Causal Feature Selection},
+ institution = {Clopinet},
+ year = 2007,
+ type = {Technical Report },
+ source = {\url{http://clopinet.com/isabelle/Papers/causalFS.pdf}}
+}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7668ec816b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,752 @@
+%\documentclass[gray]{jmlr} % test grayscale version
+\documentclass{jmlr}
+
+% The following packages will be automatically loaded:
+% amsmath, amssymb, natbib, graphicx, url, algorithm2e
+
+%\usepackage{rotating}% for sideways figures and tables
+%\usepackage{longtable}% for long tables
+
+% The booktabs package is used by this sample document
+% (it provides \toprule, \midrule and \bottomrule).
+% Remove the next line if you don't require it.
+\usepackage{booktabs}
+% The siunitx package is used by this sample document
+% to align numbers in a column by their decimal point.
+% Remove the next line if you don't require it.
+\usepackage{siunitx}
+
+% The following command is just for this sample document:
+\newcommand{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+
+\jmlrvolume{vol}
+\jmlryear{2010}
+\jmlrsubmitted{submission date}
+\jmlrpublished{publication date}
+
+\title[Short Title]{Full Title of Article}
+
+ % Use \Name{Author Name} to specify the name.
+ % If the surname contains spaces, enclose the surname
+ % in braces, e.g. \Name{John {Smith Jones}} similarly
+ % if the name has a "von" part, e.g \Name{Jane {de Winter}}.
+ % If the first letter in the forenames is a diacritic
+ % enclose the diacritic in braces, e.g. \Name{{\'E}louise Smith}
+
+ % Two authors with the same address
+ \author{\Name{Author Name1} \Email{abc@sample.com}\and
+ \Name{Author Name2} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\
+ \addr Address}
+
+ % Three or more authors with the same address:
+ % \author{\Name{Author Name1} \Email{an1@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name2} \Email{an2@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name3} \Email{an3@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name4} \Email{an4@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name5} \Email{an5@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name6} \Email{an6@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name7} \Email{an7@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name8} \Email{an8@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name9} \Email{an9@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name10} \Email{an10@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name11} \Email{an11@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name12} \Email{an12@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name13} \Email{an13@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name14} \Email{an14@sample.com}\\
+ % \addr Address}
+
+
+ % Authors with different addresses:
+ % \author{\Name{Author Name1} \Email{abc@sample.com}\\
+ % \addr Address 1
+ % \AND
+ % \Name{Author Name2} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\
+ % \addr Address 2
+ %}
+
+\editor{Editor's name}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+This is the abstract for this article.
+\end{abstract}
+\begin{keywords}
+List of keywords
+\end{keywords}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+\label{sec:intro}
+
+This is a sample article that uses the \textsf{jmlr} class with
+the \texttt{wcp} class option. Please follow the guidelines in
+this sample document as it can help to reduce complications when
+combining the articles into a book. Please avoid using obsolete
+commands, such as \verb|\rm|, and obsolete packages, such as
+\textsf{epsfig}.\footnote{See
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/l2tabu}} Please also ensure
+that your document will compile with PDF\LaTeX.
+
+\subsection{Sub-sections}
+
+Sub-sections are produced using \verb|\subsection|.
+
+\subsubsection{Sub-sub-sections}
+
+Sub-sub-sections are produced using \verb|\subsubsection|.
+
+\paragraph{Sub-sub-sub-sections}
+
+Sub-sub-sub-sections are produced using \verb|\paragraph|.
+These are unnumbered with a running head.
+
+\subparagraph{Sub-sub-sub-sub-sections}
+
+Sub-sub-sub-sub-sections are produced using \verb|\subparagraph|.
+These are unnumbered with a running head.
+
+\section{Cross-Referencing}
+
+Always use \verb|\label| and \verb|\ref| (or one of the commands
+described below) when cross-referencing. For example, the next
+section is Section~\ref{sec:math}. The \textsf{jmlr} class
+provides some convenient cross-referencing commands:
+\verb|\sectionref|, \verb|\equationref|, \verb|\tableref|,
+\verb|\figureref|, \verb|\algorithmref|, \verb|\theoremref|,
+\verb|\lemmaref|, \verb|\remarkref|, \verb|\corollaryref|,
+\verb|\definitionref|, \verb|\conjectureref|, \verb|\axiomref|,
+\verb|\exampleref| and \verb|\appendixref|. The argument of these
+commands may either be a single label or a comma-separated list
+of labels. Examples:
+
+Referencing sections: \sectionref{sec:math} or
+\sectionref{sec:intro,sec:math} or
+\sectionref{sec:intro,sec:math,sec:tables,sec:figures}.
+
+Referencing equations: \equationref{eq:trigrule} or
+\equationref{eq:trigrule,eq:df} or
+\equationref{eq:trigrule,eq:f,eq:df,eq:y}.
+
+Referencing tables: \tableref{tab:operatornames} or
+\tableref{tab:operatornames,tab:example} or
+\tableref{tab:operatornames,tab:example,tab:example-booktabs}.
+
+Referencing figures: \figureref{fig:nodes} or
+\figureref{fig:nodes,fig:teximage} or
+\figureref{fig:nodes,fig:teximage,fig:subfigex} or
+\figureref{fig:circle,fig:square}.
+
+Referencing algorithms: \algorithmref{alg:gauss} or
+\algorithmref{alg:gauss,alg:moore} or
+\algorithmref{alg:gauss,alg:moore,alg:net}.
+
+Referencing theorem-like environments: \theoremref{thm:eigenpow},
+\lemmaref{lem:sample}, \remarkref{rem:sample},
+\corollaryref{cor:sample}, \definitionref{def:sample},
+\conjectureref{con:sample}, \axiomref{ax:sample} and
+\exampleref{ex:sample}.
+
+Referencing appendices: \appendixref{apd:first} or
+\appendixref{apd:first,apd:second}.
+
+\section{Equations}
+\label{sec:math}
+
+The \textsf{jmlr} class loads the \textsf{amsmath} package, so
+you can use any of the commands and environments defined there.
+(See the \textsf{amsmath} documentation for further
+details.\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc amsmath} or
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath}})
+
+Unnumbered single-lined equations should be displayed using
+\verb|\[| and \verb|\]|. For example:
+\[E = m c^2\]
+Numbered single-line equations should be displayed using the
+\texttt{equation} environment. For example:
+\begin{equation}\label{eq:trigrule}
+\cos^2\theta + \sin^2\theta \equiv 1
+\end{equation}
+This can be referenced using \verb|\label| and \verb|\equationref|.
+For example, \equationref{eq:trigrule}.
+
+Multi-lined numbered equations should be displayed using the
+\texttt{align} environment. For example:
+\begin{align}
+f(x) &= x^2 + x\label{eq:f}\\
+f'(x) &= 2x + 1\label{eq:df}
+\end{align}
+Unnumbered multi-lined equations should be displayed using the
+\texttt{align*} environment. For example:
+\begin{align*}
+f(x) &= (x+1)(x-1)\\
+&= x^2 - 1
+\end{align*}
+If you want to mix numbered with unnumbered lines use the
+align environment and suppress unwanted line numbers with
+\verb|\nonumber|. For example:
+\begin{align}
+y &= x^2 + 3x - 2x + 1\nonumber\\
+&= x^2 + x + 1\label{eq:y}
+\end{align}
+An equation that is too long to fit on a single line can be
+displayed using the \texttt{split} environment.
+Text can be embedded in an equation using \verb|\text| or
+\verb|\intertext| (as used in \theoremref{thm:eigenpow}).
+See the \textsf{amsmath} documentation for further details.
+
+\subsection{Operator Names}
+\label{sec:op}
+
+Predefined operator names are listed in \tableref{tab:operatornames}.
+For additional operators, either use \verb|\operatorname|,
+for example $\operatorname{var}(X)$ or declare it with
+\verb|\DeclareMathOperator|, for example
+\begin{verbatim}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\var}{var}
+\end{verbatim}
+and then use this new command. If you want limits that go above and
+below the operator (like \verb|\sum|) use the starred versions
+(\verb|\operatorname*| or \verb|\DeclareMathOperator*|).
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:operatornames}%
+ {\caption{Predefined Operator Names (taken from
+ \textsf{amsmath} documentation)}}%
+ {%
+\begin{tabular}{rlrlrlrl}
+\cs{arccos} & $\arccos$ & \cs{deg} & $\deg$ & \cs{lg} & $\lg$ & \cs{projlim} & $\projlim$ \\
+\cs{arcsin} & $\arcsin$ & \cs{det} & $\det$ & \cs{lim} & $\lim$ & \cs{sec} & $\sec$ \\
+\cs{arctan} & $\arctan$ & \cs{dim} & $\dim$ & \cs{liminf} & $\liminf$ & \cs{sin} & $\sin$ \\
+\cs{arg} & $\arg$ & \cs{exp} & $\exp$ & \cs{limsup} & $\limsup$ & \cs{sinh} & $\sinh$ \\
+\cs{cos} & $\cos$ & \cs{gcd} & $\gcd$ & \cs{ln} & $\ln$ & \cs{sup} & $\sup$ \\
+\cs{cosh} & $\cosh$ & \cs{hom} & $\hom$ & \cs{log} & $\log$ & \cs{tan} & $\tan$ \\
+\cs{cot} & $\cot$ & \cs{inf} & $\inf$ & \cs{max} & $\max$ & \cs{tanh} & $\tanh$ \\
+\cs{coth} & $\coth$ & \cs{injlim} & $\injlim$ & \cs{min} & $\min$ \\
+\cs{csc} & $\csc$ & \cs{ker} & $\ker$ & \cs{Pr} & $\Pr$
+\end{tabular}\par
+\begin{tabular}{rlrl}
+\cs{varlimsup} & $\varlimsup$
+& \cs{varinjlim} & $\varinjlim$\\
+\cs{varliminf} & $\varliminf$
+& \cs{varprojlim} & $\varprojlim$
+\end{tabular}
+}
+\end{table}
+
+\section{Vectors and Sets}
+\label{sec:vec}
+
+Vectors should be typeset using \cs{vec}. For example $\vec{x}$.
+The \textsf{jmlr} class also provides \cs{set} to typeset a
+set. For example $\set{S}$.
+
+\section{Floats}
+\label{sec:floats}
+
+Floats, such as figures, tables and algorithms, are moving
+objects and are supposed to float to the nearest convenient
+location. Please don't force them to go in a particular place. In
+general it's best to use the \texttt{htbp} specifier and don't
+put the figure or table in the middle of a paragraph (that is
+make sure there's a paragraph break above and below the float).
+Floats are supposed to have a little extra space above and below
+them to make them stand out from the rest of the text. This extra
+spacing is put in automatically and shouldn't need modifying.
+
+To ensure consistency, please \emph{don't} try changing the format of the caption by doing
+something like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\caption{\textit{A Sample Caption.}}
+\end{verbatim}
+or
+\begin{verbatim}
+\caption{\em A Sample Caption.}
+\end{verbatim}
+You can, of course, change the font for individual words or
+phrases, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\caption{A Sample Caption With Some \emph{Emphasized Words}.}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Tables}
+\label{sec:tables}
+
+Tables should go in the \texttt{table} environment. Within this
+environment use \verb|\floatconts| (defined by \textsf{jmlr})
+to set the caption correctly and center the table contents.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+% The first argument is the label.
+% The caption goes in the second argument, and the table contents
+% go in the third argument.
+\floatconts
+ {tab:example}%
+ {\caption{An Example Table}}%
+ {\begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\
+ Data1 & 0.12345\\
+ Data2 & 0.67890\\
+ Data3 & 0.54321\\
+ Data4 & 0.09876
+ \end{tabular}}
+\end{table}
+
+If you want horizontal rules you can use the \textsf{booktabs}
+package which provides the commands \verb|\toprule|,
+\verb|\midrule| and \verb|\bottomrule|. For example, see
+\tableref{tab:example-booktabs}.
+
+\begin{table}[hbtp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:example-booktabs}
+ {\caption{A Table With Horizontal Lines}}
+ {\begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \toprule
+ \bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\
+ \midrule
+ Data1 & 0.12345\\
+ Data2 & 0.67890\\
+ Data3 & 0.54321\\
+ Data4 & 0.09876\\
+ \bottomrule
+ \end{tabular}}
+\end{table}
+
+If you want vertical lines as well, you can't use the
+\textsf{booktabs} commands as there'll be some unwanted gaps.
+Instead you can use \LaTeX's \verb|\hline|, but the rows may
+appear a bit cramped. You can add extra space above or below a
+row using \verb|\abovestrut| and \verb|\belowstrut|. For example,
+see \tableref{tab:example-hline}.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:example-hline}
+ {\caption{A Table With Horizontal and Vertical Lines}}%
+ {%
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+ \hline
+ \abovestrut{2.2ex}\bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\\hline
+ \abovestrut{2.2ex}Data1 & 0.12345\\
+ Data2 & 0.67890\\
+ Data3 & 0.54321\\
+ \belowstrut{0.2ex}Data4 & 0.09876\\\hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ }
+\end{table}
+
+If you want to align numbers on their decimal point, you can
+use the \textsf{siunitx} package. For example, see
+\tableref{tab:example-siunitx}. For further details see the
+\textsf{siunitx} documentation\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc
+siunitx} or \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/siunitx}}.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:example-siunitx}
+ {\caption{A Table With Numbers Aligned on the Decimal Point}}
+ {\begin{tabular}{lS[tabformat=3.5]}
+ \bfseries Dataset & {\bfseries Result}\\
+ Data1 & 0.12345\\
+ Data2 & 10.6789\\
+ Data3 & 50.543\\
+ Data4 & 200.09876
+ \end{tabular}}
+\end{table}
+
+If the table is too wide, you can adjust the inter-column
+spacing by changing the value of \verb|\tabcolsep|. For
+example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\setlength{\tabcolsep}{3pt}
+\end{verbatim}
+If the table is very wide but not very long, you can use the
+\texttt{sidewaystable} environment defined in the
+\textsf{rotating} package (so use \verb|\usepackage{rotating}|).
+If the table is too long to fit on a page, you should use the
+\texttt{longtable} environment defined in the \textsf{longtable}
+package (so use \verb|\usepackage{longtable}|).
+
+\subsection{Figures}
+\label{sec:figures}
+
+Figures should go in the \texttt{figure} environment. Within this
+environment, use \verb|\floatconts| to correctly position the
+caption and center the image. Use \verb|\includegraphics|
+for external graphics files but omit the file extension. Do not
+use \verb|\epsfig| or \verb|\psfig|. If you want to scale the
+image, it's better to use a fraction of the line width rather
+than an explicit length. For example, see \figureref{fig:nodes}.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+% Caption and label go in the first argument and the figure contents
+% go in the second argument
+\floatconts
+ {fig:nodes}
+ {\caption{Example Image}}
+ {\includegraphics[width=0.5\linewidth]{images/nodes}}
+\end{figure}
+
+If your image is made up of \LaTeX\ code (for example, commands
+provided by the \textsf{pgf} package) you can include it using
+\cs{includeteximage} (defined by the \textsf{jmlr} class). This
+can be scaled and rotated in the same way as \cs{includegraphics}.
+For example, see \figureref{fig:teximage}.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {fig:teximage}
+ {\caption{Image Created Using \LaTeX\ Code}}
+ {\includeteximage[angle=45]{images/teximage}}
+\end{figure}
+
+If the figure is too wide to fit on the page, you can use the
+\texttt{sidewaysfigure} environment defined in the
+\textsf{rotating} package.
+
+Don't use \verb|\graphicspath|. If the images are contained in
+a subdirectory, specify this when you include the image, for
+example \verb|\includegraphics{figures/mypic}|.
+
+\subsubsection{Sub-Figures}
+\label{sec:subfigures}
+
+Sub-figures can be created using \verb|\subfigure|, which is
+defined by the \textsf{jmlr} class. The optional argument allows
+you to provide a subcaption. The label should be placed in the
+mandatory argument of \verb|\subfigure|. You can reference the
+entire figure, for example \figureref{fig:subfigex}, or you can
+reference part of the figure using \verb|\figureref|, for example
+\figureref{fig:circle}. Alternatively you can reference the
+subfigure using \verb|\subfigref|, for example
+\subfigref{fig:circle,fig:square} in \figureref{fig:subfigex}.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {fig:subfigex}
+ {\caption{An Example With Sub-Figures.}}
+ {%
+ \subfigure[A Circle]{\label{fig:circle}%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.2\linewidth]{images/circle}}%
+ \qquad
+ \subfigure[A Square]{\label{fig:square}%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.2\linewidth]{images/square}}
+ }
+\end{figure}
+
+By default, the sub-figures are aligned on the baseline.
+This can be changed using the second optional argument
+of \verb|\subfigure|. This may be \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{c}
+(centered) or \texttt{b} (bottom). For example, the subfigures
+\subfigref{fig:circle2,fig:square2} in \figureref{fig:subfigex2}
+both have \verb|[c]| as the second optional argument.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {fig:subfigex2}
+ {\caption{Another Example With Sub-Figures.}}
+ {%
+ \subfigure[A Small Circle][c]{\label{fig:circle2}%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.1\linewidth]{images/circle}}%
+ \qquad
+ \subfigure[A Square][c]{\label{fig:square2}%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.2\linewidth]{images/square}}
+ }
+\end{figure}
+
+\subsection{Sub-Tables}
+\label{sec:subtables}
+There is an analogous command \verb|\subtable| for sub-tables.
+It has the same syntax as \verb|\subfigure| described above.
+You can reference the table using \verb|\tableref|, for example
+\tableref{tab:subtabex} or you can reference part of the table,
+for example \tableref{tab:ab}. Alternatively you can reference the
+subtable using \verb|\subtabref|, for example
+\subtabref{tab:ab,tab:cd} in \tableref{tab:subtabex}.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:subtabex}
+ {\caption{An Example With Sub-Tables}}
+ {%
+ \subtable{%
+ \label{tab:ab}%
+ \begin{tabular}{cc}
+ \bfseries A & \bfseries B\\
+ 1 & 2
+ \end{tabular}
+ }\qquad
+ \subtable{%
+ \label{tab:cd}%
+ \begin{tabular}{cc}
+ \bfseries C & \bfseries D\\
+ 3 & 4\\
+ 5 & 6
+ \end{tabular}
+ }
+ }
+\end{table}
+
+By default, the sub-tables are aligned on the top.
+This can be changed using the second optional argument
+of \verb|\subtable|. This may be \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{c}
+(centered) or \texttt{b} (bottom). For example, the sub-tables
+\subtabref{tab:ab2,tab:cd2} in \tableref{tab:subtabex2}
+both have \verb|[c]| as the second optional argument.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:subtabex2}
+ {\caption{Another Example With Sub-Tables}}
+ {%
+ \subtable[][c]{%
+ \label{tab:ab2}%
+ \begin{tabular}{cc}
+ \bfseries A & \bfseries B\\
+ 1 & 2
+ \end{tabular}
+ }\qquad
+ \subtable[][c]{%
+ \label{tab:cd2}%
+ \begin{tabular}{cc}
+ \bfseries C & \bfseries D\\
+ 3 & 4\\
+ 5 & 6
+ \end{tabular}
+ }
+ }
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection{Algorithms}
+\label{sec:algorithms}
+
+Enumerated textual algorithms can be displayed using the
+\texttt{algorithm} environment. Within this environment, use
+\verb|\caption| to set the caption and you can use an
+\texttt{enumerate} or nested \texttt{enumerate} environments.
+For example, see \algorithmref{alg:gauss}. Note that algorithms
+float like figures and tables.
+
+\begin{algorithm}[htbp]
+\caption{The Gauss-Seidel Algorithm}\label{alg:gauss}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item For $k=1$ to maximum number of iterations
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item For $i=1$ to $n$
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item $x_i^{(k)} =
+ \frac{b_i - \sum_{j=1}^{i-1}a_{ij}x_j^{(k)}
+ - \sum_{j=i+1}^{n}a_{ij}x_j^{(k-1)}}{a_{ii}}$
+ \item If $\|\vec{x}^{(k)}-\vec{x}^{(k-1)} < \epsilon\|$,
+ where $\epsilon$ is a specified stopping criteria, stop.
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{enumerate}
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{algorithm}
+
+If you'd rather have the same numbering throughout the algorithm
+but still want the convenient indentation of nested
+\texttt{enumerate} environments, you can use the
+\texttt{enumerate*} environment provided by the \textsf{jmlr}
+class. For example, see \algorithmref{alg:moore}.
+
+\begin{algorithm}
+\caption{Moore's Shortest Path}\label{alg:moore}
+Given a connected graph $G$, where the length of each edge is 1:
+\begin{enumerate*}
+ \item Set the label of vertex $s$ to 0
+ \item Set $i=0$
+ \begin{enumerate*}
+ \item \label{step:locate}Locate all unlabelled vertices
+ adjacent to a vertex labelled $i$ and label them $i+1$
+ \item If vertex $t$ has been labelled,
+ \begin{enumerate*}
+ \item[] the shortest path can be found by backtracking, and
+ the length is given by the label of $t$.
+ \end{enumerate*}
+ otherwise
+ \begin{enumerate*}
+ \item[] increment $i$ and return to step~\ref{step:locate}
+ \end{enumerate*}
+ \end{enumerate*}
+\end{enumerate*}
+\end{algorithm}
+
+Pseudo code can be displayed using the \texttt{algorithm2e}
+environment. This is defined by the \textsf{algorithm2e} package
+(which is automatically loaded) so check the \textsf{algorithm2e}
+documentation for further details.\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc
+algorithm2e} or \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithm2e}}
+For an example, see \algorithmref{alg:net}.
+
+\begin{algorithm2e}
+\caption{Computing Net Activation}
+\label{alg:net}
+\dontprintsemicolon
+\linesnumbered
+\KwIn{$x_1, \ldots, x_n, w_1, \ldots, w_n$}
+\KwOut{$y$, the net activation}
+$y\leftarrow 0$\;
+\For{$i\leftarrow 1$ \KwTo $n$}{
+ $y \leftarrow y + w_i*x_i$\;
+}
+\end{algorithm2e}
+
+\section{Description Lists}
+
+The \textsf{jmlr} class also provides a description-like
+environment called \texttt{altdescription}. This has an
+argument that should be the widest label in the list. Compare:
+\begin{description}
+\item[add] A method that adds two variables.
+\item[differentiate] A method that differentiates a function.
+\end{description}
+with
+\begin{altdescription}{differentiate}
+\item[add] A method that adds two variables.
+\item[differentiate] A method that differentiates a function.
+\end{altdescription}
+
+\section{Theorems, Lemmas etc}
+\label{sec:theorems}
+
+The following theorem-like environments are predefined by
+the \textsf{jmlr} class: \texttt{theorem}, \texttt{example},
+\texttt{lemma}, \texttt{proposition}, \texttt{remark},
+\texttt{corollary}, \texttt{definition}, \texttt{conjecture}
+and \texttt{axiom}. You can use the \texttt{proof} environment
+to display the proof if need be, as in \theoremref{thm:eigenpow}.
+
+\begin{theorem}[Eigenvalue Powers]\label{thm:eigenpow}
+If $\lambda$ is an eigenvalue of $\vec{B}$ with eigenvector
+$\vec{\xi}$, then $\lambda^n$ is an eigenvalue of $\vec{B}^n$
+with eigenvector $\vec{\xi}$.
+\begin{proof}
+Let $\lambda$ be an eigenvalue of $\vec{B}$ with eigenvector
+$\xi$, then
+\begin{align*}
+\vec{B}\vec{\xi} &= \lambda\vec{\xi}
+\intertext{premultiply by $\vec{B}$:}
+\vec{B}\vec{B}\vec{\xi} &= \vec{B}\lambda\vec{\xi}\\
+\Rightarrow \vec{B}^2\vec{\xi} &= \lambda\vec{B}\vec{\xi}\\
+&= \lambda\lambda\vec{\xi}\qquad
+\text{since }\vec{B}\vec{\xi}=\lambda\vec{\xi}\\
+&= \lambda^2\vec{\xi}
+\end{align*}
+Therefore true for $n=2$. Now assume true for $n=k$:
+\begin{align*}
+\vec{B}^k\vec{\xi} &= \lambda^k\vec{\xi}
+\intertext{premultiply by $\vec{B}$:}
+\vec{B}\vec{B}^k\vec{\xi} &= \vec{B}\lambda^k\vec{\xi}\\
+\Rightarrow \vec{B}^{k+1}\vec{\xi} &= \lambda^k\vec{B}\vec{\xi}\\
+&= \lambda^k\lambda\vec{\xi}\qquad
+\text{since }\vec{B}\vec{\xi}=\lambda\vec{\xi}\\
+&= \lambda^{k+1}\vec{\xi}
+\end{align*}
+Therefore true for $n=k+1$. Therefore, by induction, true for all
+$n$.
+\end{proof}
+\end{theorem}
+
+\begin{lemma}[A Sample Lemma]\label{lem:sample}
+This is a lemma.
+\end{lemma}
+
+\begin{remark}[A Sample Remark]\label{rem:sample}
+This is a remark.
+\end{remark}
+
+\begin{corollary}[A Sample Corollary]\label{cor:sample}
+This is a corollary.
+\end{corollary}
+
+\begin{definition}[A Sample Definition]\label{def:sample}
+This is a definition.
+\end{definition}
+
+\begin{conjecture}[A Sample Conjecture]\label{con:sample}
+This is a conjecture.
+\end{conjecture}
+
+\begin{axiom}[A Sample Axiom]\label{ax:sample}
+This is an axiom.
+\end{axiom}
+
+\begin{example}[An Example]\label{ex:sample}
+This is an example.
+\end{example}
+
+\section{Color vs Grayscale}
+\label{sec:color}
+
+It's helpful if authors supply grayscale versions of their
+images in the event that the article is to be incorporated into
+a black and white printed book. With external PDF, PNG or JPG
+graphic files, you just need to supply a grayscale version of the
+file. For example, if the file is called \texttt{myimage.png},
+then the gray version should be \texttt{myimage-gray.png} or
+\texttt{myimage-gray.pdf} or \texttt{myimage-gray.jpg}. You don't
+need to modify your code. The \textsf{jmlr} class checks for
+the existence of the grayscale version if it is print mode
+(provided you have used \verb|\includegraphics| and haven't
+specified the file extension).
+
+You can use \verb|\ifprint| to determine which mode you are in.
+For example, in \figureref{fig:nodes}, the
+\ifprint{dark gray}{purple} ellipse represents an input and the
+\ifprint{light gray}{yellow} ellipse represents an output.
+Another example: {\ifprint{\bfseries}{\color{red}}important text!}
+
+You can use the class option \texttt{gray} to see how the
+document will appear in gray scale mode. \textcolor{blue}{Colored
+text} will automatically be converted to gray scale.
+
+The \textsf{jmlr} class loads the \textsf{xcolor}
+package, so you can also define your own colors. For example:
+\ifprint
+ {\definecolor{myred}{gray}{0.5}}%
+ {\definecolor{myred}{rgb}{0.5,0,0}}%
+\textcolor{myred}{XYZ}.
+
+The \textsf{xcolor} class is loaded with the \texttt{x11names}
+option, so you can use any of the x11 predefined colors (listed
+in the \textsf{xcolor} documentation\footnote{either
+\texttt{texdoc xcolor} or \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/xcolor}}).
+
+\section{Citations and Bibliography}
+\label{sec:cite}
+
+The \textsf{jmlr} class automatically loads \textsf{natbib}.
+This sample file has the citations defined in the accompanying
+BibTeX file \texttt{jmlr-sample.bib}. For a parenthetical
+citation use \verb|\citep|. For example
+\citep{guyon-elisseeff-03}. For a textual citation use
+\verb|\citet|. For example \citet{guyon2007causalreport}.
+Both commands may take a comma-separated list, for example
+\citet{guyon-elisseeff-03,guyon2007causalreport}.
+
+These commands have optional arguments and have a starred
+version. See the \textsf{natbib} documentation for further
+details.\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc natbib} or
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/natbib}}
+
+The bibliography is displayed using \verb|\bibliography|.
+
+\acks{Acknowledgements go here.}
+
+\bibliography{jmlr-sample}
+
+\appendix
+
+\section{First Appendix}\label{apd:first}
+
+This is the first appendix.
+
+\section{Second Appendix}\label{apd:second}
+
+This is the second appendix.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlrwcp-sample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlrwcp-sample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..107d12061c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlrwcp-sample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,752 @@
+%\documentclass[wcp,gray]{jmlr} % test grayscale version
+\documentclass[wcp]{jmlr}
+
+% The following packages will be automatically loaded:
+% amsmath, amssymb, natbib, graphicx, url, algorithm2e
+
+%\usepackage{rotating}% for sideways figures and tables
+\usepackage{longtable}% for long tables
+
+% The booktabs package is used by this sample document
+% (it provides \toprule, \midrule and \bottomrule).
+% Remove the next line if you don't require it.
+\usepackage{booktabs}
+% The siunitx package is used by this sample document
+% to align numbers in a column by their decimal point.
+% Remove the next line if you don't require it.
+\usepackage{siunitx}
+
+% The following command is just for this sample document:
+\newcommand{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+
+\jmlrvolume{vol}
+\jmlryear{2010}
+\jmlrworkshop{Workshop Title}
+
+\title[Short Title]{Full Title of Article}
+
+ % Use \Name{Author Name} to specify the name.
+ % If the surname contains spaces, enclose the surname
+ % in braces, e.g. \Name{John {Smith Jones}} similarly
+ % if the name has a "von" part, e.g \Name{Jane {de Winter}}.
+ % If the first letter in the forenames is a diacritic
+ % enclose the diacritic in braces, e.g. \Name{{\'E}louise Smith}
+
+ % Two authors with the same address
+ \author{\Name{Author Name1} \Email{abc@sample.com}\and
+ \Name{Author Name2} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\
+ \addr Address}
+
+ % Three or more authors with the same address:
+ % \author{\Name{Author Name1} \Email{an1@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name2} \Email{an2@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name3} \Email{an3@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name4} \Email{an4@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name5} \Email{an5@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name6} \Email{an6@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name7} \Email{an7@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name8} \Email{an8@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name9} \Email{an9@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name10} \Email{an10@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name11} \Email{an11@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name12} \Email{an12@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name13} \Email{an13@sample.com}\\
+ % \Name{Author Name14} \Email{an14@sample.com}\\
+ % \addr Address}
+
+
+ % Authors with different addresses:
+ % \author{\Name{Author Name1} \Email{abc@sample.com}\\
+ % \addr Address 1
+ % \AND
+ % \Name{Author Name2} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\
+ % \addr Address 2
+ %}
+
+\editor{Editor's name}
+% \editors{List of editors' names}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+This is the abstract for this article.
+\end{abstract}
+\begin{keywords}
+List of keywords
+\end{keywords}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+\label{sec:intro}
+
+This is a sample article that uses the \textsf{jmlr} class with
+the \texttt{wcp} class option. Please follow the guidelines in
+this sample document as it can help to reduce complications when
+combining the articles into a book. Please avoid using obsolete
+commands, such as \verb|\rm|, and obsolete packages, such as
+\textsf{epsfig}.\footnote{See
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/l2tabu}} Please also ensure
+that your document will compile with PDF\LaTeX.
+
+\subsection{Sub-sections}
+
+Sub-sections are produced using \verb|\subsection|.
+
+\subsubsection{Sub-sub-sections}
+
+Sub-sub-sections are produced using \verb|\subsubsection|.
+
+\paragraph{Sub-sub-sub-sections}
+
+Sub-sub-sub-sections are produced using \verb|\paragraph|.
+These are unnumbered with a running head.
+
+\subparagraph{Sub-sub-sub-sub-sections}
+
+Sub-sub-sub-sub-sections are produced using \verb|\subparagraph|.
+These are unnumbered with a running head.
+
+\section{Cross-Referencing}
+
+Always use \verb|\label| and \verb|\ref| (or one of the commands
+described below) when cross-referencing. For example, the next
+section is Section~\ref{sec:math}. The \textsf{jmlr} class
+provides some convenient cross-referencing commands:
+\verb|\sectionref|, \verb|\equationref|, \verb|\tableref|,
+\verb|\figureref|, \verb|\algorithmref|, \verb|\theoremref|,
+\verb|\lemmaref|, \verb|\remarkref|, \verb|\corollaryref|,
+\verb|\definitionref|, \verb|\conjectureref|, \verb|\axiomref|,
+\verb|\exampleref| and \verb|\appendixref|. The argument of these
+commands may either be a single label or a comma-separated list
+of labels. Examples:
+
+Referencing sections: \sectionref{sec:math} or
+\sectionref{sec:intro,sec:math} or
+\sectionref{sec:intro,sec:math,sec:tables,sec:figures}.
+
+Referencing equations: \equationref{eq:trigrule} or
+\equationref{eq:trigrule,eq:df} or
+\equationref{eq:trigrule,eq:f,eq:df,eq:y}.
+
+Referencing tables: \tableref{tab:operatornames} or
+\tableref{tab:operatornames,tab:example} or
+\tableref{tab:operatornames,tab:example,tab:example-booktabs}.
+
+Referencing figures: \figureref{fig:nodes} or
+\figureref{fig:nodes,fig:teximage} or
+\figureref{fig:nodes,fig:teximage,fig:subfigex} or
+\figureref{fig:circle,fig:square}.
+
+Referencing algorithms: \algorithmref{alg:gauss} or
+\algorithmref{alg:gauss,alg:moore} or
+\algorithmref{alg:gauss,alg:moore,alg:net}.
+
+Referencing theorem-like environments: \theoremref{thm:eigenpow},
+\lemmaref{lem:sample}, \remarkref{rem:sample},
+\corollaryref{cor:sample}, \definitionref{def:sample},
+\conjectureref{con:sample}, \axiomref{ax:sample} and
+\exampleref{ex:sample}.
+
+Referencing appendices: \appendixref{apd:first} or
+\appendixref{apd:first,apd:second}.
+
+\section{Equations}
+\label{sec:math}
+
+The \textsf{jmlr} class loads the \textsf{amsmath} package, so
+you can use any of the commands and environments defined there.
+(See the \textsf{amsmath} documentation for further
+details.\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc amsmath} or
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath}})
+
+Unnumbered single-lined equations should be displayed using
+\verb|\[| and \verb|\]|. For example:
+\[E = m c^2\]
+Numbered single-line equations should be displayed using the
+\texttt{equation} environment. For example:
+\begin{equation}\label{eq:trigrule}
+\cos^2\theta + \sin^2\theta \equiv 1
+\end{equation}
+This can be referenced using \verb|\label| and \verb|\equationref|.
+For example, \equationref{eq:trigrule}.
+
+Multi-lined numbered equations should be displayed using the
+\texttt{align} environment. For example:
+\begin{align}
+f(x) &= x^2 + x\label{eq:f}\\
+f'(x) &= 2x + 1\label{eq:df}
+\end{align}
+Unnumbered multi-lined equations should be displayed using the
+\texttt{align*} environment. For example:
+\begin{align*}
+f(x) &= (x+1)(x-1)\\
+&= x^2 - 1
+\end{align*}
+If you want to mix numbered with unnumbered lines use the
+align environment and suppress unwanted line numbers with
+\verb|\nonumber|. For example:
+\begin{align}
+y &= x^2 + 3x - 2x + 1\nonumber\\
+&= x^2 + x + 1\label{eq:y}
+\end{align}
+An equation that is too long to fit on a single line can be
+displayed using the \texttt{split} environment.
+Text can be embedded in an equation using \verb|\text| or
+\verb|\intertext| (as used in \theoremref{thm:eigenpow}).
+See the \textsf{amsmath} documentation for further details.
+
+\subsection{Operator Names}
+\label{sec:op}
+
+Predefined operator names are listed in \tableref{tab:operatornames}.
+For additional operators, either use \verb|\operatorname|,
+for example $\operatorname{var}(X)$ or declare it with
+\verb|\DeclareMathOperator|, for example
+\begin{verbatim}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\var}{var}
+\end{verbatim}
+and then use this new command. If you want limits that go above and
+below the operator (like \verb|\sum|) use the starred versions
+(\verb|\operatorname*| or \verb|\DeclareMathOperator*|).
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:operatornames}%
+ {\caption{Predefined Operator Names (taken from
+ \textsf{amsmath} documentation)}}%
+ {%
+\begin{tabular}{rlrlrlrl}
+\cs{arccos} & $\arccos$ & \cs{deg} & $\deg$ & \cs{lg} & $\lg$ & \cs{projlim} & $\projlim$ \\
+\cs{arcsin} & $\arcsin$ & \cs{det} & $\det$ & \cs{lim} & $\lim$ & \cs{sec} & $\sec$ \\
+\cs{arctan} & $\arctan$ & \cs{dim} & $\dim$ & \cs{liminf} & $\liminf$ & \cs{sin} & $\sin$ \\
+\cs{arg} & $\arg$ & \cs{exp} & $\exp$ & \cs{limsup} & $\limsup$ & \cs{sinh} & $\sinh$ \\
+\cs{cos} & $\cos$ & \cs{gcd} & $\gcd$ & \cs{ln} & $\ln$ & \cs{sup} & $\sup$ \\
+\cs{cosh} & $\cosh$ & \cs{hom} & $\hom$ & \cs{log} & $\log$ & \cs{tan} & $\tan$ \\
+\cs{cot} & $\cot$ & \cs{inf} & $\inf$ & \cs{max} & $\max$ & \cs{tanh} & $\tanh$ \\
+\cs{coth} & $\coth$ & \cs{injlim} & $\injlim$ & \cs{min} & $\min$ \\
+\cs{csc} & $\csc$ & \cs{ker} & $\ker$ & \cs{Pr} & $\Pr$
+\end{tabular}\par
+\begin{tabular}{rlrl}
+\cs{varlimsup} & $\varlimsup$
+& \cs{varinjlim} & $\varinjlim$\\
+\cs{varliminf} & $\varliminf$
+& \cs{varprojlim} & $\varprojlim$
+\end{tabular}
+}
+\end{table}
+
+\section{Vectors and Sets}
+\label{sec:vec}
+
+Vectors should be typeset using \cs{vec}. For example $\vec{x}$.
+The \textsf{jmlr} class also provides \cs{set} to typeset a
+set. For example $\set{S}$.
+
+\section{Floats}
+\label{sec:floats}
+
+Floats, such as figures, tables and algorithms, are moving
+objects and are supposed to float to the nearest convenient
+location. Please don't force them to go in a particular place. In
+general it's best to use the \texttt{htbp} specifier and don't
+put the figure or table in the middle of a paragraph (that is
+make sure there's a paragraph break above and below the float).
+Floats are supposed to have a little extra space above and below
+them to make them stand out from the rest of the text. This extra
+spacing is put in automatically and shouldn't need modifying.
+
+To ensure consistency, please \emph{don't} try changing the format of the caption by doing
+something like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\caption{\textit{A Sample Caption.}}
+\end{verbatim}
+or
+\begin{verbatim}
+\caption{\em A Sample Caption.}
+\end{verbatim}
+You can, of course, change the font for individual words or
+phrases, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\caption{A Sample Caption With Some \emph{Emphasized Words}.}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Tables}
+\label{sec:tables}
+
+Tables should go in the \texttt{table} environment. Within this
+environment use \verb|\floatconts| (defined by \textsf{jmlr})
+to set the caption correctly and center the table contents.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+% The first argument is the label.
+% The caption goes in the second argument, and the table contents
+% go in the third argument.
+\floatconts
+ {tab:example}%
+ {\caption{An Example Table}}%
+ {\begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\
+ Data1 & 0.12345\\
+ Data2 & 0.67890\\
+ Data3 & 0.54321\\
+ Data4 & 0.09876
+ \end{tabular}}
+\end{table}
+
+If you want horizontal rules you can use the \textsf{booktabs}
+package which provides the commands \verb|\toprule|,
+\verb|\midrule| and \verb|\bottomrule|. For example, see
+\tableref{tab:example-booktabs}.
+
+\begin{table}[hbtp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:example-booktabs}
+ {\caption{A Table With Horizontal Lines}}
+ {\begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \toprule
+ \bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\
+ \midrule
+ Data1 & 0.12345\\
+ Data2 & 0.67890\\
+ Data3 & 0.54321\\
+ Data4 & 0.09876\\
+ \bottomrule
+ \end{tabular}}
+\end{table}
+
+If you want vertical lines as well, you can't use the
+\textsf{booktabs} commands as there'll be some unwanted gaps.
+Instead you can use \LaTeX's \verb|\hline|, but the rows may
+appear a bit cramped. You can add extra space above or below a
+row using \verb|\abovestrut| and \verb|\belowstrut|. For example,
+see \tableref{tab:example-hline}.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:example-hline}
+ {\caption{A Table With Horizontal and Vertical Lines}}%
+ {%
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+ \hline
+ \abovestrut{2.2ex}\bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\\hline
+ \abovestrut{2.2ex}Data1 & 0.12345\\
+ Data2 & 0.67890\\
+ Data3 & 0.54321\\
+ \belowstrut{0.2ex}Data4 & 0.09876\\\hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ }
+\end{table}
+
+If you want to align numbers on their decimal point, you can
+use the \textsf{siunitx} package. For example, see
+\tableref{tab:example-siunitx}. For further details see the
+\textsf{siunitx} documentation\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc
+siunitx} or \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/siunitx}}.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:example-siunitx}
+ {\caption{A Table With Numbers Aligned on the Decimal Point}}
+ {\begin{tabular}{lS[tabformat=3.5]}
+ \bfseries Dataset & {\bfseries Result}\\
+ Data1 & 0.12345\\
+ Data2 & 10.6789\\
+ Data3 & 50.543\\
+ Data4 & 200.09876
+ \end{tabular}}
+\end{table}
+
+If the table is too wide, you can adjust the inter-column
+spacing by changing the value of \verb|\tabcolsep|. For
+example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\setlength{\tabcolsep}{3pt}
+\end{verbatim}
+If the table is very wide but not very long, you can use the
+\texttt{sidewaystable} environment defined in the
+\textsf{rotating} package (so use \verb|\usepackage{rotating}|).
+If the table is too long to fit on a page, you should use the
+\texttt{longtable} environment defined in the \textsf{longtable}
+package (so use \verb|\usepackage{longtable}|).
+
+\subsection{Figures}
+\label{sec:figures}
+
+Figures should go in the \texttt{figure} environment. Within this
+environment, use \verb|\floatconts| to correctly position the
+caption and center the image. Use \verb|\includegraphics|
+for external graphics files but omit the file extension. Do not
+use \verb|\epsfig| or \verb|\psfig|. If you want to scale the
+image, it's better to use a fraction of the line width rather
+than an explicit length. For example, see \figureref{fig:nodes}.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+% Caption and label go in the first argument and the figure contents
+% go in the second argument
+\floatconts
+ {fig:nodes}
+ {\caption{Example Image}}
+ {\includegraphics[width=0.5\linewidth]{images/nodes}}
+\end{figure}
+
+If your image is made up of \LaTeX\ code (for example, commands
+provided by the \textsf{pgf} package) you can include it using
+\cs{includeteximage} (defined by the \textsf{jmlr} class). This
+can be scaled and rotated in the same way as \cs{includegraphics}.
+For example, see \figureref{fig:teximage}.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {fig:teximage}
+ {\caption{Image Created Using \LaTeX\ Code}}
+ {\includeteximage[angle=45]{images/teximage}}
+\end{figure}
+
+If the figure is too wide to fit on the page, you can use the
+\texttt{sidewaysfigure} environment defined in the
+\textsf{rotating} package.
+
+Don't use \verb|\graphicspath|. If the images are contained in
+a subdirectory, specify this when you include the image, for
+example \verb|\includegraphics{figures/mypic}|.
+
+\subsubsection{Sub-Figures}
+\label{sec:subfigures}
+
+Sub-figures can be created using \verb|\subfigure|, which is
+defined by the \textsf{jmlr} class. The optional argument allows
+you to provide a subcaption. The label should be placed in the
+mandatory argument of \verb|\subfigure|. You can reference the
+entire figure, for example \figureref{fig:subfigex}, or you can
+reference part of the figure using \verb|\figureref|, for example
+\figureref{fig:circle}. Alternatively you can reference the
+subfigure using \verb|\subfigref|, for example
+\subfigref{fig:circle,fig:square} in \figureref{fig:subfigex}.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {fig:subfigex}
+ {\caption{An Example With Sub-Figures.}}
+ {%
+ \subfigure[A Circle]{\label{fig:circle}%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.2\linewidth]{images/circle}}%
+ \qquad
+ \subfigure[A Square]{\label{fig:square}%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.2\linewidth]{images/square}}
+ }
+\end{figure}
+
+By default, the sub-figures are aligned on the baseline.
+This can be changed using the second optional argument
+of \verb|\subfigure|. This may be \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{c}
+(centered) or \texttt{b} (bottom). For example, the subfigures
+\subfigref{fig:circle2,fig:square2} in \figureref{fig:subfigex2}
+both have \verb|[c]| as the second optional argument.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {fig:subfigex2}
+ {\caption{Another Example With Sub-Figures.}}
+ {%
+ \subfigure[A Small Circle][c]{\label{fig:circle2}%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.1\linewidth]{images/circle}}%
+ \qquad
+ \subfigure[A Square][c]{\label{fig:square2}%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.2\linewidth]{images/square}}
+ }
+\end{figure}
+
+\subsection{Sub-Tables}
+\label{sec:subtables}
+There is an analogous command \verb|\subtable| for sub-tables.
+It has the same syntax as \verb|\subfigure| described above.
+You can reference the table using \verb|\tableref|, for example
+\tableref{tab:subtabex} or you can reference part of the table,
+for example \tableref{tab:ab}. Alternatively you can reference the
+subtable using \verb|\subtabref|, for example
+\subtabref{tab:ab,tab:cd} in \tableref{tab:subtabex}.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:subtabex}
+ {\caption{An Example With Sub-Tables}}
+ {%
+ \subtable{%
+ \label{tab:ab}%
+ \begin{tabular}{cc}
+ \bfseries A & \bfseries B\\
+ 1 & 2
+ \end{tabular}
+ }\qquad
+ \subtable{%
+ \label{tab:cd}%
+ \begin{tabular}{cc}
+ \bfseries C & \bfseries D\\
+ 3 & 4\\
+ 5 & 6
+ \end{tabular}
+ }
+ }
+\end{table}
+
+By default, the sub-tables are aligned on the top.
+This can be changed using the second optional argument
+of \verb|\subtable|. This may be \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{c}
+(centered) or \texttt{b} (bottom). For example, the sub-tables
+\subtabref{tab:ab2,tab:cd2} in \tableref{tab:subtabex2}
+both have \verb|[c]| as the second optional argument.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\floatconts
+ {tab:subtabex2}
+ {\caption{Another Example With Sub-Tables}}
+ {%
+ \subtable[][c]{%
+ \label{tab:ab2}%
+ \begin{tabular}{cc}
+ \bfseries A & \bfseries B\\
+ 1 & 2
+ \end{tabular}
+ }\qquad
+ \subtable[][c]{%
+ \label{tab:cd2}%
+ \begin{tabular}{cc}
+ \bfseries C & \bfseries D\\
+ 3 & 4\\
+ 5 & 6
+ \end{tabular}
+ }
+ }
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection{Algorithms}
+\label{sec:algorithms}
+
+Enumerated textual algorithms can be displayed using the
+\texttt{algorithm} environment. Within this environment, use
+\verb|\caption| to set the caption and you can use an
+\texttt{enumerate} or nested \texttt{enumerate} environments.
+For example, see \algorithmref{alg:gauss}. Note that algorithms
+float like figures and tables.
+
+\begin{algorithm}[htbp]
+\caption{The Gauss-Seidel Algorithm}\label{alg:gauss}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item For $k=1$ to maximum number of iterations
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item For $i=1$ to $n$
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item $x_i^{(k)} =
+ \frac{b_i - \sum_{j=1}^{i-1}a_{ij}x_j^{(k)}
+ - \sum_{j=i+1}^{n}a_{ij}x_j^{(k-1)}}{a_{ii}}$
+ \item If $\|\vec{x}^{(k)}-\vec{x}^{(k-1)} < \epsilon\|$,
+ where $\epsilon$ is a specified stopping criteria, stop.
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{enumerate}
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{algorithm}
+
+If you'd rather have the same numbering throughout the algorithm
+but still want the convenient indentation of nested
+\texttt{enumerate} environments, you can use the
+\texttt{enumerate*} environment provided by the \textsf{jmlr}
+class. For example, see \algorithmref{alg:moore}.
+
+\begin{algorithm}
+\caption{Moore's Shortest Path}\label{alg:moore}
+Given a connected graph $G$, where the length of each edge is 1:
+\begin{enumerate*}
+ \item Set the label of vertex $s$ to 0
+ \item Set $i=0$
+ \begin{enumerate*}
+ \item \label{step:locate}Locate all unlabelled vertices
+ adjacent to a vertex labelled $i$ and label them $i+1$
+ \item If vertex $t$ has been labelled,
+ \begin{enumerate*}
+ \item[] the shortest path can be found by backtracking, and
+ the length is given by the label of $t$.
+ \end{enumerate*}
+ otherwise
+ \begin{enumerate*}
+ \item[] increment $i$ and return to step~\ref{step:locate}
+ \end{enumerate*}
+ \end{enumerate*}
+\end{enumerate*}
+\end{algorithm}
+
+Pseudo code can be displayed using the \texttt{algorithm2e}
+environment. This is defined by the \textsf{algorithm2e} package
+(which is automatically loaded) so check the \textsf{algorithm2e}
+documentation for further details.\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc
+algorithm2e} or \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithm2e}}
+For an example, see \algorithmref{alg:net}.
+
+\begin{algorithm2e}
+\caption{Computing Net Activation}
+\label{alg:net}
+\dontprintsemicolon
+\linesnumbered
+\KwIn{$x_1, \ldots, x_n, w_1, \ldots, w_n$}
+\KwOut{$y$, the net activation}
+$y\leftarrow 0$\;
+\For{$i\leftarrow 1$ \KwTo $n$}{
+ $y \leftarrow y + w_i*x_i$\;
+}
+\end{algorithm2e}
+
+\section{Description Lists}
+
+The \textsf{jmlr} class also provides a description-like
+environment called \texttt{altdescription}. This has an
+argument that should be the widest label in the list. Compare:
+\begin{description}
+\item[add] A method that adds two variables.
+\item[differentiate] A method that differentiates a function.
+\end{description}
+with
+\begin{altdescription}{differentiate}
+\item[add] A method that adds two variables.
+\item[differentiate] A method that differentiates a function.
+\end{altdescription}
+
+\section{Theorems, Lemmas etc}
+\label{sec:theorems}
+
+The following theorem-like environments are predefined by
+the \textsf{jmlr} class: \texttt{theorem}, \texttt{example},
+\texttt{lemma}, \texttt{proposition}, \texttt{remark},
+\texttt{corollary}, \texttt{definition}, \texttt{conjecture}
+and \texttt{axiom}. You can use the \texttt{proof} environment
+to display the proof if need be, as in \theoremref{thm:eigenpow}.
+
+\begin{theorem}[Eigenvalue Powers]\label{thm:eigenpow}
+If $\lambda$ is an eigenvalue of $\vec{B}$ with eigenvector
+$\vec{\xi}$, then $\lambda^n$ is an eigenvalue of $\vec{B}^n$
+with eigenvector $\vec{\xi}$.
+\begin{proof}
+Let $\lambda$ be an eigenvalue of $\vec{B}$ with eigenvector
+$\xi$, then
+\begin{align*}
+\vec{B}\vec{\xi} &= \lambda\vec{\xi}
+\intertext{premultiply by $\vec{B}$:}
+\vec{B}\vec{B}\vec{\xi} &= \vec{B}\lambda\vec{\xi}\\
+\Rightarrow \vec{B}^2\vec{\xi} &= \lambda\vec{B}\vec{\xi}\\
+&= \lambda\lambda\vec{\xi}\qquad
+\text{since }\vec{B}\vec{\xi}=\lambda\vec{\xi}\\
+&= \lambda^2\vec{\xi}
+\end{align*}
+Therefore true for $n=2$. Now assume true for $n=k$:
+\begin{align*}
+\vec{B}^k\vec{\xi} &= \lambda^k\vec{\xi}
+\intertext{premultiply by $\vec{B}$:}
+\vec{B}\vec{B}^k\vec{\xi} &= \vec{B}\lambda^k\vec{\xi}\\
+\Rightarrow \vec{B}^{k+1}\vec{\xi} &= \lambda^k\vec{B}\vec{\xi}\\
+&= \lambda^k\lambda\vec{\xi}\qquad
+\text{since }\vec{B}\vec{\xi}=\lambda\vec{\xi}\\
+&= \lambda^{k+1}\vec{\xi}
+\end{align*}
+Therefore true for $n=k+1$. Therefore, by induction, true for all
+$n$.
+\end{proof}
+\end{theorem}
+
+\begin{lemma}[A Sample Lemma]\label{lem:sample}
+This is a lemma.
+\end{lemma}
+
+\begin{remark}[A Sample Remark]\label{rem:sample}
+This is a remark.
+\end{remark}
+
+\begin{corollary}[A Sample Corollary]\label{cor:sample}
+This is a corollary.
+\end{corollary}
+
+\begin{definition}[A Sample Definition]\label{def:sample}
+This is a definition.
+\end{definition}
+
+\begin{conjecture}[A Sample Conjecture]\label{con:sample}
+This is a conjecture.
+\end{conjecture}
+
+\begin{axiom}[A Sample Axiom]\label{ax:sample}
+This is an axiom.
+\end{axiom}
+
+\begin{example}[An Example]\label{ex:sample}
+This is an example.
+\end{example}
+
+\section{Color vs Grayscale}
+\label{sec:color}
+
+It's helpful if authors supply grayscale versions of their
+images in the event that the article is to be incorporated into
+a black and white printed book. With external PDF, PNG or JPG
+graphic files, you just need to supply a grayscale version of the
+file. For example, if the file is called \texttt{myimage.png},
+then the gray version should be \texttt{myimage-gray.png} or
+\texttt{myimage-gray.pdf} or \texttt{myimage-gray.jpg}. You don't
+need to modify your code. The \textsf{jmlr} class checks for
+the existence of the grayscale version if it is print mode
+(provided you have used \verb|\includegraphics| and haven't
+specified the file extension).
+
+You can use \verb|\ifprint| to determine which mode you are in.
+For example, in \figureref{fig:nodes}, the
+\ifprint{dark gray}{purple} ellipse represents an input and the
+\ifprint{light gray}{yellow} ellipse represents an output.
+Another example: {\ifprint{\bfseries}{\color{red}}important text!}
+
+You can use the class option \texttt{gray} to see how the
+document will appear in gray scale mode. \textcolor{blue}{Colored
+text} will automatically be converted to gray scale.
+
+The \textsf{jmlr} class loads the \textsf{xcolor}
+package, so you can also define your own colors. For example:
+\ifprint
+ {\definecolor{myred}{gray}{0.5}}%
+ {\definecolor{myred}{rgb}{0.5,0,0}}%
+\textcolor{myred}{XYZ}.
+
+The \textsf{xcolor} class is loaded with the \texttt{x11names}
+option, so you can use any of the x11 predefined colors (listed
+in the \textsf{xcolor} documentation\footnote{either
+\texttt{texdoc xcolor} or \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/xcolor}}).
+
+\section{Citations and Bibliography}
+\label{sec:cite}
+
+The \textsf{jmlr} class automatically loads \textsf{natbib}.
+This sample file has the citations defined in the accompanying
+BibTeX file \texttt{jmlr-sample.bib}. For a parenthetical
+citation use \verb|\citep|. For example
+\citep{guyon-elisseeff-03}. For a textual citation use
+\verb|\citet|. For example \citet{guyon2007causalreport}.
+Both commands may take a comma-separated list, for example
+\citet{guyon-elisseeff-03,guyon2007causalreport}.
+
+These commands have optional arguments and have a starred
+version. See the \textsf{natbib} documentation for further
+details.\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc natbib} or
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/natbib}}
+
+The bibliography is displayed using \verb|\bibliography|.
+
+\acks{Acknowledgements go here.}
+
+\bibliography{jmlr-sample}
+
+\appendix
+
+\section{First Appendix}\label{apd:first}
+
+This is the first appendix.
+
+\section{Second Appendix}\label{apd:second}
+
+This is the second appendix.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/scripts/jmlr/makejmlrbook b/Master/texmf-dist/scripts/jmlr/makejmlrbook
new file mode 100755
index 00000000000..77669bbff3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/scripts/jmlr/makejmlrbook
@@ -0,0 +1,840 @@
+#!/usr/bin/env perl
+# File : makejmlrbook
+# Author : Nicola L C Talbot
+# Date : 22nd March 2010
+# Last Modified : 24nd March 2010
+# Version : 0.1
+# Description : Given the name of a document using the
+# jmlrbook class file, this script runs
+# pdflatex (and possibly bibtex) on the
+# imported articles and the main document.
+# http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/
+#
+# This file is distributed as part of the jmlr LaTeX bundle.
+#
+# Copyright (c) 2006 Nicola L.C. Talbot
+# This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+# conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+# of this license or any later version.
+# The latest version of this license is in
+# http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+# and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+# version 2005/12/01 or later.
+#
+# This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+#
+# The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot.
+
+use Getopt::Long;
+use File::Basename;
+use File::Copy;
+use Cwd;
+use strict;
+
+my $version = "0.1 (2010-03-24)";
+
+my $eol = "\n";
+my $dd = '/';
+
+if ($^O eq 'MSWin32')
+{
+ $eol = "\r\n";
+ $dd = "\\";
+}
+
+my $showversion = 0;
+my $showhelp = 0;
+my $quiet = 0;
+my $batchtex = 0;
+my $online = 1;
+my $print = 1;
+my $html = 1;
+my $latexapp = 'pdflatex';
+my $bibtexapp = 'bibtex';
+my $latexopts = '';
+my $bibtexopts = '';
+my $format = 'pdf';
+my $logourl = '';
+
+unless(&GetOptions(
+ "online!" => \$online,
+ "print!" => \$print,
+ "html!" => \$html,
+ "logourl=s" => \$logourl,
+ "format=s" => \$format,
+ "latexapp=s" => \$latexapp,
+ "bibtexapp=s" => \$bibtexapp,
+ "latexopts=s" => \$latexopts,
+ "bibtexopts=s" => \$bibtexopts,
+ "quieter!" => \$quiet,
+ "batchtex!" => \$batchtex,
+ "version" => \$showversion,
+ "help" => \$showhelp))
+{
+ die "$!\n", "Use --help for help\n";
+}
+
+my $appname = basename($0);
+
+if ($showhelp)
+{
+ die "$appname version $version Copyright (c) 2010 Nicola L C Talbot\n",
+ "Distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License.\n\n",
+ "Syntax: $appname [options] <filename>\n\n",
+ "<filename> should be the name of the master document for a LaTeX \n",
+ "file that uses the jmlrbook class. The .tex extension may be\n",
+ "omitted.\n\n",
+ "Basic options:\n",
+ "--online\t\tGenerate the color on-line version (default)\n",
+ "--noonline\t\tDon't generate the color on-line version\n",
+ "--print\t\t\tGenerate the grayscale print version (default)\n",
+ "--noprint\t\tDon't generate the grayscale print version\n",
+ "--html\t\t\tGenerate the HTML version (default)\n",
+ "--nohtml\t\tDon't generate the HTML version\n",
+ "--logourl <url>\tMake the logo on the HTML index page link to <url>\n",
+ "--batchtex\t\tRun TeX in batch mode\n",
+ "--nobatchtex\t\tDon't run TeX in batch mode\n",
+ "--quieter\t\tReduce messages to stdout and run TeX in batch mode\n",
+ "--noquieter\t\tDon't reduce messages to stdout\n",
+ "--version\t\tDisplay version number and exit\n",
+ "--help\t\t\tDisplay help message and exit\n",
+ "\nAdvanced options:\n",
+ "--latexapp <name>\tApplication used to call LaTeX\n",
+ "\t\t\t(Defaults to 'pdflatex')\n",
+ "--format <string>\tOutput format (default: 'pdf')\n",
+ "--bibtexapp <name>\tApplication used to call BibTeX\n",
+ "\t\t\t(Defaults to 'bibtex')\n",
+ "--latexopt <string>\tOptions to pass to LaTeX\n",
+ "--bibtexopt <string>\tOptions to pass to BibTeX\n";
+}
+
+if ($showversion)
+{
+ die "$appname version $version copyright (c) 2010 Nicola L C Talbot\n",
+ "Distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License.\n";
+}
+
+unless ($#ARGV == 0)
+{
+ die "$appname: missing filename\n",
+ "use --help for help\n";
+}
+
+if ($quiet or $batchtex)
+{
+ $latexopts = '-interaction batchmode '.$latexopts;
+}
+
+if ($quiet)
+{
+ $bibtexopts = '-terse '.$bibtexopts;
+}
+
+my ($main_name, $main_path, $main_suffix)
+ = fileparse($ARGV[0], '\.(tex|ltx)');
+
+$main_suffix = '.tex' unless $main_suffix;
+
+my $org_dir = cwd();
+
+chdir $main_path
+ or die "Can't change directory to '$main_path': $!\n";
+
+my $mainaux = "$main_name.aux";
+
+# If the aux file doesn't exist or the aux file is older than
+# the main file, run latex
+
+if (not -e $mainaux or (-M $mainaux > -M "$main_name$main_suffix"))
+{
+ &latex($main_name);
+}
+
+# Parse aux file
+
+open AUX, "$mainaux" or die "Can't open '$mainaux' $!\n";
+
+&message("Reading '$mainaux'...\n");
+
+my $main_bibdata = 0;
+my @imports = ();
+my %pagerefs = ();
+
+while (<AUX>)
+{
+ if (/\\bibdata\b/)
+ {
+ $main_bibdata = 1;
+ }
+ elsif (/\\\@jmlr\@import{(.*)}{(.*)}{(.*)}/)
+ {
+ my $import =
+ {
+ label => $1,
+ path => $2,
+ name => $3
+ };
+
+ $import->{'name'} =~s/\.(tex|ltx)\Z//;
+
+ push @imports, $import;
+ }
+ elsif (/\\contentsline\s*{chapterauthor}{(.*)}{}{}}\s*$/
+ and $#imports > -1)
+ {
+ $imports[$#imports]->{'author'} = $1;
+ }
+ elsif (/^\\newlabel\s*{([^}]*)jmlrstart}{{([^}]*)}{([^}]*)}/)
+ {
+ my $label = $1;
+
+ $pagerefs{$label}->{'start'} = $3;
+ }
+ elsif (/^\\newlabel\s*{([^}]*)jmlrend}{{([^}]*)}{([^}]*)}/)
+ {
+ my $label = $1;
+
+ $pagerefs{$label}->{'end'} = $3;
+ }
+}
+
+close AUX;
+
+# Replace any instances of \articlepagesref
+
+foreach my $import (@imports)
+{
+ my $label = $import->{'label'};
+
+ my $pages = $pagerefs{$label}->{'start'}.'--'
+ . $pagerefs{$label}->{'end'};
+
+ $import->{'author'}=~s/\\articlepagesref\s*{$label}/$pages/;
+}
+
+if ($html)
+{
+ # If the html files need to be created, make the directory
+ # html-src, if it doesn't already exist
+
+ unless (-d 'html-src')
+ {
+ mkdir 'html-src'
+ or die "Can't create directory 'html-src': $!\n";
+ }
+
+ unless (-d 'html')
+ {
+ mkdir 'html'
+ or die "Can't create directory 'html': $!\n";
+ }
+}
+
+# Iterate through each imported article
+
+foreach my $import (@imports)
+{
+ my $importbase = &fname($import->{'path'}, $import->{'name'});
+
+ # Check the aux file of this article
+
+ my $aux = "$importbase.aux";
+
+ # The aux file should exist because running LaTeX on the
+ # main file will create the aux file.
+
+ open AUX, $aux or die "Can't open '$aux' $!\n";
+
+ &message("Reading '$aux'...\n");
+
+ my $bibdata = 0;
+
+ while (<AUX>)
+ {
+ if (/\\bibdata\b/)
+ {
+ $bibdata = 1;
+ }
+ }
+
+ close AUX;
+
+ # Do we need a bibtex run?
+
+ if ($bibdata)
+ {
+ my $log = "$importbase.log";
+
+ # If the log file doesn't exist, run LaTeX
+
+ unless (-e $log)
+ {
+ chdir $import->{'path'}
+ or die "Can't change directory to '$import->{path}': $!\n";
+
+ &latex($import->{'name'});
+
+ chdir "$org_dir/$main_path" or
+ die "Can't change directory to '$org_dir/$main_path': $!\n";
+ }
+
+ open LOGFD, $log or die "Can't open '$log' $!\n";
+
+ &message("Reading '$log'...\n");
+
+ my $runbibtex = 0;
+
+ while (<LOGFD>)
+ {
+ if (/There were undefined citations\./)
+ {
+ # Run bibtex and latex
+ $runbibtex = 1;
+
+ last;
+ }
+ }
+
+ close LOGFD;
+
+ if ($runbibtex)
+ {
+ chdir $import->{'path'}
+ or die "Can't change directory to '$import->{path}': $!\n";
+
+ &bibtex($import->{'name'});
+ &latex($import->{'name'});
+
+ chdir "$org_dir/$main_path" or
+ die "Can't change directory to '$org_dir/$main_path': $!\n";
+ }
+ }
+
+ if ($html)
+ {
+ # If html is required, we also need pdf versions of the
+ # individual articles.
+
+ # Does the pdf file exist?
+
+ unless (-e "$importbase.$format")
+ {
+ chdir $import->{'path'}
+ or die "Can't change directory to '$import->{path}': $!\n";
+
+ &latex($import->{'name'});
+
+ chdir "$org_dir/$main_path" or
+ die "Can't change directory to '$org_dir/$main_path': $!\n";
+ }
+
+ # Do we need a rerun?
+
+ if (&needs_rerun($importbase))
+ {
+ chdir $import->{'path'}
+ or die "Can't change directory to '$import->{path}': $!\n";
+
+ &latex($import->{'name'});
+
+ chdir "$org_dir/$main_path" or
+ die "Can't change directory to '$org_dir/$main_path': $!\n";
+ }
+
+ my $importdir = $import->{'path'};
+
+ if ($importdir = '.')
+ {
+ $importdir = $import->{'name'};
+ }
+
+ # Check the appropriate subdirectory is in html-src
+
+ my $name = &fname('html-src', $importdir);
+
+ unless (-d $name)
+ {
+ mkdir $name
+ or die "Can't create directory '$name': $!\n";
+ }
+
+ my $text = '';
+
+ # Read the LaTeX file and store everything up to
+ # the end of the abstract
+
+ my $tex = "$importbase.tex";
+
+ open TEX, $tex or die "Can't open '$tex': $!\n";
+
+ while (<TEX>)
+ {
+ # This doesn't handle complicated cases, such as
+ # the author using \abstract ... \endabstract
+ # or commenting out the abstract with conditionals
+ if (/^([^%]*)\\end{abstract}/)
+ {
+ $text .= $&;
+ last;
+ }
+
+ $text .= $_;
+ }
+
+ close TEX;
+
+ # Add the 'html' class option:
+ unless ($text=~
+ s/^([^%]*)\\documentclass\s*\[(.*)\]/$1\\documentclass[$2,html]/m)
+ {
+ $text=~s/^([^%]*)\\documentclass\s*/$1\\documentclass[html]/m;
+ }
+
+ my $begindoc = '';
+
+ # Set the authors
+ if (defined($import->{'author'}))
+ {
+ my $author = $import->{'author'};
+
+ $author=~s/^([^;]*);/\\textbf{\\emph{$1};}/;
+
+ $begindoc .= "\\jmlrauthors{$author}";
+ }
+
+ # Add content div
+ $text=~s/^([^%]*)\\begin{document}/$&$begindoc\\HCode{<div id="content">}/m;
+
+ # Create file containing the abstract
+
+ my $absfile = "html-src/$importdir/".$import->{'name'}.'.tex';
+
+ open ABSFD,">$absfile"
+ or die "Can't create '$absfile': $!\n";
+
+ print ABSFD "\\batchmode", $eol if ($batchtex or $quiet);
+
+ my $texpath = $import->{path};
+
+ $texpath=~s/\\/\//g if ($dd eq '\\');
+
+ print ABSFD
+ "\\makeatletter",$eol,
+ "\\def\\input\@path{{../../$texpath/}}$eol",
+ "\\makeatother",$eol,
+ $text, $eol,
+ "\\HCode{</div>}", $eol,
+ "\\end{document}",$eol;
+
+ close ABSFD;
+
+ # Create the cfg file
+
+ my $cfg = "html-src/$importdir/jmlr.cfg";
+
+ open CFG, ">$cfg" or die "Can't create '$cfg': $!\n";
+
+print CFG <<END_CFG;
+\\Preamble{html}
+\\begin{document}
+\\Css{div.maketitle {text-align:left;}}
+\\Css{h2.titleHead {text-align:left;}}
+\\Css{. {font-family:verdana,helvetica,sans-serif}}
+\\Css{a {text-decoration:none;color:\\#3030a0}}
+\\Css{.cmbx-10x-x-109{ font-weight: bold;}}
+\\Css{.cmbxti-10x-x-109{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;}}
+\\EndPreamble
+END_CFG
+
+ close CFG;
+
+ # Run htlatex
+
+ # Change directory
+ chdir "html-src/$importdir"
+ or die "Can't change directory to 'html-src/$importdir': $!\n";
+
+
+ my $code = system("htlatex \"".$import->{'name'}."\" \"jmlr\"");
+
+ if ($code)
+ {
+ die "htlatex failed with exit code $code\n";
+ }
+
+ # Go back to main directory
+ chdir "$org_dir/$main_path"
+ or die "Can't change directory to '$org_dir/$main_path': $!\n";
+
+ # Copy the html file to the html directory, but rename
+ # the css file to jmlr.css
+
+ my $infile = "html-src/$importdir/".$import->{'name'}.".html";
+
+ open INFD, $infile or die "Can't open '$infile': $!\n";
+
+ my $outfile = "html/".$import->{'name'}.".html";
+
+ open OUTFD, ">$outfile" or die "Can't open '$outfile': $!\n";
+
+ while (<INFD>)
+ {
+ s/href="$import->{name}\.css"/href="jmlr.css"/;
+
+ print OUTFD;
+ }
+
+ close OUTFD;
+
+ close INFD;
+
+ # Copy css file
+
+ copy("html-src/$importdir/$import->{name}.css",
+ "html/jmlr.css")
+ or die "Can't copy 'html-src/$importdir/$import->{name}.css'",
+ " to 'html/jmlr.css': $!\n";
+
+ # Copy pdf file
+
+ copy("$importbase.$format",
+ "html/$import->{name}.$format")
+ or die "Can't copy '$importdir/$import->{name}.$format'",
+ " to 'html/$import->{name}.$format': $!\n";
+ }
+}
+
+# do we need to run bibtex on the main document?
+
+if ($main_bibdata)
+{
+ &bibtex($main_name);
+}
+
+if ($online)
+{
+ &latexonline($main_name);
+
+ # do we need a rerun?
+
+ if (&needs_rerun($main_name))
+ {
+ &message("Rerun required\n");
+ &latexonline($main_name);
+
+ # check again
+
+ if (&needs_rerun($main_name))
+ {
+ &message("Rerun required\n");
+ &latexonline($main_name);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+if ($print)
+{
+ &latexprint($main_name);
+
+ # do we need a rerun?
+
+ if (&needs_rerun($main_name))
+ {
+ &message("Rerun required\n");
+ &latexprint($main_name);
+
+ # check again
+
+ if (&needs_rerun($main_name))
+ {
+ &message("Rerun required\n");
+ &latexprint($main_name);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+if ($html)
+{
+ # Make the index file
+
+ my $indexfile = &fname('html-src', "index");
+
+ my $preamble = '';
+
+ open OUTFD, ">$indexfile.tex"
+ or die "Can't open '$indexfile.tex': $!\n";
+
+ open INFD, "$main_name.tex"
+ or die "Can't open '$main_name.tex': $!\n";
+
+ print OUTFD "\\batchmode", $eol if ($batchtex or $quiet);
+
+ print OUTFD
+ "\\makeatletter",$eol,
+ "\\def\\input\@path{{../}}$eol",
+ "\\makeatother",$eol,
+ "\\def\\jmlrgrayscale{0}",$eol;
+
+ while (<INFD>)
+ {
+ unless
+ (s/^([^%]*)\\documentclass\[([^\]]*)\]/$1\\documentclass[$2,html]/)
+ {
+ s/^([^%]*)\\documentclass/$&\[html\]/;
+ }
+
+ s/^([^%]*)\\begin{document}/$&\\HCode{<div id="content">}/;
+
+ if (/^([^%]*)\\maketitle/)
+ {
+ $preamble .= join('', $1, "\\maketitle", $eol);
+ last;
+ }
+
+ $preamble .= $_;
+ }
+
+ close INFD;
+
+ # Find the book logo
+ if ($preamble=~/\\logo\s*{(%\s*\n)?\\includegraphics\s*(\[[^\]]*\])?{([^}]*)}}/m)
+ {
+ my $texpath = $3;
+ my $orgtexpath = $texpath;
+ $texpath=~s/\//\\/g if ($dd eq "\\");
+
+ my $ext = '';
+
+ if (-e $texpath)
+ {
+ copy($texpath, 'html')
+ or die "Can't copy '$texpath' to 'html': $!\n";
+ copy($texpath, 'html-src')
+ or die "Can't copy '$texpath' to 'html-src': $!\n";
+ }
+ elsif (-e "$texpath.png")
+ {
+ copy("$texpath.png", 'html')
+ or die "Can't copy '$texpath.png' to 'html': $!\n";
+ copy("$texpath.png", 'html-src')
+ or die "Can't copy '$texpath.png' to 'html-src': $!\n";
+
+ $ext = '.png';
+ }
+ elsif (-e "$texpath.jpg")
+ {
+ copy("$texpath.jpg", 'html')
+ or die "Can't copy '$texpath.jpg' to 'html': $!\n";
+ copy("$texpath.jpg", 'html-src')
+ or die "Can't copy '$texpath.jpg' to 'html-src': $!\n";
+
+ $ext = '.jpg';
+ }
+ elsif (-e "$texpath.gif")
+ {
+ copy("$texpath.gif", 'html')
+ or die "Can't copy '$texpath.gif' to 'html': $!\n";
+ copy("$texpath.gif", 'html-src')
+ or die "Can't copy '$texpath.gif' to 'html-src': $!\n";
+
+ $ext = '.gif';
+ }
+
+ my $img = basename($texpath);
+
+ if ($logourl)
+ {
+ $preamble=~s/\\includegraphics(\[[^\]]*\])?{$orgtexpath}/\\href{$logourl}{\\includegraphics${1}{$img$ext}}/mg;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ $preamble=~s/\\includegraphics(\[[^\]]*\])?{$orgtexpath}/\\includegraphics${1}{$img$ext}/mg;
+ }
+ }
+
+ print OUTFD $preamble, $eol;
+
+ # Parse TOC
+
+ my $toc = "$main_name.toc";
+
+ open TOC, $toc or die "Can't open '$toc': $!\n";
+
+ my $idx = 0;
+
+ while (<TOC>)
+ {
+ if (/^\\tocpart\s*{(.*)}\s*$/)
+ {
+ print OUTFD "\\begin{center}\\bfseries $1\\end{center}$eol";
+ }
+ elsif (/\\contentsline\s*{papertitle}{(.*)}{[^{}]*}{[^{}]*}\s*$/)
+ {
+ print OUTFD "\\par\\noindent $1$eol";
+ }
+ elsif (/\\contentsline\s*{chapterauthor}{(.*)}{[^{}]*}{[^{}]*}\s*$/)
+ {
+ my $details = $1;
+ $details=~s/([^;]*);/\\textbf{\\emph{$1};}/;
+
+ my $label = $imports[$idx]->{'label'};
+ my $pages = $pagerefs{$label}->{'start'}.'--'
+ . $pagerefs{$label}->{'end'};
+
+ $details=~s/\\articlepagesref\s*{$label}/$pages/;
+
+ print OUTFD "\\par $details$eol";
+
+ my $name = $imports[$idx]->{'name'};
+
+ print OUTFD "\\par [\\href{$name.html}{abs}] [\\href{$name.pdf}{pdf}]$eol$eol";
+
+ $idx++;
+ }
+ }
+
+ close TOC;
+
+ print OUTFD "\\HCode{</div>}\\end{document}$eol";
+
+ close OUTFD;
+
+ # Go into html-src directory and run htlatex
+
+ chdir('html-src')
+ or die "Can't change directory to 'html': $!\n";
+
+ my $code = system('htlatex index');
+
+ if ($code)
+ {
+ die "htlatex failed with error code $code\n";
+ }
+
+ chdir('..')
+ or die "Can't change directory to '..': $!\n";
+
+ # Copy to html directory
+
+ my $inname = &fname('html-src', 'index.html');
+ my $outname = &fname('html', 'index.html');
+
+ open INFD, $inname or die "Can't open '$inname': $!\n";
+
+ open OUTFD, ">$outname" or die "Can't open '$outname': $!\n";
+
+ while (<INFD>)
+ {
+ s/href="index.css"/href="jmlr.css"/;
+
+ print OUTFD;
+ }
+
+ close OUTFD;
+
+ close INFD;
+}
+
+# Return to original directory
+chdir $org_dir;
+
+# Subroutines
+
+sub message{ print @_ unless ($quiet) }
+
+sub latex{
+ my $file = shift;
+
+ my $code;
+
+ $code = system(join(' ', $latexapp, $latexopts, "\"$file\""));
+
+ if ($code)
+ {
+ die "**LaTeX run failed with exit code $code.**\n",
+ "Check '$file.log' for details\n";
+ }
+}
+
+sub latexonline{
+ my $file = shift;
+
+ my $code;
+
+ $code = system(join(' ', $latexapp, $latexopts,
+ "\"\\def\\jmlrgrayscale{0}\\input{$file}\""));
+
+ if ($code)
+ {
+ die "**LaTeX run failed with exit code $code.**\n",
+ "Check '$file.log' for details\n";
+ }
+
+ &message("copying '$file.$format' to '$file-online.$format'\n");
+
+ copy("$file.$format", "$file-online.$format")
+ or die "Can't copy '$file.$format' to '$file-online.$format': $!\n";
+}
+
+sub latexprint{
+ my $file = shift;
+
+ my $code;
+
+ $code = system(join(' ', $latexapp, $latexopts,
+ "\"\\def\\jmlrgrayscale{1}\\input{$file}\""));
+
+ if ($code)
+ {
+ die "**LaTeX run failed with exit code $code.**\n",
+ "Check '$file.log' for details\n";
+ }
+
+ &message("copying '$file.$format' to '$file-print.$format'\n");
+
+ copy("$file.$format", "$file-print.$format")
+ or die "Can't copy '$file.$format' to '$file-print.$format': $!\n";
+}
+
+sub bibtex{
+ my $file = shift;
+
+ my $code;
+
+ $code = system(join(' ', $bibtexapp, $bibtexopts, "\"$file\""));
+
+ if ($code)
+ {
+ die "**BibTeX run failed with exit code $code.**\n",
+ "Check '$file.blg' for details\n";
+ }
+}
+
+sub needs_rerun{
+ my $file = shift;
+ my $rerun = 0;
+
+ # Scan log file for rerun message
+
+ my $log = "$file.log";
+
+ # If there's no log file a run is needed
+ open LOGFD, $log or return 1;
+
+ while (<LOGFD>)
+ {
+ if (/Rerun to get cross-references right\./)
+ {
+ $rerun = 1;
+ last;
+ }
+ }
+
+ close LOGFD;
+
+ return $rerun;
+}
+
+sub fname{ join($dd, @_) }
+
+1;
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/scripts/jmlr/makejmlrbook.bat b/Master/texmf-dist/scripts/jmlr/makejmlrbook.bat
new file mode 100755
index 00000000000..e9a9fe3bce6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/scripts/jmlr/makejmlrbook.bat
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+@rem = '-*- Perl -*-
+@echo off
+perl -S "%~dp0makejmlrbook" %*
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/jmlr/jmlr.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/jmlr/jmlr.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bf62a97e559
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/jmlr/jmlr.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,4698 @@
+%\iffalse
+% jmlr.dtx generated using makedtx version 0.94b (c) Nicola Talbot
+% Command line args:
+% -src "jmlr.cls\Z=>jmlr.cls"
+% -src "jmlrbook.cls\Z=>jmlrbook.cls"
+% -doc "jmlr-manual.tex"
+% -author "Nicola Talbot"
+% -codetitle "jmlr.cls Code"
+% jmlr
+% Created on 2010/6/17 20:52
+%\fi
+%\iffalse
+%<*package>
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%</package>
+%\fi
+% \iffalse
+% Doc-Source file to use with LaTeX2e
+% Copyright (C) 2010 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved.
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{nlctdoc}
+
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage{ifthen}
+\usepackage[colorlinks,
+ bookmarks,
+ hyperindex=false,
+ pdfauthor={Nicola L.C. Talbot},
+ pdftitle={jmlr: LaTeX2e Classes for the Journal of Machine Learning Research},
+ pdfkeywords={LaTeX,jmlr}]{hyperref}
+
+\CheckSum{3333}
+\OnlyDescription
+
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{jmlr.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%\fi
+%\MakeShortVerb{"}
+%\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \title{\LaTeXe\ Classes for the Journal of Machine
+%Learning Research}
+% \author{Nicola L. C. Talbot\\[10pt]
+%\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}}
+%
+% \date{2010-06-17 (version 1.06)}
+% \maketitle
+%\tableofcontents
+%
+%\section{Introduction}
+%
+%The \clsfmt{jmlr} class is for articles that need to be formatted
+%according to the Journal of Machine Learning Research style. This
+%class is based on the \sty{jmlr2e} and \sty{jmlrwcp2e} packages
+%but has been adapted to enable it to work better with the
+%\cls{combine} class to collate the articles into a book.
+%\sectionref{sec:jmlr} describes how to use the \clsfmt{jmlr} class.
+%
+%The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class is for combining JMLR articles into a book.
+%This class uses \cls{combine} and \sty{hyperref}, which are
+%troublesome enough on their own but together are quite fragile. The
+%\clsfmt{jmlrbook} class redefines some internals to get \clsfmt{combine}
+%and \clsfmt{hyperref} to work together but some packages (e.g.\
+%\sty{subfig} and \sty{pdfpages}) are likely to mess everything up
+%and cause errors. This is why the guidelines to authors are fairly
+%stringent and why \clsfmt{jmlr} will give an error message if certain
+%packages are loaded.\footnote{Currently \clsfmt{jmlr} will check if
+%\sty{subfig}, \sty{pdfpages}, \sty{geometry}, \sty{psfig},
+%\sty{epsfig} and \sty{theorem} are loaded and will throw an error.
+%If other packages are found to be a problem, they will be added to
+%the list.} The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class works best with PDF\LaTeX\ so
+%authors should ensure that their articles can compile with
+%PDF\LaTeX. \sectionref{sec:jmlrbook} describes how to use the
+%\clsfmt{jmlrbook} class.
+%
+%The \app{makejmlrbook} Perl script can be used to make a book that
+%uses the \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class. In addition to creating the print
+%and online versions of the book, it will compile the individual
+%articles, running Bib\TeX\ where necessary, and create a set of
+%HTML files containing a list of all the articles imported into the
+%book along with links to the abstracts and PDFs of the individual
+%articles. \sectionref{sec:makejmlrbook} describes how
+%to use the \app{makejmlrbook} application.
+%
+%\section{Required Packages}
+%
+%The \clsfmt{jmlr} class is based on the \cls{scrartcl} class and loads
+%the following packages: \sty{amsmath}, \sty{amssymb},
+%\sty{natbib}, \sty{url}, \sty{graphicx} and \sty{algorithm2e}.
+%Note that unlike the \sty{jmlr2e} and \sty{jmlrwcp2e} packages,
+%this class file does not load the obsolete \sty{epsfig} package.
+%
+%The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class additionally loads the \cls{combine} class
+%and the following packages: \sty{hyperref}, \sty{xkeyval},
+%\sty{combnat} and \sty{setspace}.
+%
+%The \app{makejmlrbook} script requires Perl, \TeX\ and \TeX4ht.
+%
+%\section{Guidelines for Article Authors}
+%\label{sec:jmlr}
+%
+%Article authors should use the \clsfmt{jmlr} class. This class
+%comes with example files \texttt{jmlr-sample.tex} and
+%\texttt{jmlrwcp-sample.tex}, which can be used as templates.
+%
+%The following class options are available:
+%\begin{description}
+%\item[\clsopt{nowcp}]The article is for the Journal of Machine
+%Learning Research (default).
+%\item[\clsopt{wcp}] The article is for JMLR Workshop and Conference
+%Proceedings.
+%\item[\clsopt{color}] Color version (see \sectionref{sec:color}).
+%
+%\item[\clsopt{gray}] Grayscale version (see \sectionref{sec:color}).
+%
+%\item[\clsopt{tablecaptiontop}] in a \env{table} environment,
+%\ics{floatconts} puts the caption at the top.
+%
+%\item[\clsopt{tablecaptionbottom}] in a \env{table} environment,
+%\ics{floatconts} puts the caption at the bottom.
+%\end{description}
+%
+%\subsection{Title Information}
+%
+%The \clsfmt{jmlr} class uses different syntax from \sty{jmlr2e} and
+%\sty{jmlrwcp2e} to specify the title information. In particular, it
+%doesn't define \cs{jmlrheading} and \cs{ShortHeading}. Instead, the
+%following commands should be used:
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrvolume}]
+%\cs{jmlrvolume}\marg{number}
+%\end{definition}
+%This specifies the volume number. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\jmlrvolume{2}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlryear}]
+%\cs{jmlryear}\marg{year}
+%\end{definition}
+%This specifies the year. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\jmlryear{2010}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrsubmitted}]
+%\cs{jmlrsubmitted}\marg{date}
+%\end{definition}
+%This specifies the submission date.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrpublished}]
+%\cs{jmlrpublished}\marg{date}
+%\end{definition}
+%This specifies the publication date.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrworkshop}]
+%\cs{jmlrworkshop}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%This specifies the workshop title (for use with the \clsopt{wcp}
+%class option).
+%
+%The title information is specified using the commands described
+%below. These commands should typically go in the preamble. As
+%with most class files, The title itself is produced using
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\maketitle}]
+%\cs{maketitle}
+%\end{definition}
+%This command should go after \verb|\begin{document}|. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{document}
+%\maketitle
+%\end{verbatim}
+%Before \cs{maketitle}, you must specify the title information
+%using the following commands:
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\title}]
+%\cs{title}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%This specifies the article's title. A short title for the page
+%header can be supplied via the optional argument \meta{short title}.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\editor}]
+%\cs{editor}\marg{name}
+%\end{definition}
+%This specifies the editor's name. If there is more than one
+%editor, use:
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\editors}]
+%\cs{editors}\marg{names}
+%\end{definition}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\author}]
+%\cs{author}\marg{author specs}
+%\end{definition}
+%This specifies the author. The specifications \meta{author specs}
+%are a bit different to \sty{jmlr2e} and \sty{jmlrwcp2e}. Use
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Name}]
+%\cs{Name}\marg{author's name}
+%\end{definition}
+%to specify the author's name. Note that if the surname contains a
+%space it must be grouped (enclosed in braces \{\}). Similarly if
+%the initial letter of each forename is a diacritic it must be
+%grouped. (See below for examples.)
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Email}]
+%\cs{Email}\marg{author's email}
+%\end{definition}
+%This specifies the author's email address. It should only be used
+%within the argument to \cs{author}.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\and}]
+%\cs{and}
+%\end{definition}
+%This should be used to separate two authors with the same address.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\AND}]
+%\cs{AND}
+%\end{definition}
+%This should be used to separate authors with different addresses.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\\}]
+%\verb|\\|
+%\end{definition}
+%This should be used before an author's address or between authors
+%with the same address where there are more that two authors.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\addr}]
+%\cs{addr}
+%\end{definition}
+%This should be used at the start of the address.
+%
+%\begin{description}
+%\item[Example 1] Two authors with the same address:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\author{\Name{Jane Doe} \Email{abc@sample.com}\and
+% \Name{John {Basey Fisher}} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\
+% \addr Address}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%In this example, the second author has a space in his surname
+%so the surname needs to be grouped.
+%
+%\item[Example 2] Three authors with the same address:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\author{\Name{Fred Arnold {de la Cour}} \Email{an1@sample.com}\\
+% \Name{Jack Jones} \Email{an3@sample.com}\\
+% \Name{{\'E}louise {\'E}abhla Finchley} \Email{an2@sample.com}\\
+% \addr Address}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%In this example, the third author has an accent on her
+%forename initials so grouping is required.
+%
+%\item[Example 3] Authors with a different address:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\author{\Name{John Smith} \Email{abc@sample.com}\\
+% \addr Address 1
+% \AND
+% \Name{May Brown} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\
+% \addr Address 2
+% }
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\end{description}
+%
+%\subsection{Font Changing Commands}
+%
+%Use the \LaTeXe\ font changing commands, such as \cs{bfseries} or
+%\cs{textbf}\marg{text}, rather than the obsolete \LaTeX2.09
+%commands, such as \cs{bf}.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\url}]
+%\cs{url}\marg{address}
+%\end{definition}
+%This will typeset \meta{address} in a typewriter font. Special
+%characters, such as \verb|~|, are correctly displayed. Example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\mailto}]
+%\cs{mailto}\marg{email address}
+%\end{definition}
+%This will typeset the given email address in a typewriter font.
+%Note that this is not the same as \cs{Email}, which should only be
+%used in the argument of \cs{author}.
+%
+%\subsection{Structure}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{abstract}]
+%\cs{begin}\{abstract\}\\
+%\meta{text}\\
+%\cs{end}\{abstract\}
+%\end{definition}
+%The abstract text should be displayed using the \envfmt{abstract}
+%environment.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{keywords}]
+%\cs{begin}\{keywords\}\meta{keyword list}\cs{end}\{keywords\}
+%\end{definition}
+%The keywords should be displayed using the \envfmt{keywords}
+%environment.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\acks}]
+%\cs{acks}\marg{text}
+%\end{definition}
+%This displays the acknowledgements.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\section}]
+%\cs{section}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%Section titles are created using \cs{section}. The heading is
+%automatically numbered and can be cross-referenced using
+%\cs{label} and \cs{ref}. Unnumbered sections can be produced
+%using:
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\section*}]
+%\cs{section*}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsection}]
+%\cs{subsection}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%Sub-section titles are created using \cs{subsection}. Unnumbered
+%sub-sections can be produced using:
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsection*}]
+%\cs{subsection*}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsubsection}]
+%\cs{subsubsection}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%Sub-sub-section titles are created using \cs{subsubsection}.
+%Unnumbered sub-sub-sections can be produced using:
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsubsection*}]
+%\cs{subsubsection*}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%
+%Further sectioning levels can be obtained using \cs{paragraph}
+%and \cs{subparagraph}, but these are unnumbered with running heads.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\appendix}]
+%\cs{appendix}
+%\end{definition}
+%Use \cs{appendix} to switch to the appendices. This changes
+%\cs{section} to produce an appendix. Example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\appendix
+%\section{Proof of Theorems}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\subsection{Citations and Bibliography}
+%
+%The \clsfmt{jmlr} class automatically loads \sty{natbib} and sets
+%the bibliography style to \texttt{plainnat}. References should
+%be stored in a \texttt{.bib} file.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\bibliography}]
+%\cs{bibliography}\marg{bib file}
+%\end{definition}
+%This displays the bibliography.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\citep}]
+%\cs{citep}\oarg{pre note}\oarg{post note}\marg{label}
+%\end{definition}
+%Use \cs{citep} for a parenthetical citation.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\citet}]
+%\cs{citet}\oarg{note}\marg{label}
+%\end{definition}
+%Use \cs{citet} for a textual citation.
+%
+%See the \ctandoc{natbib} for further details.
+%
+%\subsection{Figures and Tables}
+%
+%Floats, such as figures, tables and algorithms, are moving objects
+%and are supposed to float to the nearest convenient location.
+%Please don't force them to go in a particular place. In general
+%it's best to use the \texttt{htbp} specifier and don't put
+%the float in the middle of a paragraph (that is, make sure there's
+%a paragraph break above and below the float). Floats are supposed
+%to have a little extra space above and below them to make them
+%stand out from the rest of the text. This extra space is put in
+%automatically and shouldn't need modifying.
+%
+%To ensure consistency, please \emph{don't} try changing the
+%format of the caption by doing something like:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\caption{\textit{A Sample Caption.}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%or
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\caption{\em A Sample Caption.}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%You can, of course, change the font for individual words or
+%phrases. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\caption{A Sample Caption With Some \emph{Emphasized Words}.}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%The \clsfmt{jmlr} class provides the following command for displaying
+%the contents of a figure or table:
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\floatconts}]
+%\cs{floatconts}\marg{label}\marg{caption command}\marg{contents}
+%\end{definition}
+%This ensures that the caption is correctly positioned and that
+%the contents are centered. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{table}[htbp]
+%\floatconts
+% {tab:example}% label
+% {\caption{An Example Table}}% caption command
+% {%
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% \bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\
+% Data1 & 0.123456
+% \end{tabular}
+% }
+%\end{table}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%The \clsfmt{jmlr} class automatically loads \sty{graphicx} which
+%defines:
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\includegraphics}]
+%\cs{includegraphics}\oarg{options}\marg{file name}
+%\end{definition}
+%where \meta{options} is a comma-separated list of options.
+%
+%For example, suppose you have an image called
+%\texttt{mypic.png} in a subdirectory called \texttt{images}:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{figure}[htbp]
+%\floatconts
+% {fig:example}% label
+% {\caption{An Example Figure}}% caption command
+% {\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{images/mypic}}
+%\end{figure}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%Note that you shouldn't specify the file extension when including
+%the image. It's helpful if you can also provide a grayscale
+%version of color images. This should be labeled as the color
+%image but with \texttt{-gray} immediately before the extension.
+%(The extension need not be the same as that of the color image.)
+%For example, if you have an image called \texttt{mypic.pdf}, the
+%grayscale can be called \texttt{mypic-gray.pdf},
+%\texttt{mypic-gray.png} or \texttt{mypic-gray.jpg}.
+%See \sectionref{sec:color} for further details.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\includeteximage}]
+%\cs{includeteximage}\oarg{options}\marg{file name}
+%\end{definition}
+%If your image file is made up of \LaTeX\ code (e.g.\ \sty{tikz}
+%commands) the file can be included using \cs{includeteximage}.
+%The optional argument is a key=value comma-separated list
+%where the keys are a subset of those provided by
+%\cs{includegraphics}. The main keys are: \texttt{width},
+%\texttt{height}, \texttt{scale} and \texttt{angle}.
+%
+%\subsubsection{Sub-Figures and Sub-Tables}
+%
+%The \sty{subfig} package causes a problem for \clsfmt{jmlrbook} so
+%the \clsfmt{jmlr} class will give an error if it is used. Therefore
+%the \clsfmt{jmlr} class provides its own commands for including
+%sub-figures and sub-tables.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subfigure}]
+%\cs{subfigure}\oarg{title}\oarg{valign}\marg{contents}
+%\end{definition}
+%This makes a sub-figure where \meta{contents} denotes the contents
+%of the sub-figure. This should also include the \cs{label}.
+%The first optional argument \meta{title} indicates a caption for
+%the sub-figure. By default, the sub-figures are aligned at the
+%base. This can be changed with the second optional argument
+%\meta{valign}, which may be one of: \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{c}
+%(centred) or \texttt{b} (base).
+%
+%For example, suppose there are two images files, \texttt{mypic1.png}
+%and \texttt{mypic2.png}, in the subdirectory \texttt{images}.
+%Then they can be included as sub-figures as follows:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{figure}[htbp]
+%\floatconts
+% {fig:example2}% label for whole figure
+% {\caption{An Example Figure.}}% caption for whole figure
+% {%
+% \subfigure{%
+% \label{fig:pic1}% label for this sub-figure
+% \includegraphics{images/mypic1}
+% }\qquad % space out the images a bit
+% \subfigure{%
+% \label{fig:pic2}% label for this sub-figure
+% \includegraphics{images/mypic2}
+% }
+% }
+%\end{figure}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subtable}]
+%\cs{subtable}\oarg{title}\oarg{valign}\marg{contents}
+%\end{definition}
+%This is an analogous command for sub-tables. The default value
+%for \meta{valign} is \texttt{t}.
+%
+%\subsection{Algorithms}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{algorithm}]
+%\cs{begin}\{algorithm\}\\
+%\meta{contents}\\
+%\cs{end}\{algorithm\}
+%\end{definition}
+%Enumerated textual algorithms can be displayed using the
+%\envfmt{algorithm} environment. Within this environment, use
+%\ics{caption} to set the caption (and \ics{label} to cross-reference
+%it). Within the body of the environment you can use the
+%\env{enumerate} environment.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{enumerate*}]
+%\cs{begin}\{enumerate*\}\\
+%\cs{item} \meta{text}\\
+%\ldots\\
+%\cs{end}\{enumerate*\}
+%\end{definition}
+%If you want to have nested \env{enumerate} environments but you want
+%to keep the same numbering throughout the algorithm, you can use the
+%\envfmt{enumerate*} environment, provided by the \clsfmt{jmlr}
+%class. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{enumerate*}
+% \item Set the label of vertex $s$ to 0
+% \item Set $i=0$
+% \begin{enumerate*}
+% \item \label{step:locate}Locate all unlabelled vertices
+% adjacent to a vertex labelled $i$ and label them $i+1$
+% \item If vertex $t$ has been labelled,
+% \begin{enumerate*}
+% \item[] the shortest path can be found by backtracking, and
+% the length is given by the label of $t$.
+% \end{enumerate*}
+% otherwise
+% \begin{enumerate*}
+% \item[] increment $i$ and return to step~\ref{step:locate}
+% \end{enumerate*}
+% \end{enumerate*}
+%\end{enumerate*}
+%\end{algorithm}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{algorithm2e}]
+%\cs{begin}\{algorithm2e\}\\
+%\meta{contents}\\
+%\cs{end}\{algorithm2e\}
+%\end{definition}
+%Pseudo code can be displayed using the \envfmt{algorithm2e} environment,
+%provided by the \sty{algorithm2e} package, which is automatically
+%loaded. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{algorithm2e}
+%\caption{Computing Net Activation}
+%\label{alg:net}
+%\dontprintsemicolon
+%\linesnumbered
+%\KwIn{$x_1, \ldots, x_n, w_1, \ldots, w_n$}
+%\KwOut{$y$, the net activation}
+%$y\leftarrow 0$\;
+%\For{$i\leftarrow 1$ \KwTo $n$}{
+% $y \leftarrow y + w_i*x_i$\;
+%}
+%\end{algorithm2e}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%See the \ctandoc{algorithm2e} for more details.
+%
+%\subsection{Description Lists}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{altdescription}]
+%\cs{begin}\{altdescription\}\marg{widest label}\\
+%\cs{item}\oarg{label} \meta{item text}\\
+%\cs{end}\{altdescription\}
+%\end{definition}
+%In addition to the standard \env{description} environment, the
+%\clsfmt{jmlr} class also provides the \envfmt{altdescription} environment.
+%This has an argument that should be the widest label used in the
+%list. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{altdescription}{differentiate}
+%\item[add] A method that adds two variables.
+%\item[differentiate] A method that differentiates a function.
+%\end{altdescription}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\subsection{Theorems, Lemmas etc}
+%
+%The \clsfmt{jmlr} class provides the following theorem-like
+%environments: \env{theorem}, \env{example}, \env{lemma},
+%\env{proposition}, \env{remark}, \env{corollary}, \env{definition},
+%\env{conjecture} and \env{axiom}. Within the body of those
+%environments, you can use the \env{proof} environment to display the
+%proof if need be. The theorem-like environments all take an
+%optional argument, which gives the environment a title. For example:
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{theorem}[An Example Theorem]
+%\label{thm:example}
+%This is the theorem.
+%\begin{proof}
+%This is the proof.
+%\end{proof}
+%\end{theorem}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\subsection{Cross-Referencing}
+%\label{sec:crossref}
+%
+%Always use \ics{label} when cross-referencing, rather than writing
+%the number explicitly. The \clsfmt{jmlr} class provides some
+%convenience commands to assist referencing. These commands,
+%described below, can all take a comma-separated list of labels.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\sectionref}]
+%\cs{sectionref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to a section or sections. For example, if you defined
+%a section as follows:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\section{Results}\label{sec:results}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%you can refer to it as follows:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%The results are detailed in \sectionref{sec:results}.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%This command may also be used for sub-sections and sub-sub-sections.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\appendixref}]
+%\cs{appendixref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to an appendix or multiple appendices.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\equationref}]
+%\cs{equationref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to an equation or multiple equations.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\tableref}]
+%\cs{tableref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to a table or multiple tables. This can also be
+%used for sub-tables where the main table number is also required.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subtabref}]
+%\cs{subtabref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to sub-tables without the main table number, e.g.
+%(\emph{a}) or (\emph{b}).
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\figureref}]
+%\cs{figureref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to a figure or multiple figures. This can also
+%be used for sub-figures where the main figure number is also
+%required, e.g.\ 2(\emph{a}) or 4(\emph{b}).
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subfigref}]
+%\cs{subfigref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to sub-figures without the main figure number, e.g.
+%(\emph{a}) or (\emph{b}).
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\algorithmref}]
+%\cs{algorithmref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to an algorithm or multiple algorithms.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\theoremref}]
+%\cs{theoremref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to a theorem or multiple theorems.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\lemmaref}]
+%\cs{lemmaref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to a lemma or multiple lemmas.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\remarkref}]
+%\cs{remarkref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to a remark or multiple remarks.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\corollaryref}]
+%\cs{corollaryref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to a corollary or multiple corollaries.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\definitionref}]
+%\cs{definitionref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to a definition or multiple definitions.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\conjectureref}]
+%\cs{conjectureref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to a conjecture or multiple conjectures.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\axiomref}]
+%\cs{axiomref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to an axiom or multiple axioms.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\exampleref}]
+%\cs{exampleref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Used to refer to an example or multiple examples.
+%
+%\subsection{Mathematics}
+%
+%The \clsfmt{jmlr} class loads the \sty{amsmath} package so you can use
+%any of the commands and environments defined in that package. A
+%brief summary of some of the more common commands and environments
+%is provided here. See the \ctandoc{amsmath} for further details.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\set}]
+%\cs{set}\marg{text}
+%\end{definition}
+%In addition to the commands provided by \sty{amsmath}, the
+%\clsfmt{jmlr} class also provides the \cs{set} command which can
+%be used to typeset a set. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%The universal set is denoted $\set{U}$
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%Unnumbered single-line equations should be displayed using
+%\cs{[} and \cs{]}. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\[E = m c^2\]
+%\end{verbatim}
+%Numbered single-line equations should be displayed using the
+%\env{equation} environment. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{equation}\label{eq:trigrule}
+%\cos^2\theta + \sin^2\theta \equiv 1
+%\end{equation}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%Multi-lined numbered equations should be displayed using the
+%\env{align} environment. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{align}
+%f(x) &= x^2 + x\label{eq:f}\\
+%f'(x) &= 2x + 1\label{eq:df}
+%\end{align}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%Unnumbered multi-lined equations should be displayed using the
+%\env{align*} environment. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{align*}
+%f(x) &= (x+1)(x-1)\\
+%&= x^2 - 1
+%\end{align*}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%If you want to mix numbered with unnumbered lines use the
+%\env{align} environment and suppress unwanted line numbers with
+%\cs{nonumber}. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{align}
+%y &= x^2 + 3x - 2x + 1\nonumber\\
+%&= x^2 + x + 1\label{eq:y}
+%\end{align}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%An equation that is too long to fit on a single line can be
+%displayed using the \env{split} environment.
+%
+%Text can be embedded in an equation using \ics{text}\marg{text} or
+%you can use \ics{intertext}\marg{text} to interupt a multi-line
+%environment such as \env{align}.
+%
+%Predefined operator names are listed in \tableref{tab:operatornames}.
+%For additional operators, either use
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\operatorname}]
+%\cs{operatorname}\marg{name}
+%\end{definition}
+%for example
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%If $X$ and $Y$ are independent,
+%$\operatorname{var}(X+Y) =
+%\operatorname{var}(X) + \operatorname{var}(Y)$
+%\end{verbatim}
+%or declare it with
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\DeclareMathOperator}]
+%\cs{DeclareMathOperator}\marg{command}\marg{name}
+%\end{definition}
+%for example
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareMathOperator{\var}{var}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%and then use this new command:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%If $X$ and $Y$ are independent,
+%$\var(X+Y) = \var(X)+\var(Y)$
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%If you want limits that go above and
+%below the operator (like \ics{sum}) use the starred versions
+%(\ics{operatorname*} or \ics{DeclareMathOperator*}).
+%
+%\begin{table}[htbp]
+%\caption{Predefined Operator Names (taken from
+% \sty{amsmath} documentation)}
+%\label{tab:operatornames}%
+%\vskip\baselineskip
+%\centering
+%\begin{tabular}{rlrlrlrl}
+%\cs{arccos} & $\arccos$ & \cs{deg} & $\deg$ & \cs{lg} & $\lg$ & \cs{projlim} & $\projlim$ \\
+%\cs{arcsin} & $\arcsin$ & \cs{det} & $\det$ & \cs{lim} & $\lim$ & \cs{sec} & $\sec$ \\
+%\cs{arctan} & $\arctan$ & \cs{dim} & $\dim$ & \cs{liminf} & $\liminf$ & \cs{sin} & $\sin$ \\
+%\cs{arg} & $\arg$ & \cs{exp} & $\exp$ & \cs{limsup} & $\limsup$ & \cs{sinh} & $\sinh$ \\
+%\cs{cos} & $\cos$ & \cs{gcd} & $\gcd$ & \cs{ln} & $\ln$ & \cs{sup} & $\sup$ \\
+%\cs{cosh} & $\cosh$ & \cs{hom} & $\hom$ & \cs{log} & $\log$ & \cs{tan} & $\tan$ \\
+%\cs{cot} & $\cot$ & \cs{inf} & $\inf$ & \cs{max} & $\max$ & \cs{tanh} & $\tanh$ \\
+%\cs{coth} & $\coth$ & \cs{injlim} & $\injlim$ & \cs{min} & $\min$ \\
+%\cs{csc} & $\csc$ & \cs{ker} & $\ker$ & \cs{Pr} & $\Pr$
+%\end{tabular}\par
+%\begin{tabular}{rlrl}
+%\cs{varlimsup} & $\varlimsup$
+%& \cs{varinjlim} & $\varinjlim$\\
+%\cs{varliminf} & $\varliminf$
+%& \cs{varprojlim} & $\varprojlim$
+%\end{tabular}
+%
+%\end{table}
+%
+%\subsection{Color vs Grayscale}
+%\label{sec:color}
+%
+%It's helpful if authors supply grayscale versions of their
+%articles in the event that the article is to be incorporated into
+%a black and white printed book. With external PDF, PNG or JPG
+%graphic files, you just need to supply a grayscale version of the
+%file. For example, if the file is called \texttt{myimage.png},
+%then the gray version should be \texttt{myimage-gray.png} or
+%\texttt{myimage-gray.pdf} or \texttt{myimage-gray.jpg}. You don't
+%need to modify your code. The \clsfmt{jmlr} class checks for
+%the existence of the grayscale version if it is print mode
+%(provided you have used \ics{includegraphics} and haven't
+%specified the file extension).
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifprint}]
+%\cs{ifprint}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
+%\end{definition}
+%You can use \cs{ifprint} to determine which mode you are in.
+%For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%in \figureref{fig:nodes}, the
+%\ifprint{dark gray}{purple}
+%ellipse represents an input and the
+%\ifprint{light gray}{yellow} ellipse
+%represents an output.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%Another example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%{\ifprint{\bfseries}{\color{red}}important text!}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%You can use the class option \clsopt{gray} to see how the
+%document will appear in gray scale mode.
+%
+%The \sty{xcolor} class is loaded with the \pkgoptfmt{x11names}
+%option, so you can use any of the x11 predefined colors (listed
+%in the \ctandoc{xcolor}).
+%
+%\subsection{Where To Go For Help}
+%
+%If you have a \LaTeX\ query, the first place to go to is the
+%\urlfootref{http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq}{UK TUG FAQ}.
+%
+%If you are unfamiliar or just getting started with \LaTeX, there's
+%a list of on-line introductions to \LaTeX\ at:
+%\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=man-latex}
+%
+%There are also forums, mailing lists and newsgroups. For example,
+%the \LaTeX\ Community (\url{http://www.latex-community.org/}),
+%the \texttt{texhax} mailing list
+%(\url{http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/texhax}) and
+%\texttt{comp.text.tex} (archives available at
+%\url{http://groups.google.com/group/comp.text.tex/}).
+%
+%Documentation for packages or classes can be found using the
+%\texttt{texdoc} application. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%texdoc natbib
+%\end{verbatim}
+%Alternatively, you can go to
+%\texttt{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/}\meta{name} where
+%\meta{name} is the name of the package. For example:
+%\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/natbib}
+%
+%For a general guide to preparing papers (regardless of whether you
+%are using \LaTeX\ or a word processor), see Kate L.~Turabian, \qt{A
+%manual for writers of term papers, theses, and dissertations}, The
+%University of Chicago Press, 1996.
+%
+%\section{Guidelines for Production Editors}
+%\label{sec:jmlrbook}
+%
+%The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class can be used to combine articles that
+%use the \clsfmt{jmlr} document class into a book. The following sample
+%files are provided: \texttt{paper1/paper1.tex},
+%\texttt{paper2/paper2.tex}, \texttt{paper3/paper3.tex},
+%\texttt{jmlr-sample.tex}, \texttt{jmlrwcp-sample.tex} and
+%\texttt{jmlrbook-sample.tex}. All but the last named one are
+%articles using the \clsfmt{jmlr} class. The last one
+%(\texttt{jmlrbook-sample.tex}) uses the \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class file to
+%combine the articles into a book. Note that no modifications are
+%needed to the files using the \clsfmt{jmlr} class when they are
+%imported into the book. They can either be compiled as stand-alone
+%articles or with the entire book.
+%
+%Before you compile the book, make sure that all the articles
+%compile as stand-alone documents (and run Bib\TeX\ where
+%necessary). You can use the \app{makejmlrbook} Perl script to compile
+%the book and create associated HTML files. See
+%\sectionref{sec:makejmlrbook} for details.
+%
+%\subsection{\clsfmt{jmlrbook} Class Options}
+%\begin{description}
+%\item[\clsopt{nowcp}]The imported pre-published articles were
+%published in the Journal of Machine Learning Research (default).
+%\item[\clsopt{wcp}] The imported pre-published articles were
+%published in the JMLR Workshop and Conference Proceedings.
+%
+%If the book has a mixture of JMLR and JMLR WCP articles, you
+%can switch between them using
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrwcp}]
+%\cs{jmlrwcp}
+%\end{definition}
+%and
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrnowcp}]
+%\cs{jmlrnowcp}
+%\end{definition}
+%Alternatively, you can set the name of the journal or conference
+%proceedings using:
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrproceedings}]
+%\cs{jmlrproceedings}\marg{short title}\marg{long title}
+%\end{definition}
+%
+%\item[\clsopt{color}] Color version (see \sectionref{sec:color}).
+%Use this option for the on-line version with hyperlinks enabled
+%(default).
+%
+%\item[\clsopt{gray}] Grayscale version (see \sectionref{sec:color}).
+%Use this option for the print version without hyperlinks.
+%
+%\item[\clsopt{tablecaptiontop}] in a \env{table} environment,
+%\ics{floatconts} puts the caption at the top.
+%
+%\item[\clsopt{tablecaptionbottom}] in a \env{table} environment,
+%\ics{floatconts} puts the caption at the bottom.
+%
+%\item[\clsopt{letterpaper}] Set the paper size to letter (default).
+%
+%\item[\clsopt{7x10}] Set the paper size to $7\times10$ inches.
+%
+%\item[\clsopt{prehyperref}] The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} automatically loads
+%the \sty{hyperref} package, but some packages need to be loaded
+%before \sty{hyperref}. This information can be specified using
+%the \clsopt{prehyperref} option. This is a key=value option. For
+%example, to load the packages \styfmt{foo} and \styfmt{bar} before
+%\sty{hyperref}, you can do:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass[prehyperref={\usepackage{foo,bar}}]{jmlrbook}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%or:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass[prehyperref={\usepackage{foo}\usepackage{bar}}]{jmlrbook}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item[\clsopt{10pt}] Use 10pt as the normal text size.
+%\item[\clsopt{11pt}] Use 11pt as the normal text size (default).
+%\item[\clsopt{12pt}] Use 12pt as the normal text size.
+%
+%\end{description}
+%
+%\subsection{The Preamble}
+%
+%Any packages that the imported articles load (which aren't
+%automatically loaded by \clsfmt{jmlr}) must be loaded in the book's
+%preamble. For example, if one or more of the articles load the
+%\sty{siunitx} package, this package must be loaded in the book.
+%
+%Commands that are defined in the imported articles will be local
+%to that article unless they have been globally defined using
+%\ics{gdef} or \ics{global}. Since most authors use \ics{newcommand}
+%and \ics{newenvironment} (or \ics{renewcommand} and
+%\ics{renewenvironment}) this shouldn't cause a conflict if more
+%that one article has defined the same command or environment.
+%For example, in the sample files supplied, both
+%\texttt{paper1/paper1.tex} and \texttt{paper2/paper2.tex} have
+%defined the command \cs{samplecommand} using \cs{newcommand}. As
+%long as this command isn't also defined in the book, there won't
+%be a conflict.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\title}]
+%\cs{title}\oarg{PDF title}\marg{book title}
+%\end{definition}
+%In the book preamble, \cs{title} sets the book title and the optional
+%argument is used for the PDF title, which will be displayed
+%when the reader views the PDF file's properties in their PDF viewer.
+%(Note that in the imported articles, \cs{title} sets the article's
+%title and the optional argument sets the short title for the
+%page header and table of contents.)
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\author}]
+%\cs{author}\oarg{PDF author(s)}\marg{book author(s)}
+%\end{definition}
+%In the book preamble, \cs{author} sets the book's author (or editor)
+%and the optional argument is used for the PDF author, which will be
+%displayed when the reader views the PDF file's properties in their
+%PDF viewer. (Note that in the imported articles, \cs{author} sets
+%the article's author and the optional argument sets the short author
+%list for the page header.)
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\volume}]
+%\cs{volume}\marg{number}
+%\end{definition}
+%This command sets the book's volume number. Omit if the book has no
+%volume number.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subtitle}]
+%\cs{subtitle}\marg{sub-title}
+%\end{definition}
+%This command sets the book's subtitle. Omit if the book has no
+%sub-title.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\logo}]
+%\cs{logo}\marg{image command}
+%\end{definition}
+%This sets the book's title image. Use \ics{includegraphics} and
+%omit the file extension. If you provide a grayscale version as
+%well as a color version, the grayscale version will be used for
+%the print version of the book. (See \sectionref{sec:color}
+%for further details.)
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\team}]
+%\cs{team}\marg{team title}
+%\end{definition}
+%This can be used to set the name of the editorial team. This
+%command may be omitted if not required.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\productioneditor}]
+%\cs{productioneditor}\marg{name}
+%\end{definition}
+%This command may be used to name the production editor. The command
+%may be omitted if not required.
+%
+%See \sectionref{sec:modifytitle} for details on how to modify the
+%layout of the title page.
+%
+%\subsection{Main Book Commands}
+%
+%All commands that are provided by the \clsfmt{jmlr} class are
+%also available with the \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class, but some commands
+%might behave differently depending on whether they are in the
+%main part of the book or within the imported articles.
+%
+%In the main part of the book you can use the following commands:
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\maketitle}]
+%\cs{maketitle}
+%\end{definition}
+%This displays the book's title page. Note that \cs{maketitle} has
+%a different effect when used in imported articles.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\frontmatter}]
+%\cs{frontmatter}
+%\end{definition}
+%Use this command at the start of the front matter (e.g.\ before the
+%foreword or preface). This will make chapters unnumbered even if you
+%use \cs{chapter} instead of \cs{chapter*}. It also sets the page
+%style and sets the page numbering to lower case Roman numerals.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{authorsignoff}]
+%\cs{begin}\{authorsignoff\}\\
+%\meta{author list}\\
+%\cs{end}\{authorsignoff\}
+%\end{definition}
+%This environment may be used by the author signing off at the end of a chapter such as the
+%foreword. Within the environment use:
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Author}]
+%\cs{author}\marg{details}
+%\end{definition}
+%for the author's details. More than one \cs{Author} should be used
+%if there is more than one author. Example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{authorsignoff}
+%\Author{Nicola Talbot\\
+%University of East Anglia}
+%\Author{Anne Author\\
+%University of No Where}
+%\end{authorsignoff}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{signoff}]
+%\cs{begin}\{signoff\}\oarg{team name}\marg{date}\\
+%\meta{editor list}\\
+%\cs{end}\{signoff\}
+%\end{definition}
+%This environment may be used by the editorial team when signing off
+%a chapter such as the preface. If the optional argument is omitted,
+%\qt{The Editorial Team} is used.
+%
+%Within the environment use:
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Editor}]
+%\cs{Editor}\marg{details}
+%\end{definition}
+%for each editor. Example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{signoff}{March 2010}
+%% First editor:
+%\Editor{Nicola Talbot\\
+%University of East Anglia\\
+%\mailto{N.Talbot@uea.ac.uk}}
+%% Second editor:
+%\Editor{Anne Editor\\
+%University of Nowhere\\
+%\mailto{ae@sample.com}}
+%\end{signoff}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\tableofcontents}]
+%\cs{tableofcontents}
+%\end{definition}
+%This command displays the book's table of contents. Note that it
+%has a different effect if used in an imported article.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\mainmatter}]
+%\cs{mainmatter}
+%\end{definition}
+%Use this command to switch to the book's main matter. This will
+%switch the chapter numbering back on, reset the page numbering to
+%Arabic and set up the main page style.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\part}]
+%\cs{part}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%If used in the main part of the book, this command will start a
+%new part and issue a clear double page. Note that this command
+%has a different effect if used in an imported article.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\addtocpart}]
+%\cs{addtocpart}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%This adds \meta{title} to the table of contents, issues a clear
+%double page, but doesn't display any text or affect the part
+%numbering.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\chapter}]
+%\cs{chapter}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%This command may be used in the main body of the book but will
+%cause an error if used within an imported article.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\section}]
+%\cs{section}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsection}]
+%\cs{subsection}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsubsection}]
+%\cs{subsubsection}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\paragraph}]
+%\cs{paragraph}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subparagraph}]
+%\cs{subparagraph}\oarg{short title}\marg{title}
+%\end{definition}
+%These commands may be used in the main body of the book or within
+%imported articles. In the main body of the book they need to be
+%within a chapter and will be numbered according to the chapter.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\appendix}]
+%\cs{appendix}
+%\end{definition}
+%If used in the main body of the book, this will switch to the
+%book appendices. Subsequent \cs{chapter} commands will produce the
+%appendices. If used within an imported article, it will switch
+%to the article appendices and won't affect the main part of
+%the book.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{jmlrpapers}]
+%\cs{begin}\{jmlrpapers\}\\
+%\meta{imported papers}\\
+%\cs{end}\{jmlrpapers\}
+%\end{definition}
+%This environment must be used when importing articles. Within this
+%environment, use the following commands to import articles:
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\importpubpaper}]
+%\cs{importpubpaper}\oarg{label}\marg{directory}\marg{file}\marg{pages}
+%\end{definition}
+%This imports an article that has already been published elsewhere.
+%The \meta{pages} argument should be the page range from the
+%\emph{previously published} version of this article. This may not
+%necessarily be the same as the page range of the article in the book.
+%The directory the imported file is contained in is is given by
+%\meta{directory}. If the file is in the same directory as the
+%book, use a dot. The file name is given by \meta{file}. The article
+%is also given a label, specified by the optional argument. This
+%is \meta{directory}/\meta{file} by default. The label is used
+%as a prefix to labels in the imported articles which ensures that
+%cross-references are unique. You can also use this label to reference
+%the article elsewhere in the book (see \sectionref{sec:bkcrossref}).
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\importpaper}]
+%\cs{importpaper}\oarg{label}\marg{directory}\marg{file}
+%\end{definition}
+%Imports an article that is being published in the book. The
+%arguments are the same as above except that there is no page
+%range (the page range is computed automatically).
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\importarticle}]
+%\cs{importarticle}\oarg{label}\marg{directory}\marg{file}
+%\end{definition}
+%This imports an article that hasn't been published elsewhere. There
+%is no page range, but the other arguments are the same as
+%those describe above for \cs{importpubpaper}.
+%
+%Example: to import a previously published paper
+%\texttt{paper1/paper1.tex} and an unpublished paper
+%\texttt{paper2/paper2.tex}:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{jmlrpapers}
+%\importpubpaper{paper1}{paper1}{23--45}
+%\importarticle{paper2}{paper2}
+%\end{jmlrpapers}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Cross-Referencing}
+%\label{sec:bkcrossref}
+%
+%You can cross-reference other parts of the book using the
+%standard \cs{label}/\cs{ref} mechanism, but if you want to
+%reference something within an imported article, you must prefix
+%the label with the label given when importing the article (that
+%is, the optional argument to \ics{importpubpaper},
+%\ics{importpaper} or \cs{importarticle}). For example, if you
+%want to reference a section labeled \texttt{sec:results} in the
+%imported paper \texttt{paper1/paper1.tex}, you would need to do:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%see Section~\ref{paper1/paper1sec:results}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%or
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%see \sectionref{paper1/paper1sec:results}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%In addition to the commands described in \sectionref{sec:crossref},
+%the \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class also provides the following
+%cross-referencing commands:
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\chapterref}]
+%\cs{chapterref}\marg{label list}
+%\end{definition}
+%Reference a chapter or chapters. The argument is a comma-separated
+%list of labels.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\articlepageref}]
+%\cs{articlepageref}\marg{label}
+%\end{definition}
+%This displays the starting page number of the article whose label
+%is given by \meta{label}. Note that this must a single label, not
+%a list. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%An interesting article starts on page~\articlepageref{paper1/paper1}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\articlepagesref}]
+%\cs{articlepagesref}\marg{label}
+%\end{definition}
+%This displays the page range of the article whose label is
+%given by \meta{label}. Again, this must be a single label, not a
+%list. This page range is unrelated to the \meta{pages} argument of
+%\ics{importpubarticle}.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\articletitleref}]
+%\cs{articletitleref}\marg{label}
+%\end{definition}
+%This displays the short title for the article whose label is
+%given by \meta{label}. Again, this must be a single label, not a
+%list.
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\articleauthorref}]
+%\cs{articleauthorref}\marg{label}
+%\end{definition}
+%This displays the author list for the article whose label is
+%given by \meta{label}. Again, this must be a single label, not a
+%list.
+%
+%\subsection{Altering the Layout of the Main Title Page}
+%\label{sec:modifytitle}
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\titlebody}]
+%\cs{titlebody}
+%\end{definition}
+%The main body of the book's title page is given by the command
+%\cs{titlebody}. Within the definition of this command, you can
+%use:
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\SetTitleElement}]
+%\cs{SetTitleElement}\marg{element}\marg{pre}\marg{post}
+%\end{definition}
+%where \meta{element} can be: \texttt{title}, \texttt{volume},
+%\texttt{issue}\footnote{The default title page layout doesn't use
+%\texttt{issue}, but if required it can be set with \ics{issue}\marg{number}},
+%\texttt{subtitle}, \texttt{logo}, \texttt{team}, \texttt{author},
+%\texttt{date}, \texttt{productioneditor}. The \meta{pre} and
+%\meta{post} arguments specify what to do before and after the
+%element. Note that \cs{SetTitleElement} does nothing if that
+%element hasn't been set. For example, if \cs{volume} has been
+%omitted or \verb|\volume{}| is used, then
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\SetTitleElement{volume}{\mainvolumefont}{\postmainvolume}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%will do nothing (so you don't end up with \textbf{Volume :}).
+%
+%\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\IfTitleElement}]
+%\cs{IfTitleElement}\marg{element}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
+%\end{definition}
+%This does \meta{true part} if \meta{element} has been set
+%otherwise it does \meta{false part}. For example,
+%\cs{postmainvolume} is defined as:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newcommand{\postmainvolume}{%
+% \IfTitleElement{subtitle}{}{:}\par\relax
+%}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%This means that it will only print a colon after the volume
+%number if the subtitle has been set.
+%
+%The default definition of \cs{titlebody} is:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newcommand{\titlebody}{%
+% \SetTitleElement{title}{\maintitlefont}{\postmaintitle}%
+% \SetTitleElement{volume}{\mainvolumefont}{\postmainvolume}%
+% \SetTitleElement{subtitle}{\mainsubtitlefont}{\postmainsubtitle}%
+% \SetTitleElement{logo}{\mainlogofont}{\postmainlogo}%
+% \SetTitleElement{team}{\mainteamfont}{\postmainteam}%
+% \SetTitleElement{author}{\mainauthorfont}{\postmainauthor}%
+% \SetTitleElement{productioneditor}{\mainproductioneditorfont}%
+% {\postmainproductioneditor}%
+%}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\subsection{Potential Pitfalls}
+%
+%The \cls{combine} class and \sty{hyperref} package are
+%individually both easily broken by packages that change certain
+%internals and they don't ordinarily work together. The
+%\clsfmt{jmlrbook} class applies patches to the internal referencing
+%mechanism to make them work together, but it's a fairly fragile
+%alliance. Some packages are known to break it, for example
+%\sty{subfig}, \sty{pdfpages} and \sty{geometry}. This is why the
+%\clsfmt{jmlr} class checks for known problem packages and generates an
+%error message to dissuade authors from using them. It's likely that
+%there are other packages that may cause a problem and, as they are
+%found, they will be added to the check list. Also, it's possible for
+%an author to disable the package checking mechanism if they are
+%determined to use a particular package.
+%
+%In the event that an article has loaded a problem package, the
+%editors will have to decide whether to ask the author to change
+%the article so that it doesn't cause a problem or to make the changes
+%themselves or to find a way of fudging things to get it to work. It
+%depends on the level of \LaTeX\ expertise amongst the editors and
+%the time available.
+%
+%Another problem that can arise is when different articles use
+%packages that conflict. For example, one article uses package
+%\styfmt{foo} and another uses package \styfmt{bar}. Each article compiles
+%okay as a stand-alone article, but when combined \styfmt{foo} and
+%\styfmt{bar} conflict. Another problem may occur when articles load the
+%same package but with conflicting package options. To reduce the
+%chance of this occurring, the \clsfmt{jmlr} class loads some commonly
+%used packages. For example, it loads the \sty{algorithm2e}
+%package with the \pkgoptfmt{algo2e} and \pkgoptfmt{ruled} options and
+%provides the \env{algorithm} environment in addition to
+%\sty{algorithm2e}'s \env{algorithm2e} environment.
+%
+%Articles that use different input encodings can also cause a
+%problem. For example, if one article uses \texttt{utf8} and another
+%uses \texttt{latin1}. If the authors have directly entered a
+%diacritic or ligature, such as \'e or \ae, instead of using a
+%\LaTeX\ command, such as \cs{'e} or \cs{ae}, then
+%this will cause an error on compiling the book.\footnote{and may also
+%cause a problem for the editor's text editor.} The choice then is to
+%either change all non-keyboard characters with the appropriate
+%\LaTeX\ commands or to use the \cs{inputencoding} command, supplied
+%by the \sty{inputenc} package, to switch the encoding at the start
+%of each article.
+%
+%Authors who use \cs{nonumber} within an \env{equation} environment
+%can mess up the hyperlinks. Remove \cs{nonumber} and change the
+%equation environment to \cs{[} \ldots\ \cs{]} (or just make it a
+%numbered equation).
+%
+%If the article changes the graphics path using \cs{graphicspath},
+%\clsfmt{jmlrbook} won't find the graphics if the imported articles
+%aren't in the same directory as the book.
+%
+%\subsection{Creating the Book Using \appfmt{makejmlrbook}}
+%\label{sec:makejmlrbook}
+%
+%The \app{makejmlrbook} Perl script is designed to make it
+%easier to produce the print and online versions of the book, as
+%well as producing an HTML index of all the imported articles with
+%links to the abstracts and PDFs of individual articles. Note that
+%for it to work properly, the articles must be imported using
+%\cs{importarticle}, \cs{importpaper} or \cs{importpubpaper}, and
+%the imported articles must use the \clsfmt{jmlr} class.
+%
+%On UNIX style systems, the script can be invoked from a terminal
+%using:
+%\begin{prompt}
+%makejmlrbook \oarg{options} \meta{filename}
+%\end{prompt}
+%If that doesn't work, or you aren't using a UNIX style operating
+%system, the script can be invoked from a terminal or command
+%prompt using:
+%\begin{prompt}
+%perl makejmlrbook \oarg{options} \meta{filename}
+%\end{prompt}
+%The mandatory argument \meta{filename} is the name of the master
+%\TeX\ file containing the book. It must use the \clsfmt{jmlrbook}
+%class. You may omit the \texttt{.tex} extension. For example, if
+%the file is called \texttt{proceedings.tex}, you can call
+%\app{makejmlrbook} as follows:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%perl makejmlrbook proceedings
+%\end{verbatim}
+%This will create the files \texttt{proceedings-print.pdf} (the
+%print version) and \texttt{proceedings-online.pdf} (the online
+%version). It will also create a directory (folder) called
+%\texttt{html} in which the HTML files and individual article PDFs
+%will be placed.
+%
+%The options to \app{makejmlrbook} are as follows:
+%\begin{description}
+%\item[--online] Generate the color on-line version (default).
+%\item[--noonline] Don't generate the color on-line version.
+%\item[--print] Generate the grayscale print version (default).
+%\item[--noprint] Don't generate the grayscale print version.
+%\item[--html] Generate the HTML files and the individual article
+%PDFs (default).
+%\item[--nohtml] Don't generate the HTML files and the individual
+%article PDFs.
+%\item[--logourl \meta{url}] Make the logo on the HTML index page link
+%to \meta{url}.
+%\item[--batchtex] Run \TeX\ in batch mode.
+%\item[--nobatchtex] Don't run \TeX\ in batch mode (default).
+%\item[--quieter] Reduce chatter to STDOUT (doesn't eliminate
+%all messages). This also runs \TeX\ in batch mode.
+%\item[--noquieter] Don't reduce messages to STDOUT (default).
+%\item[--version] Display the version number and exit.
+%\item[--help] List all available options.
+%\end{description}
+%
+%There are also some more advanced options, but these haven't been
+%fully tested:
+%\begin{description}
+%\item[--latexapp \meta{name}] Application used to call \LaTeX.
+%Defaults to \qt{pdflatex}.
+%\item[--latexopt \meta{string}] Options to pass to \LaTeX.
+%\item[--format \meta{string}] Output format (defaults to \qt{pdf}).
+%This may need to be changed if you change the \LaTeX\ application.
+%\item[--bibtexapp \meta{name}] Application use to process the
+%bibliography. Defaults to \qt{bibtex}.
+%\item[--bibtexopt \meta{string}] Options to pass to Bib\TeX.
+%\end{description}
+%
+%\StopEventually{\clearpage\phantomsection
+% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}\PrintIndex
+%}
+%
+%
+%
+%\section{jmlr.cls Code}
+%\iffalse
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*jmlr.cls>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+% This class is based on the \sty{jmlr2e} package but was updated to use
+% \cls{scrartcl} instead of \cls{article} and was modified to make sure
+% it works with \clsfmt{jmlrbook} which uses both \cls{combine} and
+% \sty{hyperref}.
+%
+% Declare class and required TeX format:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{jmlr}[2010/06/17 v1.06 (NLCT) Journal of Machine Learning Research]
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following conditionals are provided to make this class play nicely
+% with combine and aren't required for articles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@openright
+\newif\if@mainmatter \@mainmattertrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifgrayscale}
+% Determine whether to select grayscale alternatives
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ifgrayscale}{
+ \newif\ifgrayscale
+ \grayscalefalse
+}{}
+\DeclareOption{color}{\grayscalefalse
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{color}{xcolor}}
+\DeclareOption{gray}{\grayscaletrue
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{gray}{xcolor}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\iftablecaptiontop}
+% Determine if the table captions should go at the top.
+%\changes{1.07}{2010-06-17}{new}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iftablecaptiontop
+\tablecaptiontoptrue
+\DeclareOption{tablecaptiontop}{\tablecaptiontoptrue}
+\DeclareOption{tablecaptionbottom}{\tablecaptionbottomtrue}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifjmlrhtml}
+% Determine if we are using \app{TeX4ht}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifjmlrhtml
+\jmlrhtmlfalse
+\DeclareOption{html}{\jmlrhtmltrue}
+\DeclareOption{nohtml}{\jmlrhtmlfalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Normal font size (default is 11pt)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pt@size{11pt}
+\DeclareOption{10pt}{\renewcommand{\pt@size}{10}%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+\DeclareOption{11pt}{\renewcommand{\pt@size}{11}%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+\DeclareOption{12pt}{\renewcommand{\pt@size}{12}%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\@jmlrproceedings}
+% The name of the proceedings.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@jmlrproceedings}{Journal of Machine Learning Research}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@jmlrabbrvproceedings}
+% The abbreviated name of the proceedings.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@jmlrabbrvproceedings}{JMLR}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrproceedings}
+% Sets the title and abbreviation of the proceedings
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrproceedings}[2]{%
+ \renewcommand*{\@jmlrabbrvproceedings}{#1}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@jmlrproceedings}{#2}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\nowcp}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrnowcp}{%
+ \jmlrproceedings{JMLR}{Journal of Machine Learning Research}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\wcp}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrwcp}{%
+ \jmlrproceedings{JMLR WC\&P}{JMLR: Workshop and Conference Proceedings}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% This isn't an article for a workshop:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{nowcp}{\jmlrnowcp}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This is an article for a workshop
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{wcp}{\jmlrwcp}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The default paper size is letter, but provide $7 \times 10$in
+% alternative:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifviiXx
+\viiXxfalse
+\DeclareOption{7x10}{\viiXxtrue}
+\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\PassOptionsToPackage{letterpaper}{typearea}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Pass all remaining options to \cls{scrartcl} class:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{scrartcl}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Execute required options:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExecuteOptions{twoside,letterpaper}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Process options:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Load \cls{scrartcl} class
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\LoadClass[pointednumbers,normalheadings]{scrartcl}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Can't use \sty{geometry} package because it doesn't play nicely
+% with the \cls{combine} class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifviiXx
+ \setlength{\paperwidth}{7in}
+ \setlength{\paperheight}{10in}
+ \setlength{\textwidth}{5.25in}
+ \setlength{\textheight}{8.2in}
+ \setlength{\topmargin}{0.4in}
+ \setlength{\headheight}{0.2in}
+ \setlength{\headsep}{0.2in}
+ \setlength{\hoffset}{-1in}
+ \setlength{\voffset}{-1in}
+ \setlength{\evensidemargin}{0.75in}
+ \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{1.0in}
+\else
+ \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.25in}
+ \setlength{\evensidemargin}{0.25in}
+ \setlength{\marginparwidth}{0.07 true in}
+ \setlength{\topmargin}{-0.5in}
+ \addtolength{\headsep}{0.25in}
+ \setlength{\textheight}{8.5 true in}
+ \setlength{\textwidth}{6.0 true in}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Required packages:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{amsmath}
+\RequirePackage{amssymb}
+\RequirePackage{natbib}
+\RequirePackage{graphicx}
+\RequirePackage{url}
+\RequirePackage[x11names]{xcolor}
+\RequirePackage[algo2e,ruled]{algorithm2e}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Float parameters: the following settings were copied from jmlr2e.sty
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\topfraction}{0.95} % let figure take up nearly whole page
+\renewcommand{\textfraction}{0.05} % let figure take up nearly whole page
+% \end{macrocode}
+% widows/orphans
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\widowpenalty=10000\relax
+\clubpenalty=10000\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Set two-sided format
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@twosidetrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Put marginal notes on the outside of the page
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@mparswitchtrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ds@draft{\overfullrule 5pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Use the plainnat bibliography style and set up the required
+% punctuation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bibliographystyle{plainnat}
+\bibpunct{(}{)}{;}{a}{,}{,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\subsection{Sections}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\addtokomafont{section}{\rmfamily\large}
+\addtokomafont{subsection}{\rmfamily\normalsize}
+\addtokomafont{subsubsection}{\rmfamily\mdseries\normalsize\scshape}
+\addtokomafont{paragraph}{\rmfamily\normalsize}
+\addtokomafont{subparagraph}{\rmfamily\itshape\normalsize}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Insert possible prefix to section number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\othersectionlevelsformat}[1]{%
+ \csname pre#1num\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname\autodot\enskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\subsection{Footnotes}
+% This code has been taken from jmlr2e.sty
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{\@setpar{\@@par\@tempdima \hsize
+ \advance\@tempdima-15pt\parshape \@ne 15pt \@tempdima}\par
+ \parindent 2em\noindent \hbox to \z@{\hss{\@thefnmark}. \hfil}#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\subsection{Article abstract}
+% This code has been taken from jmlr2e.sty but with \cs{bf} updated
+% to \cs{bfseries}
+%\begin{environment}{abstract}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifjmlrhtml
+ \renewenvironment{abstract}{\HCode{<h3>}Abstract\HCode{</h3>}}{}%
+\else
+ \renewenvironment{abstract}
+ {\centerline{\large\bfseries Abstract}\vspace{0.7ex}%
+ \bgroup
+ \leftskip 20pt\rightskip 20pt\small\noindent\ignorespaces}%
+ {\par\egroup\vskip 0.25ex}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%\subsection{Keywords}
+% This code has been taken from jmlr2e.sty but with \cs{bf} updated
+% to \cs{bfseries}.
+%\begin{environment}{keywords}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{keywords}
+{\bgroup\leftskip 20pt\rightskip 20pt \small\noindent{\bfseries
+Keywords:} \ignorespaces}%
+{\par\egroup\vskip 0.25ex}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%\subsection{Title Page Information}
+% This code has been taken from jmlr2e.sty.
+%
+% Title stuff, borrowed in part from aaai92.sty
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\aftertitskip \newlength\beforetitskip
+\newlength\interauthorskip \newlength\aftermaketitskip
+% \end{macrocode}
+%% Changeable parameters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\aftertitskip{0.1in plus 0.2in minus 0.2in}
+\setlength\beforetitskip{0.05in plus 0.08in minus 0.08in}
+\setlength\interauthorskip{0.08in plus 0.1in minus 0.1in}
+\setlength\aftermaketitskip{0.3in plus 0.1in minus 0.1in}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\title}
+% Override definition of \cs{title} to allow for an optional
+% argument (short title)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\title}[2][\@title]{%
+ \def\@shorttitle{#1}%
+ \def\@title{#2}%
+ \jmlrtitlehook
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrtitlehook}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrtitlehook}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\author}
+% Override definition of \cs{author} to allow for an optional
+% argument (list of authors for page heading)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\author}[2][]{%
+ \def\@author{#2}%
+ \def\@sauthor{#1}%
+ \ifx\@sauthor\@empty
+ \else
+ \let\@shortauthor\@sauthor
+ \fi
+ \jmlrauthorhook
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrauthorhook}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrauthorhook}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\@shortauthor}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@shortauthor}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\@firstauthor}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@firstauthor}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@firstsurname}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@firstsurname}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrlength}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\jmlrlength
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% overall definition of \cs{maketitle}, \cs{@maketitle} does the real work
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrmaketitle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\jmlrmaketitle{%
+ \jmlrpremaketitlehook
+ \def\@jmlr@authors@sep{, }%
+ \par
+ \begingroup
+ \def\thefootnote{\fnsymbol{footnote}}%
+ \def\@makefnmark{\hbox to 0pt{$^{\@thefnmark}$\hss}}%
+ \@jmlrmaketitle \@thanks
+ \endgroup
+\label{jmlrstart}%
+\ifx\@sauthor\@empty
+ \settowidth{\jmlrlength}{\@evenhead}%
+ \ifdim\jmlrlength>\textwidth
+ \def\@shortauthor{\@firstsurname\space et al.}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\settowidth{\jmlrlength}{\@titlefoot}%
+\ifdim\jmlrlength>\textwidth
+ \def\@jmlrauthors{\@firstauthor\space \emph{et al}}%
+\fi
+\jmlrmaketitlehook
+\thispagestyle{jmlrtps}%
+\setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+\let\maketitle\relax \let\@maketitle\relax
+\gdef\@thanks{}\gdef\@author{}\let\thanks\relax
+\def\@jmlr@authors@sep{ \& }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrmaketitlehook}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrmaketitlehook}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrpremaketitlehook}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrpremaketitlehook}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Provide a different title layout for HTML
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrhtmlmaketitle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\jmlrhtmlmaketitle}{%
+ \ifx\@jmlrauthors\@empty
+ \sbox\jmlrbox{\let\addr\relax\@author}%
+ \fi
+ \noindent\HCode{<h2>}\@title\HCode{</h2>}
+ \noindent\@jmlrauthors
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%%\begin{macro}{\jmlrbox}
+% Define a save box
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newsavebox\jmlrbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\maketitle}
+% If we're creating HTML, set \cs{maketitle} to
+% \cs{jmlrhtmlmaketitle}, otherwise set it to \cs{jmlrmaketitle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifjmlrhtml
+ \let\maketitle\jmlrhtmlmaketitle
+\else
+ \let\maketitle\jmlrmaketitle
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Author and editor information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@startauthor{\noindent \normalsize\bfseries}
+\def\@endauthor{}
+\def\@starteditor{\noindent \small {\bfseries \@edname:~}}
+\def\@endeditor{\normalsize}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Provide hooks to make it easier to adapted with \cls{combine}
+% class.
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrpretitle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\jmlrpretitle{\vskip\beforetitskip\begin{center}\Large\bfseries}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrposttitle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\jmlrposttitle{\par\end{center}\vskip\aftertitskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrpreauthor}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\jmlrpreauthor{%
+\bgroup
+ \def\and{\unskip\enspace{\normalfont and}\enspace}%
+ \def\addr{\small\itshape}%
+ \def\name{\ClassError{jmlr}{Use \string\Name{Author's Name} not \string\name}{}}%
+ \def\email{\ClassError{jmlr}{Use \string\Email{address} not \string\email}{}}%
+ \def\AND{\@endauthor\normalfont\hss \vskip \interauthorskip
+ \@startauthor}%
+ \@startauthor
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@email}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@email{\hfill\small\mdseries\scshape}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@name}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@name{\normalsize\upshape\bfseries}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\@parsename}
+% Parse a name. Appends forename to \cs{@forenames} and stores
+% surname in \cs{@surname}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@parsename#1 #2\@nil{%
+ \def\@tmp{#2}%
+ \ifx\@tmp\@empty
+ \def\@surname{#1}%
+ \let\@nextparsename\@parsenamenoop
+ \else
+ \@getinitial#1-\relax\relax\end
+ \ifx\@forenames\@empty
+ \def\@forenames{#1}%
+ \protected@edef\@initials{\@initial}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@forenames}%
+ \edef\@forenames{\space\the\toks@}%
+ \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@initials}%
+ \protected@edef\@initials{\the\toks@\@initial}%
+ \fi
+ \let\@nextparsename\@parsename
+ \fi
+ \@nextparsename#2\@nil
+}
+\def\@parsenamenoop#1\@nil{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\@getinitial}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@getinitial#1#2-#3#4\end{%
+ \def\@jmlr@tmp{#3}%
+ \if\@jmlr@tmp\relax
+ \def\@initial{#1.}%
+ \else
+ \def\@initial{#1.-#3.}%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\Name}
+% Get the author's name and add surname to \cs{@shortauthors}.
+% (Surnames with \qt{von} parts or with spaces in should be
+% enclosed in braces)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\Name}[1]{%
+ \def\@forenames{}%
+ \def\@surname{}%
+ \@parsename#1 \@nil
+ \ifx\@shortauthor\@empty
+ \ifx\@sauthor\@empty
+ \global\let\@shortauthor\@surname
+ \global\let\@firstsurname\@surname
+ \fi
+ \protected@xdef\@jmlrauthors{\@initials\space\@surname}%
+ \global\let\@firstauthor\@jmlrauthors
+ \else
+ \ifx\@sauthor\@empty
+ \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@shortauthor}%
+ \protected@xdef\@shortauthor{\the\toks@\space\@surname}%
+ \fi
+ \protected@xdef\@jmlrauthors{\@jmlrauthors
+ \noexpand\@jmlr@authors@sep
+ \@initials\space\@surname}%
+ \fi
+ \@name #1%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\Email}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\Email}[1]{{\@email #1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrpostauthor}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\jmlrpostauthor{\@endauthor\egroup
+ \par
+ \vskip \aftermaketitskip
+ \noindent
+ \ifx\@editor\@empty
+ \else
+ \@starteditor \@editor \@endeditor
+ \fi
+ \vskip \aftermaketitskip
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@jmlrmaketitle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@jmlrmaketitle{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth
+ \linewidth\hsize
+ \jmlrpretitle \@title \jmlrposttitle
+ \jmlrpreauthor \@author \jmlrpostauthor
+}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\kernelmachines}
+% Convenience command
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\kernelmachines{(for
+ {\textsc{http://www.kernel-machines.org}})}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\editorname}
+% Label for the editor
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\editorname}{Editor}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\editorsname}
+% Label for the editor
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\editorsname}{Editors}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@edname}
+% This will either be Editor or Editors depending on whether
+% \cs{editor} or \cs{editors} is used. Defaults to \cs{editorname}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@edname\editorname
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@editor}
+% The editor or editors are stored in \cs{@editor}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@editor{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\editor}
+% A single editor
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\editor#1{%
+ \global\let\@edname\editorname
+ \gdef\@editor{#1}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\editors}
+% Multiple editors
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\editors#1{%
+ \global\let\@edname\editorsname
+ \gdef\@editor{#1}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsection{Pagestyles}
+% This is taken from jmlr2e.sty
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\firstpageno}
+% Set the page counter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\firstpageno#1{\setcounter{page}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Label end page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{phantomsection}{}{\phantomsection}%
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabelname{end of \@shorttitle}%
+ \label{jmlrend}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\@titlefoot}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@titlefoot}{\scriptsize\copyright\space\@jmlryear
+ \space\@jmlrauthors.\hfill}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\ps@jmlrtps}
+% Title page style
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\ps@jmlrtps{%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \def\@oddhead{\scriptsize \@jmlrproceedings
+ \ifx\@jmlrvolume\@empty\else\space\@jmlrvolume\fi
+ \ifx\@jmlryear\@empty\else\space(\@jmlryear)\fi
+ \ifx\@jmlrpages\@empty\else\space\@jmlrpages\fi
+ \hfill
+ \ifx\@jmlrworkshop\@empty
+ \ifx\@jmlrsubmitted\@empty
+ \else
+ Submitted \@jmlrsubmitted
+ \ifx\@jmlrpublished\@empty\else;\fi
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@jmlrpublished\@empty
+ \else
+ \space Published \@jmlrpublished
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \space\@jmlrworkshop
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+ \def\@oddfoot{\@titlefoot}%
+ \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\ps@jmlrps}
+% Page style for subsequent pages
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@jmlrps{%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \def\@oddhead{\hfill {\small\scshape \@shorttitle} \hfill}%
+ \def\@oddfoot{\hfill \small\rmfamily \thepage \hfill}%
+ \def\@evenhead{\hfill {\small\scshape \@shortauthor} \hfill}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{\hfill \small\rmfamily \thepage \hfill}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Set the page style:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pagestyle{jmlrps}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Set the heading information:
+%\begin{macro}{\@jmlrvolume}
+% The volume number:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@jmlrvolume\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrvolume}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrvolume}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrvolume}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@jmlrissue}
+% The issue number:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@jmlrissue\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrissue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrissue}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrissue}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@jmlryear}
+% The year of publication:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@jmlryear\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlryear}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlryear}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlryear}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@jmlrpages}
+% The page range:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\@jmlrpages{\pageref{jmlrstart}--\pageref{jmlrend}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrpages}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrpages}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrpages}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@jmlrsubmitted}
+% The date the article was submitted:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@jmlrsubmitted\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrsubmitted}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrsubmitted}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrsubmitted}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@jmlrpublished}
+% The date the article was published:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@jmlrpublished\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrpublished}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrpublished}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrpublished}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@jmlrworkshop}
+% The name of the workshop:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@jmlrworkshop\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrworkshop}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrworkshop}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrworkshop}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@jmlrauthors}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@jmlrauthors}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrauthors}
+% This is provided in case \cs{Name} doesn't set \cs{@jmlrauthors}
+% correctly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrauthors}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrauthors}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%
+%\subsection{Miscellany}
+% This code was taken from jmlr2e.sty.
+
+% Define macros for figure captions and table titles
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\figurecaption#1#2{\noindent\hangindent 40pt
+ \hbox to 36pt {\small\slshape #1 \hfil}
+ \ignorespaces {\small #2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Figurecenter prints the caption title centered.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\figurecenter#1#2{\centerline{{\slshape #1} #2}}
+\def\figurecenter#1#2{\centerline{{\small\slshape #1} {\small #2}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Allow ``hanging indents'' in long captions
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+ \vskip 10pt
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1: #2}%
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize % IF longer than one line:
+ \begin{list}{#1:}{%
+ \settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1:}
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}
+ \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}
+ }\item #2 \end{list}\par % Output in quote mode
+ \else % ELSE center.
+ \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Define strut macros for skipping spaces above and below text in a
+% tabular environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\abovestrut#1{\rule[0in]{0in}{#1}\ignorespaces}
+\def\belowstrut#1{\rule[-#1]{0in}{#1}\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\acks}
+% Acknowledgments
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\acks#1{\section*{Acknowledgments}#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Research Note
+%\begin{macro}{\researchnote}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\researchnote#1{\noindent {\LARGE\itshape Research Note} #1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\set}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\set}[1]{\ensuremath{\mathcal{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Convenient macros for cross-referencing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@jmlr@reflistsep}{, }
+\newcommand*{\@jmlr@reflistlastsep}{ and }
+\newcommand*{\sectionrefname}{Section}
+\newcommand*{\sectionsrefname}{Sections}
+\newcommand*{\equationrefname}{Equation}
+\newcommand*{\equationsrefname}{Equations}
+\newcommand*{\tablerefname}{Table}
+\newcommand*{\tablesrefname}{Tables}
+\newcommand*{\figurerefname}{Figure}
+\newcommand*{\figuresrefname}{Figures}
+\newcommand*{\algorithmrefname}{Algorithm}
+\newcommand*{\algorithmsrefname}{Algorithms}
+\newcommand*{\theoremrefname}{Theorem}
+\newcommand*{\theoremsrefname}{Theorems}
+\newcommand*{\lemmarefname}{Lemma}
+\newcommand*{\lemmasrefname}{Lemmas}
+\newcommand*{\remarkrefname}{Remark}
+\newcommand*{\remarksrefname}{Remarks}
+\newcommand*{\corollaryrefname}{Corollary}
+\newcommand*{\corollarysrefname}{Corollaries}
+\newcommand*{\definitionrefname}{Definition}
+\newcommand*{\definitionsrefname}{Definitions}
+\newcommand*{\conjecturerefname}{Conjecture}
+\newcommand*{\conjecturesrefname}{Conjectures}
+\newcommand*{\axiomrefname}{Axiom}
+\newcommand*{\axiomsrefname}{Axioms}
+\newcommand*{\examplerefname}{Example}
+\newcommand*{\examplesrefname}{Examples}
+\newcommand*{\appendixrefname}{Appendix}
+\newcommand*{\appendixsrefname}{Appendices}
+\newcommand*{\partrefname}{Part}
+\newcommand*{\partsrefname}{Parts}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\objectref}
+% Cross-reference a particular structural element. The first
+% argument is the list of labels, the second argument is a
+% control sequence containing the singular tag, the third
+% argument a control sequence containing the plural tag,
+% the fourth argument is text to go before the reference number,
+% e.g.\ an opening bracket, and the fifth argument is text
+% to go after the reference number, e.g.\ a closing bracket.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\objectref}[5]{%
+ \let\@objectname\@empty
+ \def\@objectref{}%
+ \let\@prevsep\@empty
+ \@for\@thislabel:=#1\do{%
+ \toks@{\@prevsep}%
+ \protected@edef\@objectref{\@objectref\the\toks@
+ #4\ref{\@thislabel}#5}%
+ \ifx\@objectname\@empty
+ \let\@objectname#2% singular tag
+ \else
+ \let\@objectname#3% plural tag
+ \let\@prevsep\@jmlr@reflistsep
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \ifx\@objectname#3% plural tag
+ \let\@prevsep\@jmlr@reflistlastsep
+ \fi
+ \@objectname~\@objectref
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\sectionref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\sectionref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\sectionrefname}{\sectionsrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\equationref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\equationref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\equationrefname}{\equationsrefname}()}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\tableref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\tableref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\tablerefname}{\tablesrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\figureref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\figureref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\figurerefname}{\figuresrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\algorithmref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\algorithmref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\algorithmrefname}{\algorithmsrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\theoremmref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\theoremref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\theoremrefname}{\theoremsrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\lemmaref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\lemmaref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\lemmarefname}{\lemmasrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\remarkref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\remarkref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\remarkrefname}{\remarksrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\corollaryref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\corollaryref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\corollaryrefname}{\corollarysrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\definitionref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\definitionref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\definitionrefname}{\definitionsrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\conjectureref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\conjectureref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\conjecturerefname}{\conjecturesrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\axiomref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\axiomref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\axiomrefname}{\axiomsrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\exampleref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\exampleref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\examplerefname}{\examplesrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\appendixref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\appendixref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\appendixrefname}{\appendixsrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\partref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\partref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\partrefname}{\partsrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\floatconts}
+% The first argument is the label, the second argument contains the
+% caption (using \cs{caption}) and the third argument is the
+% contents of the float
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\floatconts}[3]{%
+ \@ifundefined{\@captype conts}{\tableconts{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+ {\csname\@captype conts\endcsname{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\tableconts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tableconts}[3]{%
+ \iftablecaptiontop
+ #2\label{#1}\vskip\baselineskip
+ {\centering #3\par}%
+ \else
+ {\centering #3\par}%
+ \vskip\baselineskip
+ #2\label{#1}%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\figureconts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\figureconts}[3]{%
+ {\centering #3\par}%
+ \vskip\baselineskip
+ #2\label{#1}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\includeteximage}
+% Provide a command like \cs{includegraphics} that includes a
+% file containing \LaTeX\ picture code (e.g.\ \sty{pgf}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\includeteximage}[2][]{%
+ \def\Gin@req@sizes{%
+ \Gin@req@height\Gin@nat@height
+ \Gin@req@width\Gin@nat@width}%
+ \begingroup
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \let\input@path\Ginput@path
+ \toks@{\InputIfFileExists{#2}{}{\@warning{File `#1' not found}}}%
+ \setkeys{Gin}{#1}%
+ \Gin@esetsize
+ \the\toks@
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\ifprint}
+% Provide command to check if this is the printed greyscale
+% version or the online colour version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\ifprint}[2]{\ifgrayscale#1\else#2\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Modify \cs{includegraphics} so that it can pick up the greyscale
+% version of images if this is the print version.
+%% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifjmlrhtml
+\else
+ \let\@org@Ginclude@graphics\Ginclude@graphics
+ \def\Ginclude@graphics#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\input@path\Ginput@path
+ \ifprint{\filename@parse{#1-gray}}{\filename@parse{#1}}%
+ \ifx\filename@ext\relax
+ \@for\Gin@temp:=\Gin@extensions\do{%
+ \ifx\Gin@ext\relax
+ \Gin@getbase\Gin@temp
+ \fi}%
+ \else
+ \ifprint{\filename@parse{#1}}{}%
+ \Gin@getbase{\Gin@sepdefault\filename@ext}%
+ \ifx\Gin@ext\relax
+ \@warning{File `#1' not found}%
+ \def\Gin@base{\filename@area\filename@base}%
+ \edef\Gin@ext{\Gin@sepdefault\filename@ext}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifx\Gin@ext\relax
+ \ifprint{\@org@Ginclude@graphics{#1}}%
+ {%
+ \@latex@error{File `#1' not found}%
+ {I could not locate the file with any of these extensions:^^J%
+ \Gin@extensions^^J\@ehc}%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \@ifundefined{Gin@rule@\Gin@ext}%
+ {\ifx\Gin@rule@*\@undefined
+ \@latex@error{Unknown graphics extension: \Gin@ext}\@ehc
+ \else
+ \expandafter\Gin@setfile\Gin@rule@*{\Gin@base\Gin@ext}%
+ \fi}%
+ {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\Gin@setfile
+ \csname Gin@rule@\Gin@ext\endcsname{\Gin@base\Gin@ext}}%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \env{algorithm} environment should float like a figure or table.
+% It should use the same counter as the \env{algorithm2e} environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{algorithm}[1][htbp]%
+{%
+ \@algocf@init%
+ \@algocf@init@caption
+ \begin{algocf}[#1]%
+ \@algocf@start%
+}%
+{%
+ \@algocf@finish%
+ \@algocf@term@caption
+ \end{algocf}%
+ \@algocf@term
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Set the algorithm margin to zero.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\algomargin{0pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\artappendix}
+% Switch to appendices in an article
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\artappendix}{\par
+ \setcounter{section}{0}
+ \setcounter{subsection}{0}
+ \def\thesection{\Alph{section}}
+ \def\presectionnum{Appendix~}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% The default assumes a stand-alone article.
+%\begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\appendix\artappendix
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsection{Proofs and Theorems}
+% This code is taken from jmlr2e.sty
+%\begin{macro}{\BlackBox}
+% End of proof marker
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BlackBox}{\rule{1.5ex}{1.5ex}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{environment}{proof}
+% Proof environment
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{proof}{\par\noindent{\bfseries\upshape
+ Proof\ }}{\hfill\BlackBox\\[2mm]}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%\begin{environment}{example}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtheorem{example}{Example}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%\begin{environment}{theorem}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%\begin{environment}{lemma}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%\begin{environment}{proposition}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtheorem{proposition}[theorem]{Proposition}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%\begin{environment}{remark}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtheorem{remark}[theorem]{Remark}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%\begin{environment}{corollary}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%\begin{environment}{definition}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtheorem{definition}[theorem]{Definition}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%\begin{environment}{conjecture}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtheorem{conjecture}[theorem]{Conjecture}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%\begin{environment}{axiom}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtheorem{axiom}[theorem]{Axiom}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\vec}
+% Redefine \cs{vec} to produce a bold symbol
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\vec}[1]{\boldsymbol{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{environment}{enumerate*}
+% Define an enumerate style environment where the nested environments
+% all use the same counter. It uses the enumi counter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{enumerate*}%
+{%
+ \ifnum\@enumdepth=0\relax
+ \setcounter{enumi}{0}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\@enumdepth>\thr@@
+ \@toodeep
+ \else
+ \advance\@enumdepth\@ne
+ \def\@enumctr{enumi}%
+ \list
+ {\labelenumi}%
+ {\@nmbrlisttrue\def\@listctr{enumi}%
+ \def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}%
+ \fi
+}%
+{\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%
+%\begin{environment}{altdescription}
+% Define a description like environment where the indent is
+% computed from the widest label. The optional argument is
+% the widest label.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{altdescription}[1]%
+ {\list{}%
+ {%
+ \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\altdescriptionlabel{#1}}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{15pt}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{2\labelsep}%
+ \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+ \setlength{\rightmargin}{\labelsep}%
+ \let\makelabel\altdescriptionlabel
+ }%
+ }%
+ {\endlist}
+
+\newcommand*{\altdescriptionlabel}[1]{\normalfont\bfseries #1\hfill}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\mailto}
+% Syntax: \cs{mailto}\marg{address}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\mailto}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% The \sty{subfig} package breaks jmlrbook.cls, so define \ics{subfig}
+% here. (This is fairly primitive.)
+%\begin{macro}{\c@subfigure}
+% Define subfigure counter:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{subfigure}
+\@addtoreset{subfigure}{figure}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\thesubfigure}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\thesubfigure}{\alph{subfigure}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\p@subfigure}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\p@subfigure}{\expandafter\@p@subfigure}
+\newcommand*{\@p@subfigure}[1]{%
+ \protect\@subfigurelabel{\thefigure}{\thesubfigure}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@subfigurelabel}
+% Define how label appears.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\@subfigurelabel[2]{#1\subfigurelabel{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\subfigref}
+% Reference the sub-figure without including the figure number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\@subfigref[1]{%
+ {%
+ \def\@subfigurelabel##1##2{\subfigurelabel{##2}}%
+ \ref{#1}%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\subfigref}[1]{%
+ \let\@objectname\@empty
+ \def\@objectref{}%
+ \let\@prevsep\@empty
+ \@for\@thislabel:=#1\do{%
+ \toks@{\@prevsep}%
+ \protected@edef\@objectref{\@objectref\the\toks@
+ \protect\@subfigref{\@thislabel}}%
+ \ifx\@objectname\@empty
+ \let\@objectname\@nil
+ \else
+ \let\@objectname\relax
+ \let\@prevsep\@jmlr@reflistsep
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \ifx\@objectname\relax
+ \let\@prevsep\@jmlr@reflistlastsep
+ \fi
+ \@objectref
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\subfigurelabel}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\subfigurelabel}[1]{(\emph{#1})}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\subfigure}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\subfigure}[1][]{%
+ \bgroup
+ \def\@subfigcap{#1}%
+ \@subfigure
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\@subfigure}[2][b]{%
+ \advance\c@figure by 1\relax
+ \refstepcounter{subfigure}%
+ \begin{tabular}[#1]{@{}c@{}}%
+ #2\\
+ \subfigurelabel{\thesubfigure}%
+ \ifx\@subfigcap\@empty
+ \else
+ \space\@subfigcap
+ \fi
+ \end{tabular}
+ \egroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Sub-tables:
+%\begin{macro}{\c@subtable}
+% Define subtable counter:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{subtable}
+\@addtoreset{subtable}{table}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\thesubtable}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\thesubtable}{\alph{subtable}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\p@subtable}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\p@subtable}{\expandafter\@p@subtable}
+\newcommand*{\@p@subtable}[1]{%
+ \protect\@subtablelabel{\thetable}{\thesubtable}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@subtablelabel}
+% Define how label appears.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\@subtablelabel[2]{#1\subtablelabel{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\subtabref}
+% Reference the sub-table without including the table number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\@subtabref[1]{%
+ {%
+ \def\@subtablelabel##1##2{\subtablelabel{##2}}%
+ \ref{#1}%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\subtabref}[1]{%
+ \let\@objectname\@empty
+ \def\@objectref{}%
+ \let\@prevsep\@empty
+ \@for\@thislabel:=#1\do{%
+ \toks@{\@prevsep}%
+ \protected@edef\@objectref{\@objectref\the\toks@
+ \protect\@subtabref{\@thislabel}}%
+ \ifx\@objectname\@empty
+ \let\@objectname\@nil
+ \else
+ \let\@objectname\relax
+ \let\@prevsep\@jmlr@reflistsep
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \ifx\@objectname\relax
+ \let\@prevsep\@jmlr@reflistlastsep
+ \fi
+ \@objectref
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\subtablelabel}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\subtablelabel}[1]{(\emph{#1})}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\subtable}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\subtable}[1][]{%
+ \def\@subtabcap{#1}%
+ \@subtable
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\@subtable}[2][t]{%
+ \refstepcounter{subtable}%
+ \begin{tabular}[#1]{@{}c@{}}%
+ \subtablelabel{\thesubtable}%
+ \ifx\@subtabcap\@empty
+ \else
+ \space\@subtabcap
+ \fi
+ \\#2%
+ \end{tabular}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsection{Compatibility with combine.cls}
+%
+% Define chapters to make this class play nicely with \cls{combine}.
+% These definitions are just copied from book.cls
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{chapter}
+\renewcommand\thechapter{\@arabic\c@chapter}
+\newcommand\@chapapp{\chaptername}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Add sections to the chapter reset.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@addtoreset{section}{chapter}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\chaptermark}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\chaptermark[1]{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Chapters should only be defined when we're combining documents
+% into a book.
+%\begin{macro}{\bookchapter}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\bookchapter{%
+ \if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \global\@topnum\z@
+ \@afterindentfalse
+ \secdef\@chapter\@schapter}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\artchapter}
+% Disable chapters for articles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\artchapter{%
+ \ClassError{jmlrwcp}{Chapters not permitted in articles}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% The default assumes a stand-alone document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\chapter\artchapter
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Label for the chapter entries in the toc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@chaptoclabel{chapter}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\@chapter}
+% Numbered chapters
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \if@mainmatter
+ \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+ \typeout{\@chapapp\space\thechapter.}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{\@chaptoclabel}%
+ {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1}%
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{\@chaptoclabel}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{\@chaptoclabel}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \chaptermark{#1}%
+ \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+ \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
+ \else
+ \@makechapterhead{#2}%
+ \@afterheading
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\chaptertitleformat}
+% Formats the chapter title
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\chaptertitleformat}[1]{%
+ \Huge\bfseries#1%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\chapternumberformat}
+% Formats the chapter number
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\chapternumberformat}[1]{%
+ \huge\bfseries \@chapapp\space#1\par\nobreak
+ \vskip 20\p@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\chapterformat}
+% Overall format for chapter headings
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\chapterformat}{\raggedright}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\postchapterskip}
+% Vertical gap after chapter heading
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\postchapterskip
+\setlength\postchapterskip{40pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\prechapterskip}
+% Vertical gap before chapter heading
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\prechapterskip
+\setlength\prechapterskip{50pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@makechapterhead}
+% Chapter heading for numbered chapters
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makechapterhead#1{%
+ \null\vskip\prechapterskip
+ {\parindent \z@ \normalfont\chapterformat
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \if@mainmatter
+ \chapternumberformat{\thechapter}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \chaptertitleformat{#1}\par\nobreak
+ \vskip \postchapterskip
+ }}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@schapter}
+% Unnumbered chapters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@schapter#1{\if@twocolumn
+ \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]%
+ \else
+ \@makeschapterhead{#1}%
+ \@afterheading
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@makeschapterhead}
+% Layout for unnumbered chapter headings
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
+ \vspace*{\prechapterskip}%
+ {\parindent \z@
+ \normalfont\chapterformat
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \chaptertitleformat{#1}\par\nobreak
+ \vskip \postchapterskip
+ }}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
+% Format for chapter entry in toc
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\l@chapter[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \large\bfseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\l@appendix}
+% Make appendix entries in the toc the same as that for chapters
+% by default
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\l@appendix\l@chapter
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\chaptername}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\chaptername{Chapter}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\frontmatter}
+% Start the front matter (in book)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\frontmatter{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \@mainmatterfalse
+ \pagenumbering{roman}%
+ \morefrontmatter
+}
+\newcommand\morefrontmatter{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\mainmatter}
+% Start the main matter (in book)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\mainmatter{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \@mainmattertrue
+ \pagenumbering{arabic}%
+ \moremainmatter
+}
+\newcommand\moremainmatter{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\backmatter}
+% Start the back matter (in book)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\backmatter{%
+ \if@openright
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ \@mainmatterfalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\booktableofcontents}
+% This is for the main table of contents when using
+% the combine class file, and is not for use in individual
+% articles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\booktableofcontents\tableofcontents
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\arttableofcontents}
+% Table of contents for individual articles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\arttableofcontents\tableofcontents
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\artpart}
+% A part in an article
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\artpart}{%
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode\fi
+ \par
+ \addvspace{4ex}%
+ \@afterindentfalse
+ \secdef\@artpart\@sartpart
+}
+\let\@artpart\@part
+\let\@sartpart\@spart
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\bookpart}
+% A part in a book forming a collection of articles
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\bookpart{%
+ \if@openright
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \onecolumn
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+ \preparthook
+ \secdef\@bookpart\@sbookpart}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\parttitleformat}
+% Format of the title for a part (in a book)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\parttitleformat}[1]{%
+ \Huge\bfseries#1%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\partnumberformat}
+% Format of the part number (in a book)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\partnumberformat}[1]{%
+ \Huge\bfseries \partname\nobreakspace#1\par\nobreak
+ \vskip 20\p@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\preparthook}
+% Hook at the start of a part (in a book)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\preparthook}{\null\vfil}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\partformat}
+% Overall format of part
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\partformat}{\centering}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@bookpart}
+% Numbered book part format
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@bookpart[#1]#2{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \refstepcounter{part}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\protect\numberline{\thepart}#1}%
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \markboth{}{}%
+ {\interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont\partformat
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \partnumberformat{\thepart}%
+ \fi
+ \parttitleformat{#2}\par}%
+ \postparthook}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@sbookpart}
+% Unnumbered book part format
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@sbookpart#1{%
+ {\interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont\partformat
+ \parttitleformat{#1}\par}%
+ \postparthook}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\postparthook}
+% Hook after part heading
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\postparthook{\vfil\newpage
+ \if@twoside
+ \if@openright
+ \null
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \newpage
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@tempswa
+ \twocolumn
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\bookappendix}
+% Switch to appendices in book
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\bookappendix{\par
+ \setcounter{table}{0}%
+ \setcounter{figure}{0}%
+ \zeroextracounters
+ \par
+ \gdef\theHchapter{\Alph {chapter}}%
+ \xdef\Hy@chapapp{\Hy@appendixstring}%
+ \setcounter{chapter}{0}%
+ \setcounter{section}{0}%
+ \gdef\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
+ \gdef\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}%
+ \csname appendixmore\endcsname
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Define commands to switch between book/article modes
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrbookcommands}
+% Switch to book commands
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrbookcommands}{%
+ \let\part\bookpart
+ \let\chapter\bookchapter
+ \let\appendix\bookappendix
+ \let\tableofcontents\booktableofcontents
+ \def\thesection{\thechapter.\arabic{section}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlarticlecommands}
+% Switch to article commands
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrarticlecommands}{%
+ \let\part\artpart
+ \let\chapter\artchapter
+ \let\appendix\artappendix
+ \let\tableofcontents\arttableofcontents
+ \def\thesection{\arabic{section}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Check for packages that are known to cause problems when
+% combining articles into a book.
+%\begin{macro}{\@jmlr@check@packages}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@jmlr@check@packages}{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{epsfig}{%
+ \ClassError{jmlr}{Obsolete package `epsfig' detected.
+ \MessageBreak
+ Please use \string\includegraphics\space to include images
+ instead}{}}{}%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{psfig}{%
+ \ClassError{jmlr}{Obsolete package `psfig' detected.
+ \MessageBreak
+ Please use \string\includegraphics\space to include images
+ instead}{}}{}%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{subfig}{%
+ \ClassError{jmlr}{Package `subfig' detected.\MessageBreak
+ This will cause a conflict if the article is incorporated
+ \MessageBreak
+ into a book using jmlbook.cls.
+ \MessageBreak
+ Please use \string\subfigure\space and
+ \string\subtable\space instead}{}}{}%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{theorem}{%
+ \ClassError{jmlr}{Package `theorem' detected.\MessageBreak
+ This can cause a conflict with other packages used by jmlr}{}}{}%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{pdfpages}{Package `pdfpages' detected.\MessageBreak
+ This can cause a problem for jmlrbook.}{}%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{geometry}{Package `geometry' detected.\MessageBreak
+ This can cause a problem for jmlrbook.}{}%
+}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\@jmlr@check@packages
+\let\@jmlr@check@packages\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\jmlrSuppressPackageChecks}
+% Don't check for potentially problematic packages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrSuppressPackageChecks}{%
+ \let\@jmlr@check@packages\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\iffalse
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</jmlr.cls>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%\iffalse
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*jmlrbook.cls>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%\section{jmlrbook.cls Code}
+% Class file for books composed of articles using the \clsfmt{jmlr} class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Declare class:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesClass{jmlrbook}[2010/06/17 v1.06 (NLCT) JMLR Book Style]
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Need \sty{xkeyval} package to have key=value class options
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{xkeyval}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some packages need to be loaded before \sty{hyperref} so provide a
+% hook to do this:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@prehyperref}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Option to add stuff before \sty{hyperref} is loaded:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{jmlrbook.cls}{prehyperref}{%
+ \renewcommand*{\@prehyperref}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Determine whether to select color or grayscale
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifgrayscale
+\grayscalefalse
+\DeclareOptionX{color}{\grayscalefalse}
+\DeclareOptionX{gray}{\grayscaletrue}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Pass \clsopt{html} and \clsopt{nohtml} to \clsfmt{jmlr}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{html}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{jmlr}}
+\DeclareOptionX{nohtml}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{jmlr}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Pass \clsopt{wcp} and \clsopt{nowcp} options to \clsfmt{jmlr}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{wcp}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{jmlr}}
+\DeclareOptionX{nowcp}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{jmlr}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Pass \clsopt{tablecaptiontop} and \clsopt{tablecaptionbottom} options
+% to \clsfmt{jmlr}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{tablecaptiontop}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{jmlr}}
+\DeclareOptionX{tablecaptionbottom}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{jmlr}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Process options
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptionsX
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If \ics{jmlrgrayscale} has been defined, let it override the
+% class options. If it is defined, it should be set to 0 for the
+% online version and any other number for the grayscale print
+% version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{jmlrgrayscale}{}%
+{%
+ \ifnum\jmlrgrayscale=0\relax
+ \grayscalefalse
+ \else
+ \grayscaletrue
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Load \cls{combine} class. This requires a little bit of trickery.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@org@LoadClass\LoadClass
+\def\LoadClass#1{\let\LoadClass\@org@LoadClass\@org@LoadClass{jmlr}}
+\@org@LoadClass{combine}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Requires \sty{combnat} to work with \sty{natbib}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{combnat}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Need to apply a patch to \sty{combnat} (this has now been fixed
+% in \sty{combnat}, but user might be using an old version):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\c@laNAT@parse[1]{{%
+ \let\protect=\@unexpandable@protect\let~\relax
+ \let\active@prefix=\@gobble
+ \xdef\NAT@temp{\csname b@#1\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}}%
+ \expandafter\NAT@split\NAT@temp?????@@%
+ \expandafter\NAT@parse@date\NAT@date??????@@%
+ \ifciteindex\NAT@index\fi}
+
+\renewcommand\c@lbNAT@parse[1]{{%
+ \let\protect=\@unexpandable@protect\let~\relax
+ \let\active@prefix=\@gobble
+ \xdef\NAT@temp{\csname B?\jobname?@#1\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}}%
+ \expandafter\NAT@split\NAT@temp?????@@%
+ \expandafter\NAT@parse@date\NAT@date??????@@%
+ \ifciteindex\NAT@index\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Requires double spacing for the title page
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{setspace}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Do all the stuff that needs to be done before \sty{hyperref} is
+% loaded:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@prehyperref
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Load \sty{hyperref}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage[colorlinks,
+ linkcolor=blue,
+ citecolor=blue,
+ urlcolor=magenta,
+ linktocpage,
+ plainpages=false]{hyperref}
+\usepackage{nameref}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If this is the print version, need to disable the hyperlinks
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifgrayscale
+ \hypersetup{draft}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Switch on two-side mode
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@twosidetrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Start new chapters on the right hand page:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@openright
+\@openrighttrue
+\newif\if@mainmatter
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define commands that affect the formatting:
+%\begin{macro}{\pagerule}
+% Draw line across the text block.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\pagerule}[1][0pt]{\par\noindent
+ \rule[#1]{\linewidth}{2pt}\par}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Cross-reference chapters:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\chapterrefname}{Chapter}
+\newcommand*{\chaptersrefname}{Chapters}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\chapterref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\chapterref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\chapterrefname}{\chaptersrefname}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Cross-referencing imported articles:
+%\begin{macro}{\articlepageref}
+% Page number of start of article
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\articlepageref}[1]{%
+ \pageref{#1jmlrstart}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\articlepagesref}
+% Page range of article
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\articlepagesref}[1]{%
+ \pageref{#1jmlrstart}--\pageref{#1jmlrend}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@articlepagesref}
+% Page range of article for use within the article
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@articlepagesref}{%
+ \pageref{jmlrstart}--\pageref{jmlrend}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\articletitleref}
+% Reference the short title of an imported article
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\articletitleref}[1]{\nameref{#1jmlrstart}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\articleauthorref}
+% Reference the authors of an imported article
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\articleauthorref}[1]{%
+ \@ifundefined{@jmlr@author@#1}%
+ {%
+ \ClassWarning{jmlrbook}{Label `#1' undefined}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@nameuse{@jmlr@author@#1}%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Part labels
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@parttoclabel}{part}
+\newcommand*{\@partapp}{\partname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Extra title information
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*\jmlrtitlehook{%
+ \hypersetup{pdftitle={\@shorttitle}}%
+ \let\jmlrtitlehook\relax
+}
+\renewcommand*\jmlrauthorhook{%
+ \ifx\@sauthor\@empty
+ \hypersetup{pdfauthor={\@author}}%
+ \else
+ \hypersetup{pdfauthor={\@sauthor}}%
+ \fi
+ \let\jmlrauthorhook\relax
+ \let\@shortauthor\@empty
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\volume}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@volume}{\@jmlrvolume}
+\newcommand*{\volume}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@volume}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\issue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@issue}{\@jmlrissue}
+\newcommand*{\issue}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@issue}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\thejmlrworkshop}
+% Provided in the event that it's required for the title page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\thejmlrworkshop}{\@jmlrworkshop}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\team}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@team}{}
+\newcommand*{\team}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@team}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@productioneditorname}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@productioneditorname}{Production Editor}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\productioneditor}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@productioneditor}{}
+\newcommand*{\productioneditor}[1]{%
+ \renewcommand*{\@productioneditor}{#1}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@productioneditorname}{Production Editor}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\productioneditors}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\productioneditors}[1]{%
+ \renewcommand*{\@productioneditor}{#1}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@productioneditorname}{Production Editors}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\logo}
+% Title page image
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@logo}{}
+\newcommand*{\logo}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@logo}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Set article title
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\c@lbmaketitle{\jmlrmaketitle}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The book's title:
+%\begin{macro}{\maintitle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\maintitle}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Make it easier to modify the book's title page:
+%\begin{macro}{\SetTitleElement}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\SetTitleElement}[3]{%
+ {%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname @#1\endcsname\@empty
+ \else
+ #2\csname @#1\endcsname#3%
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\IfTitleElement}
+% Determine if the given element has been set:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\IfTitleElement}[3]{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname @#1\endcsname\@empty
+ #2%
+ \else
+ #3%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\titlebody}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\titlebody}{%
+ \SetTitleElement{title}{\maintitlefont}{\postmaintitle}%
+ \SetTitleElement{volume}{\mainvolumefont}{\postmainvolume}%
+ \SetTitleElement{subtitle}{\mainsubtitlefont}{\postmainsubtitle}%
+ \SetTitleElement{logo}{\mainlogofont}{\postmainlogo}%
+ \SetTitleElement{team}{\mainteamfont}{\postmainteam}%
+ \SetTitleElement{author}{\mainauthorfont}{\postmainauthor}%
+ \SetTitleElement{productioneditor}{\mainproductioneditorfont}%
+ {\postmainproductioneditor}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\c@lamaketitle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifjmlrhtml
+ \renewcommand{\c@lamaketitle}{%
+ \HCode{<table cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2" border="0" width="100\%">}%
+ \HCode{<tbody><tr><td valign="top">}%
+ \HCode{<h1>}%
+ \@title\newline
+ \ifx\@volume\@empty
+ \else
+ Volume \@volume
+ \ifx\@subtitle\@empty\else: \fi
+ \fi
+ \@subtitle
+ \HCode{</h1>}%
+ \newline
+ \textbf{Editors: \@author}
+ \HCode{</td><td valign="top">}%
+ \@logo
+ \HCode{</td></tr></tbody></table>}%
+ \let\maintitle\@title
+ }
+\else
+ \renewcommand{\c@lamaketitle}{%
+ \pagenumbering{alph}%
+ \pagestyle{empty}%
+ \begin{titlepage}%
+ \let\footnotesize\small
+ \let\footnoterule\relax
+ \let\footnote\thanks
+ \titlebody
+ \par
+ \@thanks
+ \end{titlepage}%
+ \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+ \let\maintitle\@title
+ \c@lmtitlempty
+ }
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\maintitlefont}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\maintitlefont}{%
+ \null\vskip15pt\relax\par
+ \flushleft\Huge\bfseries\noindent}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\postmaintitle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\postmaintitle}{%
+ \par\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\mainvolumefont}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mainvolumefont}{%
+ \flushleft\noindent\LARGE\bfseries Volume
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\postmainvolume}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\postmainvolume}{%
+ \IfTitleElement{subtitle}{}{:}\par\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\mainissuefont}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mainissuefont}{%
+ \flushleft\noindent\LARGE\bfseries Issue
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\postmainissue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\postmainissue}{%
+ \par\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\mainsubtitlefont}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mainsubtitlefont}{%
+ \flushleft\LARGE\bfseries\noindent}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\postmainsubtitle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\postmainsubtitle}{\par}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\mainlogofont}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mainlogofont}{%
+ \vfill
+ \begin{center}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\postmainlogo}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\postmainlogo}{\end{center}\vfill\par}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\mainteamfont}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mainteamfont}{\flushleft\bfseries\Large\noindent}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\postmainteam}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\postmainteam}{\par}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\mainauthorfont}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\mainauthorfont}{%
+ \flushleft\Large\itshape\doublespacing\noindent}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\postmainauthor}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\postmainauthor}{%
+\par}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\mainproductioneditorfont}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mainproductioneditorfont}{%
+ \flushleft\Large\noindent \@productioneditorname: \itshape}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\postmainproductioneditor}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\postmainproductioneditor}{\par}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\maindatefont}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\maindatefont}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\postmaindate}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\postmaindate}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{environment}{signoff}
+% Editorial team listed at the end of a preface etc. The mandatory
+% argument is the date, the optional argument is the team title.
+% Each editor should be separated with \ics{Editor}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{signoff}[2][The Editorial Team]{%
+ \def\Editor##1{\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}%
+ ##1%
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \par\vskip\baselineskip\noindent\ignorespaces
+ }%
+ \def\@editorialteam{#1}%
+ \def\@signoffdate{#2}%
+ \par\vskip\baselineskip\noindent
+ \ifx\@signoffdate\@empty
+ \else
+ \emph{\@signoffdate}\par
+ \vskip\baselineskip\noindent
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@editorialteam\@empty
+ \else
+ \@editorialteam:\par\vskip\baselineskip
+ \fi
+ \noindent\ignorespaces
+}{%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%\begin{environment}{authorsignoff}
+% An author can sign off at the end of a chapter (such as a
+% foreword).
+% Each author should be separated with \ics{Author}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{authorsignoff}{%
+ \def\Author##1{\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}%
+ ##1%
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \par\vskip\baselineskip\noindent\ignorespaces
+ }%
+ \par\vskip\baselineskip\noindent\ignorespaces
+}{%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\seroextracounters}
+% Reset counters at the start of each imported article
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\zeroextracounters}{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@theorem}{}{\setcounter{theorem}{0}}%
+ \@ifundefined{c@algorithm}{}{\setcounter{algorithm}{0}}%
+ \@ifundefined{c@example}{}{\setcounter{example}{0}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\contentsname}
+% Redcfine title of the table of contents
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\contentsname}{Table of Contents}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\theHalgorithm}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\theHalgorithm{\thechapter.\thealgorithm}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+\def\theHexample{\thechapter.\theexample}
+\def\theHtheorem{\thechapter.\thetheorem}
+%\begin{macro}{\theHsection}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\theHsection{\thechapter.\thesection}
+\def\theHsubsection{\thechapter.\thesubsection}
+\def\theHsubsubsection{\thechapter.\thesubsubsection}
+\def\theHparagraph{\thechapter.\theparagraph}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\theHsubfigure}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\theHsubfigure{\thechapter.\thefigure.\thesubfigure}
+\def\theHsubtable{\thechapter.\thetable.\thesubtable}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\mailto}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\mailto}[1]{%
+ \href{mailto:#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\c@lhaschapterfalse
+\let\c@lthesec\thesection
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make sure the hyperlinks work
+%\begin{macro}{\doimportchapterHref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\doimportchapterHref{%
+ \edef\@currentHref{chapter.\thechapter}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\toclevel@appendix}
+% Set the toc level for the main appendices
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toclevel@appendix{-1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% \sty{hyperref} and \cls{combine} don't play nicely
+% need to fudge the cross-referencing a bit.
+%\begin{macro}{\Xprefix}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Xprefix{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\Xref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Xref{\@ifstar\@Xrefstar\T@Xref}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\Xpageref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Xpageref{%
+ \@ifstar\@Xpagerefstar\T@Xpageref
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\HyRef@StarSetXRef}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\HyRef@StarSetXRef#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \Hy@safe@activestrue
+ \edef\x{#1}%
+ \@onelevel@sanitize\x
+ \edef\x{\endgroup
+ \noexpand\HyRef@@StarSetRef
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname r@\Xprefix\x\endcsname{\x}%
+ }%
+ \x
+}
+% \end{macocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\@Xrefstar}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@Xrefstar#1{%
+ \HyRef@StarSetXRef{#1}\@firstoffive
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@Xpagerefstar}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@Xpagerefstar#1{%
+ \HyRef@StarSetXRef{#1}\@secondoffive
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\T@Xref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\T@Xref#1{%
+ \Hy@safe@activestrue
+ \expandafter\@setXref\csname r@\Xprefix#1\endcsname\@firstoffive{#1}%
+ \Hy@safe@activesfalse
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\T@Xpageref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\T@Xpageref#1{%
+ \Hy@safe@activestrue
+ \expandafter\@setXref\csname r@\Xprefix#1\endcsname\@secondoffive{#1}%
+ \Hy@safe@activesfalse
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\Xlabel}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Xlabel#1{%
+ \@bsphack
+ \begingroup
+ \@onelevel@sanitize\@currentlabelname
+ \edef\@currentlabelname{%
+ \expandafter\strip@period\@currentlabelname\relax.\relax\@@@
+ }%
+ \protected@write\@mainauxout{}{%
+ \string\newlabel{\Xprefix#1}{{\@currentlabel}{\thepage}%
+ {\@currentlabelname}{\@currentHref}{}}%
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+ \@esphack
+}
+\let\ltx@label\Xlabel
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@setXref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setXref#1#2#3{% csname, extract group, refname
+ \ifx#1\relax
+ \protect\G@refundefinedtrue
+ \nfss@text{\reset@font\bfseries ??}%
+ \@latex@warning{%
+ Reference `#3' on page \thepage \space undefined%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\Hy@setref@link#1\@empty\@empty\@nil{#2}%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@secondoffive}
+% Something's redefining \cs{@secondoffive} incorrectly at the
+% start of the document when hyperref's draft mode is on. Need
+% to fix it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{\renewcommand\@secondoffive[5]{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Need to write imported chapter label to main auxfile.
+%\begin{macro}{\@setimportlabel}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setimportlabel{%
+ \let\@mainauxout\@auxout
+ \let\HRlabel\label
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@setimportlabel
+ \gdef\@setimportlabel{\let\ref\Xref \let\pageref\Xpageref}%
+ \let\ReadBookmarks\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Imported papers modify \ics{InputIfFileExists} so save original
+% definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@org@InputIfFileExists\InputIfFileExists
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\begin{environment}{jmlrpapers}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{jmlrpapers}{%
+ \begin{papers}[]
+ \jmlrarticlecommands
+ \let\importpubpaper\@importpubpaper
+ \let\importpaper\@importpaper
+ \let\importarticle\@importarticle
+ \let\label\Xlabel
+ \let\ref\Xref
+ \pagestyle{article}%
+}{%
+ \end{papers}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{environment}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\addtomaincontents}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\addtomaincontents}[2]{%
+ \protected@write\@mainauxout{\let\label\@gobble\let\index\@gobble
+ \let\glossary\@gobble}{\string\@writefile{#1}{#2}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@write@author}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@write@author}[2]{%
+ \def\@jmlr@authors@sep{ and }%
+ \protected@write\@mainauxout{}{%
+ \string\@new@articleauthor{#1}{#2}%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@new@articleauthor}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@new@articleauthor}[2]{%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname @jmlr@author@#1\endcsname{%
+ \hyperref[#1jmlrstart]{#2}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\@write@jmlr@import}
+% The accompanying \app{makejmlrbook} Perl script scans the aux file
+% for information. Any articles imported using \ics{importpubpaper},
+% \ics{importpaper} or \ics{importarticle} need to write the
+% relevant information to the aux file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@write@jmlr@import}[3]{%
+ \protected@write\@mainauxout{}{\string\@jmlr@import{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\@jmlr@import}
+% \LaTeX\ should ignore \cs{@jmlr@import} as it's only needed for
+% \app{makejmlrbook}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@jmlr@import}[3]{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\importpubpaper}
+% Import a document that has already been published.
+% Syntax: \cs{importpubpaper}\oarg{label}\marg{dir}\marg{file}\marg{pages}
+% where \meta{dir} is the directory in which the paper is located,
+% \meta{file} is the name of the file and \meta{pages} indicates
+% the page range \emph{for the original version}. The optional
+% argument is a label. This is used to prefix the labels and
+% citations in the document so they don't clash with other imported
+% articles. If omitted, \meta{dir}/\meta{file} is used instead.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@importpubpaper}[4][\@importdir\@importfile]{%
+ \bgroup
+ \def\@importdir{#2/}%
+ \def\@importfile{#3}%
+ \@write@jmlr@import{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def\@extra@b@citeb{#1}%
+ \def\@extra@binfo{#1}%
+ \jmlrpages{#4}%
+ \graphicspath{{\@importdir}}%
+ \def\jmlrmaketitlehook{%
+ \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+ \addtomaincontents{toc}%
+ {\protect\contentsline{papertitle}{\@shorttitle}{\thepage}%
+ {page.\thepage}}%
+ \pdfbookmark{\@shorttitle}{chapter.\thechapter}%
+ \def\@jmlr@authors@sep{ \& }%
+ \tocchapterpubauthor{\@jmlrauthors}%
+ {%
+ \@jmlrabbrvproceedings
+ \ifx\@jmlrvolume\@empty
+ \ifx\@jmlrpages\@empty\else\space\fi
+ \else
+ \space\@jmlrvolume
+ \ifx\@jmlrpages\@empty\else:\fi
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@jmlrpages\@empty
+ \else
+ \@jmlrpages
+ \ifx\@jmlryear\@empty\else,\fi
+ \fi
+ \space\@jmlryear
+ }%
+ \@write@author{#1}{\@jmlrauthors}%
+ }%
+ \def\jmlrpremaketitlehook{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \phantomsection
+ \let\@currentlabelname\@shorttitle
+ }%
+ \def\InputIfFileExists##1##2##3{%
+ \IfFileExists{##1}{%
+ \@org@InputIfFileExists{##1}{##2}{##3}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@org@InputIfFileExists{\@importdir##1}{##2}{##3}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \def\Xprefix{#1}%
+ \import{\@importdir\@importfile}%
+ \def\Xprefix{}%
+ \egroup
+ \gdef\@shortauthor{}%
+ \gdef\@shorttitle{}%
+ \gdef\@firstauthor{}%
+ \gdef\@jmlrauthors{}%
+ \gdef\@firstsurname{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\importpubpaper}[4][]{%
+ \ClassError{jmlrbook}{\string\importpubpaper\space
+not permitted outside `jmlrpapers' environment}{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\importpaper}
+% Like \cs{importpubpaper} but sets the pages to the page-range for
+% this book.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@importpaper}[3][\@importdir\@importfile]{%
+ \bgroup
+ \def\@importdir{#2/}%
+ \def\@importfile{#3}%
+ \@write@jmlr@import{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def\@extra@b@citeb{#1}%
+ \def\@extra@binfo{#1}%
+ \jmlrpages{\protect\@articlepagesref}%
+ \graphicspath{{\@importdir}}%
+ \def\jmlrmaketitlehook{%
+ \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+ \addtomaincontents{toc}%
+ {\protect\contentsline{papertitle}{\@shorttitle}{\thepage}%
+ {page.\thepage}}%
+ \pdfbookmark{\@shorttitle}{chapter.\thechapter}%
+ \def\@jmlr@authors@sep{ \& }%
+ \tocchapterpubauthor{\@jmlrauthors}%
+ {%
+ \@jmlrabbrvproceedings
+ \ifx\@jmlrvolume\@empty
+ \space
+ \else
+ \space\@jmlrvolume:%
+ \fi
+ \protect\articlepagesref{#1}%
+ \ifx\@jmlryear\@empty\else,\fi
+ \space\@jmlryear
+ }%
+ \@write@author{#1}{\@jmlrauthors}%
+ }%
+ \def\jmlrpremaketitlehook{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \phantomsection
+ \let\@currentlabelname\@shorttitle
+ }%
+ \def\InputIfFileExists##1##2##3{%
+ \IfFileExists{##1}{%
+ \@org@InputIfFileExists{##1}{##2}{##3}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@org@InputIfFileExists{\@importdir##1}{##2}{##3}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \def\Xprefix{#1}%
+ \import{\@importdir\@importfile}%
+ \def\Xprefix{}%
+ \egroup
+ \gdef\@shortauthor{}%
+ \gdef\@shorttitle{}%
+ \gdef\@firstauthor{}%
+ \gdef\@jmlrauthors{}%
+ \gdef\@firstsurname{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\importpaper}[3][]{%
+ \ClassError{jmlrbook}{\string\importpaper\space
+not permitted outside `jmlrpapers' environment}{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\importarticle}
+% Import a document that hasn't been published.
+% Syntax: \cs{importarticle}\oarg{label}\marg{dir}\marg{file}
+% where \meta{dir} is the directory in which the paper is located and
+% \meta{file} is the name of the file. The optional
+% argument is a label. This is used to prefix the labels and
+% citations in the document so they don't clash with other imported
+% articles. If omitted, \meta{file} is used instead.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@importarticle}[3][\@importdir\@importfile]{%
+ \bgroup
+ \def\@importdir{#2/}%
+ \def\@importfile{#3}%
+ \@write@jmlr@import{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def\@extra@b@citeb{#1}%
+ \def\@extra@binfo{#1}%
+ \def\jmlrmaketitlehook{%
+ \addtomaincontents{toc}%
+ {\protect\contentsline{papertitle}{\@shorttitle}{\thepage}%
+ {page.\thepage}}%
+ \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+ \pdfbookmark{\@shorttitle}{chapter.\thechapter}%
+ \def\@jmlr@authors@sep{ \& }%
+ \tocchapterauthor{\@jmlrauthors}%
+ \@write@author{#1}{\@jmlrauthors}%
+ \jmlrpages{}%
+ \jmlrvolume{}%
+ \jmlryear{}%
+ \jmlrsubmitted{}%
+ \jmlrpublished{}%
+ \jmlrproceedings{}{}%
+ }%
+ \def\jmlrpremaketitlehook{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \phantomsection
+ \let\@currentlabelname\@shorttitle
+ }%
+ \graphicspath{{\@importdir}}%
+ \def\InputIfFileExists##1##2##3{%
+ \IfFileExists{##1}{%
+ \@org@InputIfFileExists{##1}{##2}{##3}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@org@InputIfFileExists{\@importdir##1}{##2}{##3}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \def\Xprefix{#1}%
+ \import{\@importdir\@importfile}%
+ \def\Xprefix{}%
+ \egroup
+ \gdef\@shortauthor{}%
+ \gdef\@shorttitle{}%
+ \gdef\@firstauthor{}%
+ \gdef\@jmlrauthors{}%
+ \gdef\@firstsurname{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\importarticle}[3][]{%
+ \ClassError{jmlrbook}{\string\importarticle\space
+not permitted outside `jmlrpapers' environment}{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\addtocpart}
+% Add a part to the TOC without printing anything in the text
+% (but does a \cs{cleardoublepage}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\addtocpart}[1]{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \refstepcounter{tocpart}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\tocpart{#1}}%
+ \pdfbookmark[-1]{#1}{part.\thetocpart}%
+}
+\newcounter{tocpart}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\tocpart}
+% Define the appearance of a part in the TOC.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tocpart}[1]{%
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0ex \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{2.25em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \large\bfseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss \null}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Set up the layout of the chapter headings
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\prechapterskip}{3em}
+\setlength{\postchapterskip}{20pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\chapternumberformat}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\chapternumberformat}[1]{%
+ \Large\bfseries \@chapapp\space#1\par
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\chaptertitleformat}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\chaptertitleformat}[1]{%
+ \Large\bfseries #1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\chapterformat}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\chapterformat}{%
+ \raggedright
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Set up the format of a part in the book (not a part in an
+% article).
+%\begin{macro}{\preparthook}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\preparthook}{\cleardoublepage\null\vfil}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\partnumberformat}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\partnumberformat}[1]{%
+ \Huge\bfseries \@partapp\nobreakspace#1\par\nobreak
+ \vskip 20\p@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\postparthook}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\postparthook{%
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \vfil\newpage
+ \null
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \newpage
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\@curparthead}
+% The heading of the current part
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@curparthead}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\parttitleformat}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\parttitleformat}[1]{#1%
+ \gdef\@curparthead{\@partapp\space \thepart. #1}%
+ \@mkboth{\@curparthead}{\@curparthead}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\firstpageno}
+% Change \cs{firstpageno} to do nothing as the page number will
+% be determined by the book.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\firstpageno}[1]{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\tocchapterauthor}
+% Add the author of the current chapter to the table of contents.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tocchapterauthor}[1]{%
+ \addtomaincontents{toc}{\protect\contentsline{chapterauthor}{%
+ #1}{}{}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\tocchapterpubauthor}
+% Add the author of an imported prepublished paper to the
+% table of contents. The first argument is the author (or list
+% of authors). The second argument is the reference to the
+% published article.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tocchapterpubauthor}[2]{%
+ \addtomaincontents{toc}{\protect\contentsline{chapterauthor}{%
+ #1; #2.}{}{}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Set up the formatting in the TOC
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*\@pnumwidth{2em}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\l@part}
+% Format for book parts
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*\l@part[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{5em}%
+ \vbox{%
+ \pagerule
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \large\bfseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ \renewcommand*\numberline[1]{\hb@xt@ \@tempdima
+ {\partname\space ##1\hfil }}%
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss }\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+ \pagerule
+ }%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\l@papertitle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\l@papertitle}[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{3em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \leavevmode \raggedright\itshape
+ #1\nobreak\hfill \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss
+ \normalfont#2}%
+ \par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\l@chapterauthor}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\l@chapterauthor[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \raggedright
+ #1%
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*\l@section[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{3em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \normalsize\mdseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\l@subsection}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*\l@subsection[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{3.5em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \normalsize\mdseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\chaptermark}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\chaptermark}[1]{%
+ \@mkboth{\@curparthead}{\protect\thechapter. #1}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Set up page styles
+%\begin{macro}{\firstpagehead}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\firstpagehead}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\firstpagefoot}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\firstpagefoot}{\hfill\thepage}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\headfont}
+% Set the header font
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\headfont}{\reset@font\small\scshape}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\footfont}
+% Set the footer font
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\footfont}{\reset@font\small\itshape}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\ps@chplain}
+% Page style for first page of a chapter
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ps@chplain}{%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \renewcommand*{\@oddhead}{\headfont\firstpagehead}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@evenhead}{}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@oddfoot}{\footfont\firstpagefoot}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@evenfoot}{\footfont\thepage\hfill
+ }%
+}
+\let\ps@plain\ps@chplain
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\ps@article}
+% Page style for the imported articles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ps@article}{%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \renewcommand*{\@oddhead}{\headfont\hfill\@shorttitle}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@evenhead}{\headfont\@shortauthor\hfill}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@oddfoot}{\footfont\hfill\thepage}
+ \renewcommand*{\@evenfoot}{\footfont\thepage\hfill}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\ps@jmlrbook}
+% Page style for book
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ps@jmlrbook}{%
+ \ps@headings
+ \renewcommand*{\sectionmark}[1]{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\morefrontmatter}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\morefrontmatter}{\pagestyle{jmlrbook}%
+ \def\chaptermark##1{%
+ \@mkboth{##1\hfill}{\hfill##1}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\moremainmatter}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\moremainmatter}{\pagestyle{jmlrbook}%
+ \def\chaptermark##1{%
+ \@mkboth{\@curparthead}{\protect\thechapter. ##1}%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\bibsection}
+% Set the bibliography headings in the articles
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*\bibsection{\section*{\refname}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\@bookpart}
+% Define the layout of a book part
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@bookpart[#1]#2{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \refstepcounter{part}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{\@parttoclabel}{%
+ \protect\numberline{\thepart}#1}%
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{\@parttoclabel}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \markboth{}{}%
+ {\interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont\partformat
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \partnumberformat{\thepart}%
+ \fi
+ \parttitleformat{#2}\par}%
+ \postparthook}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Set up the book commands:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\jmlrbookcommands
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\iffalse
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</jmlrbook.cls>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%\Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/jmlr/jmlr.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/jmlr/jmlr.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e8d06b7968a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/jmlr/jmlr.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+% jmlr.ins generated using makedtx version 0.94b 2010/6/17 20:52
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+ jmlr.dtx
+ Copyright 2010 Nicola Talbot
+
+ This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+ conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+ of this license of (at your option) any later version.
+ The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+ and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+ version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+ This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+
+ The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot.
+
+ This work consists of the files jmlr.dtx and jmlr.ins and the derived files jmlr.cls, jmlrbook.cls.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\askforoverwritefalse
+
+\generate{\file{jmlr.cls}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
+\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{jmlr.dtx}{jmlr.cls,package}}
+\file{jmlrbook.cls}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
+\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{jmlr.dtx}{jmlrbook.cls,package}}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/jmlr/jmlr.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/jmlr/jmlr.cls
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..eb9d45ebe6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/jmlr/jmlr.cls
@@ -0,0 +1,969 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `jmlr.cls',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% jmlr.dtx (with options: `jmlr.cls,package')
+%%
+%% jmlr.dtx
+%% Copyright 2010 Nicola Talbot
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license of (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%%
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot.
+%%
+%% This work consists of the files jmlr.dtx and jmlr.ins and the derived files jmlr.cls, jmlrbook.cls.
+%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%% First editor:
+%% Second editor:
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{jmlr}[2010/06/17 v1.06 (NLCT) Journal of Machine Learning Research]
+\newif\if@openright
+\newif\if@mainmatter \@mainmattertrue
+\@ifundefined{ifgrayscale}{
+ \newif\ifgrayscale
+ \grayscalefalse
+}{}
+\DeclareOption{color}{\grayscalefalse
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{color}{xcolor}}
+\DeclareOption{gray}{\grayscaletrue
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{gray}{xcolor}}
+\newif\iftablecaptiontop
+\tablecaptiontoptrue
+\DeclareOption{tablecaptiontop}{\tablecaptiontoptrue}
+\DeclareOption{tablecaptionbottom}{\tablecaptionbottomtrue}
+\newif\ifjmlrhtml
+\jmlrhtmlfalse
+\DeclareOption{html}{\jmlrhtmltrue}
+\DeclareOption{nohtml}{\jmlrhtmlfalse}
+\def\pt@size{11pt}
+\DeclareOption{10pt}{\renewcommand{\pt@size}{10}%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+\DeclareOption{11pt}{\renewcommand{\pt@size}{11}%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+\DeclareOption{12pt}{\renewcommand{\pt@size}{12}%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+\newcommand*{\@jmlrproceedings}{Journal of Machine Learning Research}
+\newcommand*{\@jmlrabbrvproceedings}{JMLR}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrproceedings}[2]{%
+ \renewcommand*{\@jmlrabbrvproceedings}{#1}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@jmlrproceedings}{#2}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrnowcp}{%
+ \jmlrproceedings{JMLR}{Journal of Machine Learning Research}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrwcp}{%
+ \jmlrproceedings{JMLR WC\&P}{JMLR: Workshop and Conference Proceedings}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{nowcp}{\jmlrnowcp}
+\DeclareOption{wcp}{\jmlrwcp}
+\newif\ifviiXx
+\viiXxfalse
+\DeclareOption{7x10}{\viiXxtrue}
+\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\PassOptionsToPackage{letterpaper}{typearea}}
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{scrartcl}}
+\ExecuteOptions{twoside,letterpaper}
+\ProcessOptions
+\LoadClass[pointednumbers,normalheadings]{scrartcl}
+\ifviiXx
+ \setlength{\paperwidth}{7in}
+ \setlength{\paperheight}{10in}
+ \setlength{\textwidth}{5.25in}
+ \setlength{\textheight}{8.2in}
+ \setlength{\topmargin}{0.4in}
+ \setlength{\headheight}{0.2in}
+ \setlength{\headsep}{0.2in}
+ \setlength{\hoffset}{-1in}
+ \setlength{\voffset}{-1in}
+ \setlength{\evensidemargin}{0.75in}
+ \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{1.0in}
+\else
+ \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.25in}
+ \setlength{\evensidemargin}{0.25in}
+ \setlength{\marginparwidth}{0.07 true in}
+ \setlength{\topmargin}{-0.5in}
+ \addtolength{\headsep}{0.25in}
+ \setlength{\textheight}{8.5 true in}
+ \setlength{\textwidth}{6.0 true in}
+\fi
+\RequirePackage{amsmath}
+\RequirePackage{amssymb}
+\RequirePackage{natbib}
+\RequirePackage{graphicx}
+\RequirePackage{url}
+\RequirePackage[x11names]{xcolor}
+\RequirePackage[algo2e,ruled]{algorithm2e}
+\renewcommand{\topfraction}{0.95} % let figure take up nearly whole page
+\renewcommand{\textfraction}{0.05} % let figure take up nearly whole page
+\widowpenalty=10000\relax
+\clubpenalty=10000\relax
+\@twosidetrue
+\@mparswitchtrue
+\def\ds@draft{\overfullrule 5pt}
+\bibliographystyle{plainnat}
+\bibpunct{(}{)}{;}{a}{,}{,}
+\addtokomafont{section}{\rmfamily\large}
+\addtokomafont{subsection}{\rmfamily\normalsize}
+\addtokomafont{subsubsection}{\rmfamily\mdseries\normalsize\scshape}
+\addtokomafont{paragraph}{\rmfamily\normalsize}
+\addtokomafont{subparagraph}{\rmfamily\itshape\normalsize}
+\renewcommand*{\othersectionlevelsformat}[1]{%
+ \csname pre#1num\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname\autodot\enskip}
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{\@setpar{\@@par\@tempdima \hsize
+ \advance\@tempdima-15pt\parshape \@ne 15pt \@tempdima}\par
+ \parindent 2em\noindent \hbox to \z@{\hss{\@thefnmark}. \hfil}#1}
+\ifjmlrhtml
+ \renewenvironment{abstract}{\HCode{<h3>}Abstract\HCode{</h3>}}{}%
+\else
+ \renewenvironment{abstract}
+ {\centerline{\large\bfseries Abstract}\vspace{0.7ex}%
+ \bgroup
+ \leftskip 20pt\rightskip 20pt\small\noindent\ignorespaces}%
+ {\par\egroup\vskip 0.25ex}
+\fi
+\newenvironment{keywords}
+{\bgroup\leftskip 20pt\rightskip 20pt \small\noindent{\bfseries
+Keywords:} \ignorespaces}%
+{\par\egroup\vskip 0.25ex}
+\newlength\aftertitskip \newlength\beforetitskip
+\newlength\interauthorskip \newlength\aftermaketitskip
+%% Changeable parameters.
+\setlength\aftertitskip{0.1in plus 0.2in minus 0.2in}
+\setlength\beforetitskip{0.05in plus 0.08in minus 0.08in}
+\setlength\interauthorskip{0.08in plus 0.1in minus 0.1in}
+\setlength\aftermaketitskip{0.3in plus 0.1in minus 0.1in}
+\renewcommand*{\title}[2][\@title]{%
+ \def\@shorttitle{#1}%
+ \def\@title{#2}%
+ \jmlrtitlehook
+}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrtitlehook}{}
+\renewcommand*{\author}[2][]{%
+ \def\@author{#2}%
+ \def\@sauthor{#1}%
+ \ifx\@sauthor\@empty
+ \else
+ \let\@shortauthor\@sauthor
+ \fi
+ \jmlrauthorhook
+}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrauthorhook}{}
+\newcommand*{\@shortauthor}{}
+\newcommand*{\@firstauthor}{}
+\newcommand*{\@firstsurname}{}
+\newlength\jmlrlength
+\def\jmlrmaketitle{%
+ \jmlrpremaketitlehook
+ \def\@jmlr@authors@sep{, }%
+ \par
+ \begingroup
+ \def\thefootnote{\fnsymbol{footnote}}%
+ \def\@makefnmark{\hbox to 0pt{$^{\@thefnmark}$\hss}}%
+ \@jmlrmaketitle \@thanks
+ \endgroup
+\label{jmlrstart}%
+\ifx\@sauthor\@empty
+ \settowidth{\jmlrlength}{\@evenhead}%
+ \ifdim\jmlrlength>\textwidth
+ \def\@shortauthor{\@firstsurname\space et al.}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\settowidth{\jmlrlength}{\@titlefoot}%
+\ifdim\jmlrlength>\textwidth
+ \def\@jmlrauthors{\@firstauthor\space \emph{et al}}%
+\fi
+\jmlrmaketitlehook
+\thispagestyle{jmlrtps}%
+\setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+\let\maketitle\relax \let\@maketitle\relax
+\gdef\@thanks{}\gdef\@author{}\let\thanks\relax
+\def\@jmlr@authors@sep{ \& }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrmaketitlehook}{}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrpremaketitlehook}{}
+\newcommand{\jmlrhtmlmaketitle}{%
+ \ifx\@jmlrauthors\@empty
+ \sbox\jmlrbox{\let\addr\relax\@author}%
+ \fi
+ \noindent\HCode{<h2>}\@title\HCode{</h2>}
+ \noindent\@jmlrauthors
+}
+%%\begin{macro}{\jmlrbox}
+\newsavebox\jmlrbox
+\ifjmlrhtml
+ \let\maketitle\jmlrhtmlmaketitle
+\else
+ \let\maketitle\jmlrmaketitle
+\fi
+\def\@startauthor{\noindent \normalsize\bfseries}
+\def\@endauthor{}
+\def\@starteditor{\noindent \small {\bfseries \@edname:~}}
+\def\@endeditor{\normalsize}
+\def\jmlrpretitle{\vskip\beforetitskip\begin{center}\Large\bfseries}
+\def\jmlrposttitle{\par\end{center}\vskip\aftertitskip}
+\def\jmlrpreauthor{%
+\bgroup
+ \def\and{\unskip\enspace{\normalfont and}\enspace}%
+ \def\addr{\small\itshape}%
+ \def\name{\ClassError{jmlr}{Use \string\Name{Author's Name} not \string\name}{}}%
+ \def\email{\ClassError{jmlr}{Use \string\Email{address} not \string\email}{}}%
+ \def\AND{\@endauthor\normalfont\hss \vskip \interauthorskip
+ \@startauthor}%
+ \@startauthor
+}
+\def\@email{\hfill\small\mdseries\scshape}%
+\def\@name{\normalsize\upshape\bfseries}%
+\def\@parsename#1 #2\@nil{%
+ \def\@tmp{#2}%
+ \ifx\@tmp\@empty
+ \def\@surname{#1}%
+ \let\@nextparsename\@parsenamenoop
+ \else
+ \@getinitial#1-\relax\relax\end
+ \ifx\@forenames\@empty
+ \def\@forenames{#1}%
+ \protected@edef\@initials{\@initial}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@forenames}%
+ \edef\@forenames{\space\the\toks@}%
+ \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@initials}%
+ \protected@edef\@initials{\the\toks@\@initial}%
+ \fi
+ \let\@nextparsename\@parsename
+ \fi
+ \@nextparsename#2\@nil
+}
+\def\@parsenamenoop#1\@nil{}
+\def\@getinitial#1#2-#3#4\end{%
+ \def\@jmlr@tmp{#3}%
+ \if\@jmlr@tmp\relax
+ \def\@initial{#1.}%
+ \else
+ \def\@initial{#1.-#3.}%
+ \fi
+}
+\newcommand*{\Name}[1]{%
+ \def\@forenames{}%
+ \def\@surname{}%
+ \@parsename#1 \@nil
+ \ifx\@shortauthor\@empty
+ \ifx\@sauthor\@empty
+ \global\let\@shortauthor\@surname
+ \global\let\@firstsurname\@surname
+ \fi
+ \protected@xdef\@jmlrauthors{\@initials\space\@surname}%
+ \global\let\@firstauthor\@jmlrauthors
+ \else
+ \ifx\@sauthor\@empty
+ \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@shortauthor}%
+ \protected@xdef\@shortauthor{\the\toks@\space\@surname}%
+ \fi
+ \protected@xdef\@jmlrauthors{\@jmlrauthors
+ \noexpand\@jmlr@authors@sep
+ \@initials\space\@surname}%
+ \fi
+ \@name #1%
+}
+\newcommand*{\Email}[1]{{\@email #1}}
+\def\jmlrpostauthor{\@endauthor\egroup
+ \par
+ \vskip \aftermaketitskip
+ \noindent
+ \ifx\@editor\@empty
+ \else
+ \@starteditor \@editor \@endeditor
+ \fi
+ \vskip \aftermaketitskip
+}
+\def\@jmlrmaketitle{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth
+ \linewidth\hsize
+ \jmlrpretitle \@title \jmlrposttitle
+ \jmlrpreauthor \@author \jmlrpostauthor
+}}
+\newcommand*\kernelmachines{(for
+ {\textsc{http://www.kernel-machines.org}})}
+\newcommand*{\editorname}{Editor}
+\newcommand*{\editorsname}{Editors}
+\let\@edname\editorname
+\def\@editor{}
+\def\editor#1{%
+ \global\let\@edname\editorname
+ \gdef\@editor{#1}%
+}
+\def\editors#1{%
+ \global\let\@edname\editorsname
+ \gdef\@editor{#1}%
+}
+\def\firstpageno#1{\setcounter{page}{#1}}
+\AtEndDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{phantomsection}{}{\phantomsection}%
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabelname{end of \@shorttitle}%
+ \label{jmlrend}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\@titlefoot}{\scriptsize\copyright\space\@jmlryear
+ \space\@jmlrauthors.\hfill}
+\newcommand\ps@jmlrtps{%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \def\@oddhead{\scriptsize \@jmlrproceedings
+ \ifx\@jmlrvolume\@empty\else\space\@jmlrvolume\fi
+ \ifx\@jmlryear\@empty\else\space(\@jmlryear)\fi
+ \ifx\@jmlrpages\@empty\else\space\@jmlrpages\fi
+ \hfill
+ \ifx\@jmlrworkshop\@empty
+ \ifx\@jmlrsubmitted\@empty
+ \else
+ Submitted \@jmlrsubmitted
+ \ifx\@jmlrpublished\@empty\else;\fi
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@jmlrpublished\@empty
+ \else
+ \space Published \@jmlrpublished
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \space\@jmlrworkshop
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+ \def\@oddfoot{\@titlefoot}%
+ \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
+}
+\def\ps@jmlrps{%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \def\@oddhead{\hfill {\small\scshape \@shorttitle} \hfill}%
+ \def\@oddfoot{\hfill \small\rmfamily \thepage \hfill}%
+ \def\@evenhead{\hfill {\small\scshape \@shortauthor} \hfill}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{\hfill \small\rmfamily \thepage \hfill}%
+}%
+\pagestyle{jmlrps}
+\let\@jmlrvolume\@empty
+\newcommand*{\jmlrvolume}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrvolume}{#1}}
+\let\@jmlrissue\@empty
+\newcommand*{\jmlrissue}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrissue}{#1}}
+\let\@jmlryear\@empty
+\newcommand*{\jmlryear}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlryear}{#1}}
+\newcommand*\@jmlrpages{\pageref{jmlrstart}--\pageref{jmlrend}}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrpages}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrpages}{#1}}
+\let\@jmlrsubmitted\@empty
+\newcommand*{\jmlrsubmitted}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrsubmitted}{#1}}
+\let\@jmlrpublished\@empty
+\newcommand*{\jmlrpublished}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrpublished}{#1}}
+\let\@jmlrworkshop\@empty
+\newcommand*{\jmlrworkshop}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrworkshop}{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\@jmlrauthors}{}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrauthors}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@jmlrauthors}{#1}}
+
+\def\figurecaption#1#2{\noindent\hangindent 40pt
+ \hbox to 36pt {\small\slshape #1 \hfil}
+ \ignorespaces {\small #2}}
+\def\figurecenter#1#2{\centerline{{\slshape #1} #2}}
+\def\figurecenter#1#2{\centerline{{\small\slshape #1} {\small #2}}}
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+ \vskip 10pt
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1: #2}%
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize % IF longer than one line:
+ \begin{list}{#1:}{%
+ \settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1:}
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}
+ \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}
+ }\item #2 \end{list}\par % Output in quote mode
+ \else % ELSE center.
+ \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}
+ \fi}
+\def\abovestrut#1{\rule[0in]{0in}{#1}\ignorespaces}
+\def\belowstrut#1{\rule[-#1]{0in}{#1}\ignorespaces}
+\long\def\acks#1{\section*{Acknowledgments}#1}
+\long\def\researchnote#1{\noindent {\LARGE\itshape Research Note} #1}
+\newcommand*{\set}[1]{\ensuremath{\mathcal{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\@jmlr@reflistsep}{, }
+\newcommand*{\@jmlr@reflistlastsep}{ and }
+\newcommand*{\sectionrefname}{Section}
+\newcommand*{\sectionsrefname}{Sections}
+\newcommand*{\equationrefname}{Equation}
+\newcommand*{\equationsrefname}{Equations}
+\newcommand*{\tablerefname}{Table}
+\newcommand*{\tablesrefname}{Tables}
+\newcommand*{\figurerefname}{Figure}
+\newcommand*{\figuresrefname}{Figures}
+\newcommand*{\algorithmrefname}{Algorithm}
+\newcommand*{\algorithmsrefname}{Algorithms}
+\newcommand*{\theoremrefname}{Theorem}
+\newcommand*{\theoremsrefname}{Theorems}
+\newcommand*{\lemmarefname}{Lemma}
+\newcommand*{\lemmasrefname}{Lemmas}
+\newcommand*{\remarkrefname}{Remark}
+\newcommand*{\remarksrefname}{Remarks}
+\newcommand*{\corollaryrefname}{Corollary}
+\newcommand*{\corollarysrefname}{Corollaries}
+\newcommand*{\definitionrefname}{Definition}
+\newcommand*{\definitionsrefname}{Definitions}
+\newcommand*{\conjecturerefname}{Conjecture}
+\newcommand*{\conjecturesrefname}{Conjectures}
+\newcommand*{\axiomrefname}{Axiom}
+\newcommand*{\axiomsrefname}{Axioms}
+\newcommand*{\examplerefname}{Example}
+\newcommand*{\examplesrefname}{Examples}
+\newcommand*{\appendixrefname}{Appendix}
+\newcommand*{\appendixsrefname}{Appendices}
+\newcommand*{\partrefname}{Part}
+\newcommand*{\partsrefname}{Parts}
+\newcommand*{\objectref}[5]{%
+ \let\@objectname\@empty
+ \def\@objectref{}%
+ \let\@prevsep\@empty
+ \@for\@thislabel:=#1\do{%
+ \toks@{\@prevsep}%
+ \protected@edef\@objectref{\@objectref\the\toks@
+ #4\ref{\@thislabel}#5}%
+ \ifx\@objectname\@empty
+ \let\@objectname#2% singular tag
+ \else
+ \let\@objectname#3% plural tag
+ \let\@prevsep\@jmlr@reflistsep
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \ifx\@objectname#3% plural tag
+ \let\@prevsep\@jmlr@reflistlastsep
+ \fi
+ \@objectname~\@objectref
+}
+\newcommand*{\sectionref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\sectionrefname}{\sectionsrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\equationref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\equationrefname}{\equationsrefname}()}
+\newcommand*{\tableref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\tablerefname}{\tablesrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\figureref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\figurerefname}{\figuresrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\algorithmref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\algorithmrefname}{\algorithmsrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\theoremref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\theoremrefname}{\theoremsrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\lemmaref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\lemmarefname}{\lemmasrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\remarkref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\remarkrefname}{\remarksrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\corollaryref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\corollaryrefname}{\corollarysrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\definitionref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\definitionrefname}{\definitionsrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\conjectureref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\conjecturerefname}{\conjecturesrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\axiomref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\axiomrefname}{\axiomsrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\exampleref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\examplerefname}{\examplesrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\appendixref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\appendixrefname}{\appendixsrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\partref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\partrefname}{\partsrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand{\floatconts}[3]{%
+ \@ifundefined{\@captype conts}{\tableconts{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+ {\csname\@captype conts\endcsname{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+}
+\newcommand{\tableconts}[3]{%
+ \iftablecaptiontop
+ #2\label{#1}\vskip\baselineskip
+ {\centering #3\par}%
+ \else
+ {\centering #3\par}%
+ \vskip\baselineskip
+ #2\label{#1}%
+ \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\figureconts}[3]{%
+ {\centering #3\par}%
+ \vskip\baselineskip
+ #2\label{#1}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\includeteximage}[2][]{%
+ \def\Gin@req@sizes{%
+ \Gin@req@height\Gin@nat@height
+ \Gin@req@width\Gin@nat@width}%
+ \begingroup
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \let\input@path\Ginput@path
+ \toks@{\InputIfFileExists{#2}{}{\@warning{File `#1' not found}}}%
+ \setkeys{Gin}{#1}%
+ \Gin@esetsize
+ \the\toks@
+ \endgroup
+}
+\providecommand{\ifprint}[2]{\ifgrayscale#1\else#2\fi}
+%% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifjmlrhtml
+\else
+ \let\@org@Ginclude@graphics\Ginclude@graphics
+ \def\Ginclude@graphics#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\input@path\Ginput@path
+ \ifprint{\filename@parse{#1-gray}}{\filename@parse{#1}}%
+ \ifx\filename@ext\relax
+ \@for\Gin@temp:=\Gin@extensions\do{%
+ \ifx\Gin@ext\relax
+ \Gin@getbase\Gin@temp
+ \fi}%
+ \else
+ \ifprint{\filename@parse{#1}}{}%
+ \Gin@getbase{\Gin@sepdefault\filename@ext}%
+ \ifx\Gin@ext\relax
+ \@warning{File `#1' not found}%
+ \def\Gin@base{\filename@area\filename@base}%
+ \edef\Gin@ext{\Gin@sepdefault\filename@ext}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifx\Gin@ext\relax
+ \ifprint{\@org@Ginclude@graphics{#1}}%
+ {%
+ \@latex@error{File `#1' not found}%
+ {I could not locate the file with any of these extensions:^^J%
+ \Gin@extensions^^J\@ehc}%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \@ifundefined{Gin@rule@\Gin@ext}%
+ {\ifx\Gin@rule@*\@undefined
+ \@latex@error{Unknown graphics extension: \Gin@ext}\@ehc
+ \else
+ \expandafter\Gin@setfile\Gin@rule@*{\Gin@base\Gin@ext}%
+ \fi}%
+ {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\Gin@setfile
+ \csname Gin@rule@\Gin@ext\endcsname{\Gin@base\Gin@ext}}%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup}
+\fi
+\newenvironment{algorithm}[1][htbp]%
+{%
+ \@algocf@init%
+ \@algocf@init@caption
+ \begin{algocf}[#1]%
+ \@algocf@start%
+}%
+{%
+ \@algocf@finish%
+ \@algocf@term@caption
+ \end{algocf}%
+ \@algocf@term
+}
+\setlength\algomargin{0pt}
+\newcommand{\artappendix}{\par
+ \setcounter{section}{0}
+ \setcounter{subsection}{0}
+ \def\thesection{\Alph{section}}
+ \def\presectionnum{Appendix~}%
+}
+\let\appendix\artappendix
+\newcommand{\BlackBox}{\rule{1.5ex}{1.5ex}}
+\newenvironment{proof}{\par\noindent{\bfseries\upshape
+ Proof\ }}{\hfill\BlackBox\\[2mm]}
+\newtheorem{example}{Example}
+\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}
+\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma}
+\newtheorem{proposition}[theorem]{Proposition}
+\newtheorem{remark}[theorem]{Remark}
+\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary}
+\newtheorem{definition}[theorem]{Definition}
+\newtheorem{conjecture}[theorem]{Conjecture}
+\newtheorem{axiom}[theorem]{Axiom}
+\renewcommand*{\vec}[1]{\boldsymbol{#1}}
+\newenvironment{enumerate*}%
+{%
+ \ifnum\@enumdepth=0\relax
+ \setcounter{enumi}{0}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\@enumdepth>\thr@@
+ \@toodeep
+ \else
+ \advance\@enumdepth\@ne
+ \def\@enumctr{enumi}%
+ \list
+ {\labelenumi}%
+ {\@nmbrlisttrue\def\@listctr{enumi}%
+ \def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}%
+ \fi
+}%
+{\endlist}
+\newenvironment{altdescription}[1]%
+ {\list{}%
+ {%
+ \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\altdescriptionlabel{#1}}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{15pt}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{2\labelsep}%
+ \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+ \setlength{\rightmargin}{\labelsep}%
+ \let\makelabel\altdescriptionlabel
+ }%
+ }%
+ {\endlist}
+
+\newcommand*{\altdescriptionlabel}[1]{\normalfont\bfseries #1\hfill}
+\newcommand*{\mailto}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcounter{subfigure}
+\@addtoreset{subfigure}{figure}
+\renewcommand*{\thesubfigure}{\alph{subfigure}}
+\renewcommand*{\p@subfigure}{\expandafter\@p@subfigure}
+\newcommand*{\@p@subfigure}[1]{%
+ \protect\@subfigurelabel{\thefigure}{\thesubfigure}%
+}
+\newcommand*\@subfigurelabel[2]{#1\subfigurelabel{#2}}
+\newcommand*\@subfigref[1]{%
+ {%
+ \def\@subfigurelabel##1##2{\subfigurelabel{##2}}%
+ \ref{#1}%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\subfigref}[1]{%
+ \let\@objectname\@empty
+ \def\@objectref{}%
+ \let\@prevsep\@empty
+ \@for\@thislabel:=#1\do{%
+ \toks@{\@prevsep}%
+ \protected@edef\@objectref{\@objectref\the\toks@
+ \protect\@subfigref{\@thislabel}}%
+ \ifx\@objectname\@empty
+\let\@objectname\@nil
+ \else
+\let\@objectname\relax
+ \let\@prevsep\@jmlr@reflistsep
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \ifx\@objectname\relax
+ \let\@prevsep\@jmlr@reflistlastsep
+ \fi
+ \@objectref
+}
+\newcommand*{\subfigurelabel}[1]{(\emph{#1})}
+\newcommand*{\subfigure}[1][]{%
+ \bgroup
+ \def\@subfigcap{#1}%
+ \@subfigure
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\@subfigure}[2][b]{%
+ \advance\c@figure by 1\relax
+ \refstepcounter{subfigure}%
+ \begin{tabular}[#1]{@{}c@{}}%
+ #2\\
+ \subfigurelabel{\thesubfigure}%
+ \ifx\@subfigcap\@empty
+ \else
+ \space\@subfigcap
+ \fi
+ \end{tabular}
+ \egroup
+}
+\newcounter{subtable}
+\@addtoreset{subtable}{table}
+\renewcommand*{\thesubtable}{\alph{subtable}}
+\renewcommand*{\p@subtable}{\expandafter\@p@subtable}
+\newcommand*{\@p@subtable}[1]{%
+ \protect\@subtablelabel{\thetable}{\thesubtable}%
+}
+\newcommand*\@subtablelabel[2]{#1\subtablelabel{#2}}
+\newcommand*\@subtabref[1]{%
+ {%
+ \def\@subtablelabel##1##2{\subtablelabel{##2}}%
+ \ref{#1}%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\subtabref}[1]{%
+ \let\@objectname\@empty
+ \def\@objectref{}%
+ \let\@prevsep\@empty
+ \@for\@thislabel:=#1\do{%
+ \toks@{\@prevsep}%
+ \protected@edef\@objectref{\@objectref\the\toks@
+ \protect\@subtabref{\@thislabel}}%
+ \ifx\@objectname\@empty
+\let\@objectname\@nil
+ \else
+\let\@objectname\relax
+ \let\@prevsep\@jmlr@reflistsep
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \ifx\@objectname\relax
+ \let\@prevsep\@jmlr@reflistlastsep
+ \fi
+ \@objectref
+}
+\newcommand*{\subtablelabel}[1]{(\emph{#1})}
+\newcommand*{\subtable}[1][]{%
+ \def\@subtabcap{#1}%
+ \@subtable
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\@subtable}[2][t]{%
+ \refstepcounter{subtable}%
+ \begin{tabular}[#1]{@{}c@{}}%
+ \subtablelabel{\thesubtable}%
+ \ifx\@subtabcap\@empty
+ \else
+ \space\@subtabcap
+ \fi
+ \\#2%
+ \end{tabular}
+}
+\newcounter{chapter}
+\renewcommand\thechapter{\@arabic\c@chapter}
+\newcommand\@chapapp{\chaptername}
+\@addtoreset{section}{chapter}
+\newcommand*\chaptermark[1]{}
+\newcommand\bookchapter{%
+ \if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \global\@topnum\z@
+ \@afterindentfalse
+ \secdef\@chapter\@schapter}
+\newcommand\artchapter{%
+ \ClassError{jmlrwcp}{Chapters not permitted in articles}{}}
+\let\chapter\artchapter
+\def\@chaptoclabel{chapter}
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \if@mainmatter
+ \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+ \typeout{\@chapapp\space\thechapter.}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{\@chaptoclabel}%
+ {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1}%
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{\@chaptoclabel}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{\@chaptoclabel}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \chaptermark{#1}%
+ \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+ \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
+ \else
+ \@makechapterhead{#2}%
+ \@afterheading
+ \fi}
+\newcommand{\chaptertitleformat}[1]{%
+ \Huge\bfseries#1%
+}
+\newcommand{\chapternumberformat}[1]{%
+ \huge\bfseries \@chapapp\space#1\par\nobreak
+ \vskip 20\p@
+}
+\newcommand*{\chapterformat}{\raggedright}
+\newlength\postchapterskip
+\setlength\postchapterskip{40pt}
+\newlength\prechapterskip
+\setlength\prechapterskip{50pt}
+\def\@makechapterhead#1{%
+ \null\vskip\prechapterskip
+ {\parindent \z@ \normalfont\chapterformat
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \if@mainmatter
+ \chapternumberformat{\thechapter}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \chaptertitleformat{#1}\par\nobreak
+ \vskip \postchapterskip
+ }}
+\def\@schapter#1{\if@twocolumn
+ \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]%
+ \else
+ \@makeschapterhead{#1}%
+ \@afterheading
+ \fi}
+\def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
+ \vspace*{\prechapterskip}%
+ {\parindent \z@
+ \normalfont\chapterformat
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \chaptertitleformat{#1}\par\nobreak
+ \vskip \postchapterskip
+ }}
+\newcommand*\l@chapter[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \large\bfseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+\let\l@appendix\l@chapter
+\newcommand\chaptername{Chapter}
+\newcommand\frontmatter{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \@mainmatterfalse
+ \pagenumbering{roman}%
+ \morefrontmatter
+}
+\newcommand\morefrontmatter{}
+\newcommand\mainmatter{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \@mainmattertrue
+ \pagenumbering{arabic}%
+ \moremainmatter
+}
+\newcommand\moremainmatter{}
+\newcommand\backmatter{%
+ \if@openright
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ \@mainmatterfalse}
+\let\booktableofcontents\tableofcontents
+\let\arttableofcontents\tableofcontents
+\newcommand{\artpart}{%
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode\fi
+ \par
+ \addvspace{4ex}%
+ \@afterindentfalse
+ \secdef\@artpart\@sartpart
+}
+\let\@artpart\@part
+\let\@sartpart\@spart
+\newcommand\bookpart{%
+ \if@openright
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \onecolumn
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+ \preparthook
+ \secdef\@bookpart\@sbookpart}
+\newcommand{\parttitleformat}[1]{%
+ \Huge\bfseries#1%
+}
+\newcommand{\partnumberformat}[1]{%
+ \Huge\bfseries \partname\nobreakspace#1\par\nobreak
+ \vskip 20\p@
+}
+\newcommand{\preparthook}{\null\vfil}
+\renewcommand*{\partformat}{\centering}
+\def\@bookpart[#1]#2{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \refstepcounter{part}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\protect\numberline{\thepart}#1}%
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \markboth{}{}%
+ {\interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont\partformat
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \partnumberformat{\thepart}%
+ \fi
+ \parttitleformat{#2}\par}%
+ \postparthook}
+\def\@sbookpart#1{%
+ {\interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont\partformat
+ \parttitleformat{#1}\par}%
+ \postparthook}
+\def\postparthook{\vfil\newpage
+ \if@twoside
+ \if@openright
+ \null
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \newpage
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@tempswa
+ \twocolumn
+ \fi}
+\newcommand\bookappendix{\par
+ \setcounter{table}{0}%
+ \setcounter{figure}{0}%
+ \zeroextracounters
+ \par
+ \gdef\theHchapter{\Alph {chapter}}%
+ \xdef\Hy@chapapp{\Hy@appendixstring}%
+ \setcounter{chapter}{0}%
+ \setcounter{section}{0}%
+ \gdef\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
+ \gdef\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}%
+ \csname appendixmore\endcsname
+}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrbookcommands}{%
+ \let\part\bookpart
+ \let\chapter\bookchapter
+ \let\appendix\bookappendix
+ \let\tableofcontents\booktableofcontents
+ \def\thesection{\thechapter.\arabic{section}}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrarticlecommands}{%
+ \let\part\artpart
+ \let\chapter\artchapter
+ \let\appendix\artappendix
+ \let\tableofcontents\arttableofcontents
+ \def\thesection{\arabic{section}}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\@jmlr@check@packages}{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{epsfig}{%
+ \ClassError{jmlr}{Obsolete package `epsfig' detected.
+ \MessageBreak
+ Please use \string\includegraphics\space to include images
+ instead}{}}{}%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{psfig}{%
+ \ClassError{jmlr}{Obsolete package `psfig' detected.
+ \MessageBreak
+ Please use \string\includegraphics\space to include images
+ instead}{}}{}%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{subfig}{%
+ \ClassError{jmlr}{Package `subfig' detected.\MessageBreak
+ This will cause a conflict if the article is incorporated
+ \MessageBreak
+ into a book using jmlbook.cls.
+ \MessageBreak
+ Please use \string\subfigure\space and
+ \string\subtable\space instead}{}}{}%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{theorem}{%
+ \ClassError{jmlr}{Package `theorem' detected.\MessageBreak
+ This can cause a conflict with other packages used by jmlr}{}}{}%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{pdfpages}{Package `pdfpages' detected.\MessageBreak
+ This can cause a problem for jmlrbook.}{}%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{geometry}{Package `geometry' detected.\MessageBreak
+ This can cause a problem for jmlrbook.}{}%
+}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\@jmlr@check@packages
+\let\@jmlr@check@packages\relax
+}
+\newcommand*{\jmlrSuppressPackageChecks}{%
+ \let\@jmlr@check@packages\relax
+}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `jmlr.cls'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/jmlr/jmlrbook.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/jmlr/jmlrbook.cls
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..38e051e4010
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/jmlr/jmlrbook.cls
@@ -0,0 +1,775 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `jmlrbook.cls',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% jmlr.dtx (with options: `jmlrbook.cls,package')
+%%
+%% jmlr.dtx
+%% Copyright 2010 Nicola Talbot
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license of (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%%
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot.
+%%
+%% This work consists of the files jmlr.dtx and jmlr.ins and the derived files jmlr.cls, jmlrbook.cls.
+%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%% First editor:
+%% Second editor:
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{jmlrbook}[2010/06/17 v1.06 (NLCT) JMLR Book Style]
+\RequirePackage{xkeyval}
+\newcommand*{\@prehyperref}{}
+\define@key{jmlrbook.cls}{prehyperref}{%
+ \renewcommand*{\@prehyperref}{#1}}
+\newif\ifgrayscale
+\grayscalefalse
+\DeclareOptionX{color}{\grayscalefalse}
+\DeclareOptionX{gray}{\grayscaletrue}
+\DeclareOptionX{html}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{jmlr}}
+\DeclareOptionX{nohtml}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{jmlr}}
+\DeclareOptionX{wcp}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{jmlr}}
+\DeclareOptionX{nowcp}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{jmlr}}
+\DeclareOptionX{tablecaptiontop}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{jmlr}}
+\DeclareOptionX{tablecaptionbottom}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{jmlr}}
+\ProcessOptionsX
+\@ifundefined{jmlrgrayscale}{}%
+{%
+ \ifnum\jmlrgrayscale=0\relax
+ \grayscalefalse
+ \else
+ \grayscaletrue
+ \fi
+}
+\let\@org@LoadClass\LoadClass
+\def\LoadClass#1{\let\LoadClass\@org@LoadClass\@org@LoadClass{jmlr}}
+\@org@LoadClass{combine}
+\RequirePackage{combnat}
+\renewcommand\c@laNAT@parse[1]{{%
+ \let\protect=\@unexpandable@protect\let~\relax
+ \let\active@prefix=\@gobble
+ \xdef\NAT@temp{\csname b@#1\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}}%
+ \expandafter\NAT@split\NAT@temp?????@@%
+ \expandafter\NAT@parse@date\NAT@date??????@@%
+ \ifciteindex\NAT@index\fi}
+
+\renewcommand\c@lbNAT@parse[1]{{%
+ \let\protect=\@unexpandable@protect\let~\relax
+ \let\active@prefix=\@gobble
+ \xdef\NAT@temp{\csname B?\jobname?@#1\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}}%
+ \expandafter\NAT@split\NAT@temp?????@@%
+ \expandafter\NAT@parse@date\NAT@date??????@@%
+ \ifciteindex\NAT@index\fi}
+\RequirePackage{setspace}
+\@prehyperref
+\usepackage[colorlinks,
+ linkcolor=blue,
+ citecolor=blue,
+ urlcolor=magenta,
+ linktocpage,
+ plainpages=false]{hyperref}
+\usepackage{nameref}
+\ifgrayscale
+ \hypersetup{draft}
+\fi
+\@twosidetrue
+\newif\if@openright
+\@openrighttrue
+\newif\if@mainmatter
+\newcommand*{\pagerule}[1][0pt]{\par\noindent
+ \rule[#1]{\linewidth}{2pt}\par}
+\newcommand*{\chapterrefname}{Chapter}
+\newcommand*{\chaptersrefname}{Chapters}
+\newcommand*{\chapterref}[1]{%
+ \objectref{#1}{\chapterrefname}{\chaptersrefname}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\articlepageref}[1]{%
+ \pageref{#1jmlrstart}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\articlepagesref}[1]{%
+ \pageref{#1jmlrstart}--\pageref{#1jmlrend}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\@articlepagesref}{%
+ \pageref{jmlrstart}--\pageref{jmlrend}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\articletitleref}[1]{\nameref{#1jmlrstart}}
+\newcommand*{\articleauthorref}[1]{%
+ \@ifundefined{@jmlr@author@#1}%
+ {%
+ \ClassWarning{jmlrbook}{Label `#1' undefined}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@nameuse{@jmlr@author@#1}%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\@parttoclabel}{part}
+\newcommand*{\@partapp}{\partname}
+\renewcommand*\jmlrtitlehook{%
+ \hypersetup{pdftitle={\@shorttitle}}%
+ \let\jmlrtitlehook\relax
+}
+\renewcommand*\jmlrauthorhook{%
+ \ifx\@sauthor\@empty
+ \hypersetup{pdfauthor={\@author}}%
+ \else
+ \hypersetup{pdfauthor={\@sauthor}}%
+ \fi
+ \let\jmlrauthorhook\relax
+ \let\@shortauthor\@empty
+}
+\newcommand*{\@volume}{\@jmlrvolume}
+\newcommand*{\volume}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@volume}{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\@issue}{\@jmlrissue}
+\newcommand*{\issue}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@issue}{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\thejmlrworkshop}{\@jmlrworkshop}
+\newcommand*{\@team}{}
+\newcommand*{\team}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@team}{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\@productioneditorname}{Production Editor}
+\newcommand*{\@productioneditor}{}
+\newcommand*{\productioneditor}[1]{%
+ \renewcommand*{\@productioneditor}{#1}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@productioneditorname}{Production Editor}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\productioneditors}[1]{%
+ \renewcommand*{\@productioneditor}{#1}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@productioneditorname}{Production Editors}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\@logo}{}
+\newcommand*{\logo}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@logo}{#1}}
+\def\c@lbmaketitle{\jmlrmaketitle}
+\newcommand*{\maintitle}{}
+\newcommand*{\SetTitleElement}[3]{%
+ {%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname @#1\endcsname\@empty
+ \else
+ #2\csname @#1\endcsname#3%
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand{\IfTitleElement}[3]{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname @#1\endcsname\@empty
+ #2%
+ \else
+ #3%
+ \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\titlebody}{%
+ \SetTitleElement{title}{\maintitlefont}{\postmaintitle}%
+ \SetTitleElement{volume}{\mainvolumefont}{\postmainvolume}%
+ \SetTitleElement{subtitle}{\mainsubtitlefont}{\postmainsubtitle}%
+ \SetTitleElement{logo}{\mainlogofont}{\postmainlogo}%
+ \SetTitleElement{team}{\mainteamfont}{\postmainteam}%
+ \SetTitleElement{author}{\mainauthorfont}{\postmainauthor}%
+ \SetTitleElement{productioneditor}{\mainproductioneditorfont}%
+ {\postmainproductioneditor}%
+}
+\ifjmlrhtml
+ \renewcommand{\c@lamaketitle}{%
+ \HCode{<table cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2" border="0" width="100\%">}%
+ \HCode{<tbody><tr><td valign="top">}%
+ \HCode{<h1>}%
+ \@title\newline
+ \ifx\@volume\@empty
+ \else
+ Volume \@volume
+ \ifx\@subtitle\@empty\else: \fi
+ \fi
+ \@subtitle
+ \HCode{</h1>}%
+ \newline
+ \textbf{Editors: \@author}
+ \HCode{</td><td valign="top">}%
+ \@logo
+ \HCode{</td></tr></tbody></table>}%
+ \let\maintitle\@title
+ }
+\else
+ \renewcommand{\c@lamaketitle}{%
+ \pagenumbering{alph}%
+ \pagestyle{empty}%
+ \begin{titlepage}%
+ \let\footnotesize\small
+ \let\footnoterule\relax
+ \let\footnote\thanks
+ \titlebody
+ \par
+ \@thanks
+ \end{titlepage}%
+ \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+ \let\maintitle\@title
+ \c@lmtitlempty
+ }
+\fi
+\renewcommand{\maintitlefont}{%
+ \null\vskip15pt\relax\par
+ \flushleft\Huge\bfseries\noindent}
+\renewcommand{\postmaintitle}{%
+ \par\relax
+}
+\newcommand{\mainvolumefont}{%
+ \flushleft\noindent\LARGE\bfseries Volume
+}
+\newcommand{\postmainvolume}{%
+ \IfTitleElement{subtitle}{}{:}\par\relax
+}
+\newcommand{\mainissuefont}{%
+ \flushleft\noindent\LARGE\bfseries Issue
+}
+\newcommand{\postmainissue}{%
+ \par\relax
+}
+\newcommand{\mainsubtitlefont}{%
+ \flushleft\LARGE\bfseries\noindent}
+\newcommand{\postmainsubtitle}{\par}
+\newcommand{\mainlogofont}{%
+ \vfill
+ \begin{center}}
+\newcommand{\postmainlogo}{\end{center}\vfill\par}
+\newcommand{\mainteamfont}{\flushleft\bfseries\Large\noindent}
+\newcommand{\postmainteam}{\par}
+\renewcommand{\mainauthorfont}{%
+ \flushleft\Large\itshape\doublespacing\noindent}
+\renewcommand{\postmainauthor}{%
+\par}
+\newcommand{\mainproductioneditorfont}{%
+ \flushleft\Large\noindent \@productioneditorname: \itshape}
+\newcommand{\postmainproductioneditor}{\par}
+\renewcommand{\maindatefont}{}
+\renewcommand{\postmaindate}{}
+\newenvironment{signoff}[2][The Editorial Team]{%
+ \def\Editor##1{\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}%
+ ##1%
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \par\vskip\baselineskip\noindent\ignorespaces
+ }%
+ \def\@editorialteam{#1}%
+ \def\@signoffdate{#2}%
+ \par\vskip\baselineskip\noindent
+ \ifx\@signoffdate\@empty
+ \else
+ \emph{\@signoffdate}\par
+ \vskip\baselineskip\noindent
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@editorialteam\@empty
+ \else
+ \@editorialteam:\par\vskip\baselineskip
+ \fi
+ \noindent\ignorespaces
+}{%
+}
+\newenvironment{authorsignoff}{%
+ \def\Author##1{\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}%
+ ##1%
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \par\vskip\baselineskip\noindent\ignorespaces
+ }%
+ \par\vskip\baselineskip\noindent\ignorespaces
+}{%
+}
+\renewcommand{\zeroextracounters}{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@theorem}{}{\setcounter{theorem}{0}}%
+ \@ifundefined{c@algorithm}{}{\setcounter{algorithm}{0}}%
+ \@ifundefined{c@example}{}{\setcounter{example}{0}}%
+}
+\renewcommand*{\contentsname}{Table of Contents}
+\def\theHalgorithm{\thechapter.\thealgorithm}
+\def\theHexample{\thechapter.\theexample}
+\def\theHtheorem{\thechapter.\thetheorem}
+\def\theHsection{\thechapter.\thesection}
+\def\theHsubsection{\thechapter.\thesubsection}
+\def\theHsubsubsection{\thechapter.\thesubsubsection}
+\def\theHparagraph{\thechapter.\theparagraph}
+\def\theHsubfigure{\thechapter.\thefigure.\thesubfigure}
+\def\theHsubtable{\thechapter.\thetable.\thesubtable}
+\renewcommand*{\mailto}[1]{%
+ \href{mailto:#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}%
+}
+\c@lhaschapterfalse
+\let\c@lthesec\thesection
+\newcommand\doimportchapterHref{%
+ \edef\@currentHref{chapter.\thechapter}%
+}
+\def\toclevel@appendix{-1}
+\def\Xprefix{}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Xref{\@ifstar\@Xrefstar\T@Xref}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Xpageref{%
+ \@ifstar\@Xpagerefstar\T@Xpageref
+}%
+\def\HyRef@StarSetXRef#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \Hy@safe@activestrue
+ \edef\x{#1}%
+ \@onelevel@sanitize\x
+ \edef\x{\endgroup
+ \noexpand\HyRef@@StarSetRef
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname r@\Xprefix\x\endcsname{\x}%
+ }%
+ \x
+}
+\def\@Xrefstar#1{%
+ \HyRef@StarSetXRef{#1}\@firstoffive
+}
+\def\@Xpagerefstar#1{%
+ \HyRef@StarSetXRef{#1}\@secondoffive
+}
+\def\T@Xref#1{%
+ \Hy@safe@activestrue
+ \expandafter\@setXref\csname r@\Xprefix#1\endcsname\@firstoffive{#1}%
+ \Hy@safe@activesfalse
+}%
+\def\T@Xpageref#1{%
+ \Hy@safe@activestrue
+ \expandafter\@setXref\csname r@\Xprefix#1\endcsname\@secondoffive{#1}%
+ \Hy@safe@activesfalse
+}%
+\def\Xlabel#1{%
+ \@bsphack
+ \begingroup
+ \@onelevel@sanitize\@currentlabelname
+ \edef\@currentlabelname{%
+ \expandafter\strip@period\@currentlabelname\relax.\relax\@@@
+ }%
+ \protected@write\@mainauxout{}{%
+ \string\newlabel{\Xprefix#1}{{\@currentlabel}{\thepage}%
+ {\@currentlabelname}{\@currentHref}{}}%
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+ \@esphack
+}
+\let\ltx@label\Xlabel
+\def\@setXref#1#2#3{% csname, extract group, refname
+ \ifx#1\relax
+ \protect\G@refundefinedtrue
+ \nfss@text{\reset@font\bfseries ??}%
+ \@latex@warning{%
+ Reference `#3' on page \thepage \space undefined%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\Hy@setref@link#1\@empty\@empty\@nil{#2}%
+ \fi
+}
+\AtBeginDocument{\renewcommand\@secondoffive[5]{#2}}
+\def\@setimportlabel{%
+ \let\@mainauxout\@auxout
+ \let\HRlabel\label
+}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@setimportlabel
+ \gdef\@setimportlabel{\let\ref\Xref \let\pageref\Xpageref}%
+ \let\ReadBookmarks\relax
+}
+\let\@org@InputIfFileExists\InputIfFileExists
+\newenvironment{jmlrpapers}{%
+ \begin{papers}[]
+ \jmlrarticlecommands
+ \let\importpubpaper\@importpubpaper
+ \let\importpaper\@importpaper
+ \let\importarticle\@importarticle
+ \let\label\Xlabel
+ \let\ref\Xref
+ \pagestyle{article}%
+}{%
+ \end{papers}
+}
+\newcommand{\addtomaincontents}[2]{%
+ \protected@write\@mainauxout{\let\label\@gobble\let\index\@gobble
+ \let\glossary\@gobble}{\string\@writefile{#1}{#2}}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\@write@author}[2]{%
+ \def\@jmlr@authors@sep{ and }%
+ \protected@write\@mainauxout{}{%
+ \string\@new@articleauthor{#1}{#2}%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\@new@articleauthor}[2]{%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname @jmlr@author@#1\endcsname{%
+ \hyperref[#1jmlrstart]{#2}}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\@write@jmlr@import}[3]{%
+ \protected@write\@mainauxout{}{\string\@jmlr@import{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\@jmlr@import}[3]{}
+\newcommand*{\@importpubpaper}[4][\@importdir\@importfile]{%
+ \bgroup
+ \def\@importdir{#2/}%
+ \def\@importfile{#3}%
+ \@write@jmlr@import{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def\@extra@b@citeb{#1}%
+ \def\@extra@binfo{#1}%
+ \jmlrpages{#4}%
+ \graphicspath{{\@importdir}}%
+ \def\jmlrmaketitlehook{%
+ \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+ \addtomaincontents{toc}%
+ {\protect\contentsline{papertitle}{\@shorttitle}{\thepage}%
+ {page.\thepage}}%
+ \pdfbookmark{\@shorttitle}{chapter.\thechapter}%
+ \def\@jmlr@authors@sep{ \& }%
+ \tocchapterpubauthor{\@jmlrauthors}%
+ {%
+ \@jmlrabbrvproceedings
+ \ifx\@jmlrvolume\@empty
+ \ifx\@jmlrpages\@empty\else\space\fi
+ \else
+ \space\@jmlrvolume
+ \ifx\@jmlrpages\@empty\else:\fi
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@jmlrpages\@empty
+ \else
+ \@jmlrpages
+ \ifx\@jmlryear\@empty\else,\fi
+ \fi
+ \space\@jmlryear
+ }%
+ \@write@author{#1}{\@jmlrauthors}%
+ }%
+ \def\jmlrpremaketitlehook{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \phantomsection
+ \let\@currentlabelname\@shorttitle
+ }%
+ \def\InputIfFileExists##1##2##3{%
+ \IfFileExists{##1}{%
+ \@org@InputIfFileExists{##1}{##2}{##3}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@org@InputIfFileExists{\@importdir##1}{##2}{##3}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \def\Xprefix{#1}%
+ \import{\@importdir\@importfile}%
+ \def\Xprefix{}%
+ \egroup
+ \gdef\@shortauthor{}%
+ \gdef\@shorttitle{}%
+ \gdef\@firstauthor{}%
+ \gdef\@jmlrauthors{}%
+ \gdef\@firstsurname{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\importpubpaper}[4][]{%
+ \ClassError{jmlrbook}{\string\importpubpaper\space
+not permitted outside `jmlrpapers' environment}{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\@importpaper}[3][\@importdir\@importfile]{%
+ \bgroup
+ \def\@importdir{#2/}%
+ \def\@importfile{#3}%
+ \@write@jmlr@import{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def\@extra@b@citeb{#1}%
+ \def\@extra@binfo{#1}%
+ \jmlrpages{\protect\@articlepagesref}%
+ \graphicspath{{\@importdir}}%
+ \def\jmlrmaketitlehook{%
+ \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+ \addtomaincontents{toc}%
+ {\protect\contentsline{papertitle}{\@shorttitle}{\thepage}%
+ {page.\thepage}}%
+ \pdfbookmark{\@shorttitle}{chapter.\thechapter}%
+ \def\@jmlr@authors@sep{ \& }%
+ \tocchapterpubauthor{\@jmlrauthors}%
+ {%
+ \@jmlrabbrvproceedings
+ \ifx\@jmlrvolume\@empty
+ \space
+ \else
+ \space\@jmlrvolume:%
+ \fi
+ \protect\articlepagesref{#1}%
+ \ifx\@jmlryear\@empty\else,\fi
+ \space\@jmlryear
+ }%
+ \@write@author{#1}{\@jmlrauthors}%
+ }%
+ \def\jmlrpremaketitlehook{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \phantomsection
+ \let\@currentlabelname\@shorttitle
+ }%
+ \def\InputIfFileExists##1##2##3{%
+ \IfFileExists{##1}{%
+ \@org@InputIfFileExists{##1}{##2}{##3}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@org@InputIfFileExists{\@importdir##1}{##2}{##3}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \def\Xprefix{#1}%
+ \import{\@importdir\@importfile}%
+ \def\Xprefix{}%
+ \egroup
+ \gdef\@shortauthor{}%
+ \gdef\@shorttitle{}%
+ \gdef\@firstauthor{}%
+ \gdef\@jmlrauthors{}%
+ \gdef\@firstsurname{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\importpaper}[3][]{%
+ \ClassError{jmlrbook}{\string\importpaper\space
+not permitted outside `jmlrpapers' environment}{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\@importarticle}[3][\@importdir\@importfile]{%
+ \bgroup
+ \def\@importdir{#2/}%
+ \def\@importfile{#3}%
+ \@write@jmlr@import{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def\@extra@b@citeb{#1}%
+ \def\@extra@binfo{#1}%
+ \def\jmlrmaketitlehook{%
+ \addtomaincontents{toc}%
+ {\protect\contentsline{papertitle}{\@shorttitle}{\thepage}%
+ {page.\thepage}}%
+ \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+ \pdfbookmark{\@shorttitle}{chapter.\thechapter}%
+ \def\@jmlr@authors@sep{ \& }%
+ \tocchapterauthor{\@jmlrauthors}%
+ \@write@author{#1}{\@jmlrauthors}%
+ \jmlrpages{}%
+ \jmlrvolume{}%
+ \jmlryear{}%
+ \jmlrsubmitted{}%
+ \jmlrpublished{}%
+ \jmlrproceedings{}{}%
+ }%
+ \def\jmlrpremaketitlehook{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \phantomsection
+ \let\@currentlabelname\@shorttitle
+ }%
+ \graphicspath{{\@importdir}}%
+ \def\InputIfFileExists##1##2##3{%
+ \IfFileExists{##1}{%
+ \@org@InputIfFileExists{##1}{##2}{##3}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@org@InputIfFileExists{\@importdir##1}{##2}{##3}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \def\Xprefix{#1}%
+ \import{\@importdir\@importfile}%
+ \def\Xprefix{}%
+ \egroup
+ \gdef\@shortauthor{}%
+ \gdef\@shorttitle{}%
+ \gdef\@firstauthor{}%
+ \gdef\@jmlrauthors{}%
+ \gdef\@firstsurname{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\importarticle}[3][]{%
+ \ClassError{jmlrbook}{\string\importarticle\space
+not permitted outside `jmlrpapers' environment}{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\addtocpart}[1]{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \refstepcounter{tocpart}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\tocpart{#1}}%
+ \pdfbookmark[-1]{#1}{part.\thetocpart}%
+}
+\newcounter{tocpart}
+\newcommand{\tocpart}[1]{%
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0ex \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{2.25em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \large\bfseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss \null}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+}
+\setlength{\prechapterskip}{3em}
+\setlength{\postchapterskip}{20pt}
+\renewcommand{\chapternumberformat}[1]{%
+ \Large\bfseries \@chapapp\space#1\par
+}
+\renewcommand{\chaptertitleformat}[1]{%
+ \Large\bfseries #1}
+\renewcommand*{\chapterformat}{%
+ \raggedright
+}
+\renewcommand{\preparthook}{\cleardoublepage\null\vfil}
+\renewcommand{\partnumberformat}[1]{%
+ \Huge\bfseries \@partapp\nobreakspace#1\par\nobreak
+ \vskip 20\p@
+}
+\def\postparthook{%
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \vfil\newpage
+ \null
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \newpage
+}
+\newcommand{\@curparthead}{}
+\renewcommand{\parttitleformat}[1]{#1%
+ \gdef\@curparthead{\@partapp\space \thepart. #1}%
+ \@mkboth{\@curparthead}{\@curparthead}%
+}
+\renewcommand{\firstpageno}[1]{}
+\newcommand{\tocchapterauthor}[1]{%
+ \addtomaincontents{toc}{\protect\contentsline{chapterauthor}{%
+ #1}{}{}}%
+}
+\newcommand{\tocchapterpubauthor}[2]{%
+ \addtomaincontents{toc}{\protect\contentsline{chapterauthor}{%
+ #1; #2.}{}{}}%
+}
+\renewcommand*\@pnumwidth{2em}
+\renewcommand*\l@part[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{5em}%
+ \vbox{%
+ \pagerule
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \large\bfseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ \renewcommand*\numberline[1]{\hb@xt@ \@tempdima
+ {\partname\space ##1\hfil }}%
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss }\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+ \pagerule
+ }%
+ \fi}
+\newcommand*{\l@papertitle}[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{3em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \leavevmode \raggedright\itshape
+ #1\nobreak\hfill \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss
+ \normalfont#2}%
+ \par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+}
+\newcommand*\l@chapterauthor[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \raggedright
+ #1%
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+\renewcommand*\l@section[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{3em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \normalsize\mdseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+\renewcommand*\l@subsection[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{3.5em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \normalsize\mdseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+\renewcommand*{\chaptermark}[1]{%
+ \@mkboth{\@curparthead}{\protect\thechapter. #1}%
+}
+\newcommand{\firstpagehead}{}
+\newcommand{\firstpagefoot}{\hfill\thepage}
+\renewcommand*{\headfont}{\reset@font\small\scshape}%
+\renewcommand*{\footfont}{\reset@font\small\itshape}%
+\newcommand*{\ps@chplain}{%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \renewcommand*{\@oddhead}{\headfont\firstpagehead}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@evenhead}{}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@oddfoot}{\footfont\firstpagefoot}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@evenfoot}{\footfont\thepage\hfill
+ }%
+}
+\let\ps@plain\ps@chplain
+\newcommand*{\ps@article}{%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \renewcommand*{\@oddhead}{\headfont\hfill\@shorttitle}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@evenhead}{\headfont\@shortauthor\hfill}%
+ \renewcommand*{\@oddfoot}{\footfont\hfill\thepage}
+ \renewcommand*{\@evenfoot}{\footfont\thepage\hfill}
+}
+\newcommand*{\ps@jmlrbook}{%
+ \ps@headings
+ \renewcommand*{\sectionmark}[1]{}%
+}
+\renewcommand*{\morefrontmatter}{\pagestyle{jmlrbook}%
+ \def\chaptermark##1{%
+ \@mkboth{##1\hfill}{\hfill##1}}%
+}
+\renewcommand*{\moremainmatter}{\pagestyle{jmlrbook}%
+ \def\chaptermark##1{%
+ \@mkboth{\@curparthead}{\protect\thechapter. ##1}%
+ }%
+}
+\renewcommand*\bibsection{\section*{\refname}}
+\def\@bookpart[#1]#2{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \refstepcounter{part}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{\@parttoclabel}{%
+ \protect\numberline{\thepart}#1}%
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{\@parttoclabel}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \markboth{}{}%
+ {\interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont\partformat
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \partnumberformat{\thepart}%
+ \fi
+ \parttitleformat{#2}\par}%
+ \postparthook}
+\jmlrbookcommands
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `jmlrbook.cls'.
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
index 0f8bf9069be..e8993409a08 100755
--- a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ my @TLP_working = qw(
interactiveworkbook intro-scientific inversepath
ionumbers iopart-num iso
iso10303 isodate isodoc isomath isonums isorot isotope itnumpar iwona
- jablantile jeopardy jknapltx jneurosci jpsj junicode
+ jablantile jeopardy jknapltx jmlr jneurosci jpsj junicode
jura juraabbrev jurabib juramisc jurarsp js-misc
kalender kastrup kerkis kerntest
keycommand keystroke kix kixfont
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-publishers.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-publishers.tlpsrc
index 560434383d7..2a77c13c301 100644
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-publishers.tlpsrc
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-publishers.tlpsrc
@@ -35,6 +35,7 @@ depend ijmart
depend imac
depend imtekda
depend jhep
+depend jmlr
depend jpsj
depend kluwer
depend lps
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/jmlr.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/jmlr.tlpsrc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e69de29bb2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/jmlr.tlpsrc